JP6656591B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine, various effects are performed for the purpose of improving the interest of the game. For example, a gaming machine that displays a moving image on a display device such as a liquid crystal screen and outputs music corresponding to the moving image from a speaker is known (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2011-172988 A

  In the above-described gaming machines, further technical improvements are desired for the purpose of enhancing the interest in the games.

  SUMMARY An advantage of some aspects of the invention is to solve at least a part of the problems described above, and the invention can be implemented as the following embodiments.

[Form]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition,
Determining means for determining whether the obtained special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
Notifying means for sequentially notifying the result of the determination by the determining means as to whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition for each game,
When the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, a special game state start unit that starts a special game state in which a bonus is granted to a player after a game round related to the special information that satisfies the predetermined condition,
Effect execution means for executing an effect,
Opening and closing means capable of performing an opening and closing operation, in which a game ball can enter in an open state,
A gaming machine comprising:
The opening and closing means,
The opening and closing operation may be performed a predetermined number of times in the special game state,
The effect executing means,
The special information related to the first game time satisfies the predetermined condition, and the special information related to the second game time executed after the first game time does not satisfy the predetermined condition. In the first case, a special effect is performed in which a continuous effect is performed between a game time executed before the first game time and the first game time, and a special effect is executed after the first game time. In the gaming state, before the start of the second game round executed immediately after the opening / closing means ends the predetermined number of opening / closing operations, the game cycle executed before the first game cycle and the game cycle executed before the start of the second game cycle are started. A case in which at least a part of the continuous effect executed in the first game round is displayed again;
When the special information related to the first game time satisfies the predetermined condition and the special information related to the second game time satisfies the predetermined condition, the first game A continuous effect is performed between the game time executed before the first game time and the first game time, and a period after the special game state executed after the first game time, In the game time executed before the second game time and the second game time, the game time executed before the first game time and the first game time There is a case where at least a part of the executed continuous production is displayed again,
In the second case, a time length obtained by adding a game time executed before the first game time and the first game time, and a time length before the second game time Even if the time length of the game times to be executed is different from the total time of the second game times, at least a part of the continuous effect can be displayed again. A gaming machine.

  According to the gaming machine of the above embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the symbol and the display surface 41a which are variably displayed in the symbol display device. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the contents of various counters. It is an explanatory view showing a success / failure table stored in a success / failure table storage area. It is an explanatory view showing the contents of the distribution table set in the pachinko machine. It is a time chart explaining an example of processing which a pachinko machine performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a suggestion effect, a specific end effect, and a specific start effect. It is a timing chart which shows an example of processing which a pachinko machine performs in a standby state. 10 is a timing chart illustrating an example of a process in a case where a return condition is satisfied after the volume of background music has become zero and before display of a demonstration moving image has started. 9 is a timing chart illustrating an example of processing when a return condition is satisfied while the volume of background music is being reduced. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process for a starting opening. It is a flowchart which shows a first judgment process. It is a flow chart which shows winning processing for through. It is a flowchart which shows a normal process. It is a flow chart which shows a game times control processing. It is a flowchart which shows a data setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a change start process. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of a fluctuation time. It is a flowchart which shows a game state transition process. It is a flowchart showing a special winning opening opening and closing process. It is a flowchart which shows a condition determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an ending time setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the transfer process at the time of the end of an ending period. It is a flowchart which shows the process for electric role support. It is a flow chart which shows electric opening and closing control processing. It is a flowchart which shows a process for standby. FIG. 2 is a block diagram mainly showing an electrical configuration of a sound emission control device and a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in a sound side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows a command correspondence process. It is a flowchart which shows a start command correspondence process. It is a flowchart which shows a hold command correspondence process. It is a flowchart which shows the update process at the time of a prize. It is a flowchart which shows an effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the update process at the time of a change start. It is a flowchart which shows an opening effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an ending effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a standby state shift process. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed in the MPU of the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a command interrupt process executed in the MPU of the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a V interrupt process executed in the MPU of the display control device. It is a flowchart which shows a command correspondence process. It is a time chart which shows the processing which a pachinko machine in a 2nd embodiment performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the aspect of a display of the symbol display device at the time of performing a suggestion effect in a preceding game time. It is a time chart which shows processing which a pachinko machine in a 3rd embodiment performs. It is a time chart which shows the processing which a pachinko machine in a 4th embodiment performs. It is an explanatory view showing the outline of the setting processing of the effect type. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an object A that is an object image. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an object B that is an object image. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an object C that is an object image. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a display pattern table for an object A. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an arrangement / timing setting table. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a notice effect in which a plurality of objects are combined. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of an effect type. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline | summary of the setting process of the effect type in 6th Embodiment. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a display object table. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing an AC display pattern table. It is an explanatory view showing a notice effect when a display pattern (A1-A2 / C1-C2-C3) is set. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display pattern table for A. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a display pattern table for B. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display pattern table for C. It is explanatory drawing which shows AB display pattern table. It is an explanatory view showing a notice effect when a display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2-B3) is set. It is an explanatory view showing a notice effect when a display pattern (A1-A2-A3 / B1) is set. It is an explanatory view showing a notice effect when a display pattern (A1-A2-A3 / B1-B2-B3) is set. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display pattern table for BC. It is an explanatory view showing a notice effect when a display pattern (B2-B3 / C1-C3) is set. It is an explanatory view showing a notice effect when a display pattern (B2-B3 / C1) is set. It is an explanatory view showing a notice effect when a display pattern (B1 / C1-C2-C3) is set. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display pattern table for ABC. It is an explanatory view showing a notice effect when a display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) is set. It is an explanatory view showing a notice effect when a display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2 / C1-C2-C3) is set. It is an explanatory view showing a notice effect when a display pattern (A1-A2-A3 / B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) is set. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the effect type in 6th Embodiment. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a sequel effect performed as a reach effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the object D which can be used for a notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the image (object D + image E) which combined the image E with the object D. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachinko machine in a 7th embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of processing when the RTC effect start condition is satisfied while the symbol display device is displaying the background moving image. It is a timing chart which shows an example of processing when a RTC effect start condition is satisfied while the symbol display device is displaying a demonstration moving image. It is a timing chart which shows an example of processing when a shift condition is satisfied while the symbol display device is displaying an RTC effect moving image. It is a timing chart which shows an example of processing when a return condition is satisfied while the symbol display device is displaying an RTC effect moving image. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in the sound light side MPU of 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for RTC effect performed in the sound light side MPU of 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the standby state shift process performed in the sound light side MPU of 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command corresponding process performed in the display side MPU of 7th Embodiment.

An embodiment of a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described in the following order with reference to the drawings.
A. First embodiment:
A1. Gaming machine structure:
A2. Electrical configuration of gaming machine:
A3. Overview of processing by gaming machine:
A4. Overview of processing in standby state:
A5. Various processes executed in main controller:
A6. Electrical configuration of the sound emission control device and the display control device:
A7. Various processes executed in the sound emission control device and the display control device:
B. Second embodiment:
C. Third embodiment:
D. Fourth embodiment:
E. FIG. Fifth embodiment (example of effect type setting process):
F. Sixth embodiment (another example of the effect type setting process):
G. FIG. Seventh Embodiment (Configuration with RTC):
H. Modification:
I. Regarding the inventions extracted from the above embodiments, etc .:

A. First embodiment:
A1. Gaming machine structure:
FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, also referred to as a “pachinko machine”) as one embodiment of the present invention. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 combined in a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island facilities of the game hall. Further, the pachinko machine 10 includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. The pachinko machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged on a front surface of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by the metal hinge 15 with respect to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13. On the back of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened with respect to the outer frame 11 and a function of locking the front door frame 14 so that it cannot be opened with respect to the inner frame 13. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

  At an approximate center of the front door frame 14, an open window 18 is formed. Around the window 18 of the front door frame 14, resin parts and electric parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The illuminated component is configured by light emitting means including various lamps such as LEDs. The light emitting means plays a role of increasing the effect by lighting or blinking at each game time, big hit winning, reach occurrence, etc. performed by the pachinko machine 10. On the back side of the front door frame 14, a glass unit 19 made of two glass sheets is disposed, and the opened window 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board to be described later is detachably attached to the inner frame 13, and a player of the pachinko machine 10 can visually recognize the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 19. Details of the game board will be described later.

  The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper plate 20 and a lower plate 21 for storing game balls. The upper plate 20 is formed in a box shape having an open upper surface, and stores game balls such as lent balls lent from a lending machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12. The game balls stored in the upper plate 20 are supplied to a game ball firing mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. The game ball firing mechanism is driven by the operation of the operation handle 25 by the player, and fires the game balls supplied from the upper plate 20 to the front of the game board. The lower plate 21 is disposed below the upper plate 20 and is formed in a box shape having an open upper surface. The lower plate 21 stores game balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 20. A discharge port 22 for discharging game balls stored in the lower plate 21 is formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 21. A lever 23 is provided below the outlet 22, and the player can operate the lever 23 to switch between the closed state and the open state of the outlet 22. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, game balls fall from the discharge port 22, and the game balls are discharged from the lower plate 21 to the outside.

  An effect operation button 24 is provided in front of the periphery of the upper plate 20 as operation receiving means. The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation on a game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the staging operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, a game effect in which the operation is reflected is performed by the pachinko machine 10.

  Further, an operation handle 25 for a player to operate is provided on the right side of the front door frame 14 in a front view. When the player operates the operation handle 25, a game ball is fired from the game ball firing mechanism to the front of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, a touch sensor for permitting the driving of the game ball firing mechanism, a weight button for stopping the game ball firing mechanism from firing the game ball by pressing operation by the player, and a rotation of the operation handle 25. And a variable resistor for detecting a dynamic operation amount based on a change in electric resistance. When the player grips the operation handle 25, the touch sensor is turned on, and when the player rotates the operation handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, A game ball is fired from the game ball firing mechanism to the front of the game board with an intensity corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor.

  Next, the configuration of the back of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A control device for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is disposed on the back of the pachinko machine 10.

  FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. As illustrated, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, and a third control unit 53. Specifically, these mechanism parts are provided on the back surface of the inner frame 13.

  The first control unit 51 includes a main control device 60. The main control device 60 has a main control board having a function of controlling a main game control and a function of monitoring a power supply. The main control board is housed in a board box made of a transparent resin material.

  The second control unit 52 includes a sound emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The sound light emission control device 90 controls light emission means such as a speaker and various lamps provided on the front of the pachinko machine 10 based on a command transmitted from the main control device 60. The display control device 100 controls the symbol display device based on the command transmitted from the audio light emission control device 90. The symbol display device includes a liquid crystal display that displays symbols and images for effects.

  The third control unit 53 includes a payout control device 70 and a firing control device 80. The payout control device 70 performs payout control for paying out prize balls. The launch control device 80 is configured to launch a game ball having a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player when an instruction to launch a game ball is input from the main control device 60. Controls the ball firing mechanism. In addition, on the back of the inner frame 13, there is a tank 54 to which game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a slope that is connected below the tank 54 and is gently inclined so that the game balls flow downstream. , A case rail 56 vertically connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 55, a supply of game balls from the case rail 56, and payout of a predetermined number of game balls according to an instruction from the payout control device 70. A plurality of devices required for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as the payout device 71, are provided.

  Next, the gaming board will be described. The game board is detachably attached to the front of the inner frame 13.

  FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on the front surface thereof. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of an outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding a game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. The game ball fired from the game ball firing mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and discharged to the upper part of the game area PA, and thereafter flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and each accessory such as a windmill is provided. These nails 42 and windmills disperse and arrange the falling directions of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

  A plurality of openings penetrating in the front-back direction are formed in the game board 30. In each opening, a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning device 36 are provided. Further, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display section 45. The main display unit 45 has a special figure unit 37, a general-purpose unit 38, and a round display unit 39.

  As shown in the drawing, a plurality of general winning openings 32 are provided on the game board 30. In this embodiment, when a game ball wins in the general winning opening 32, ten game balls are paid out from the payout device 71 as prize balls.

  The first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 are both open upward, and are arranged in a vertical direction such that the first starting port 33 is higher than the second starting port 34. In the present embodiment, when a game ball wins in the first starting port 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls. The second starting port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a including a pair of left and right movable pieces. When the electric accessory 34a is in the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the second starting port 34. On the other hand, when the electric accessory 34a is in the open state, the game ball can win the second starting port 34. In the present embodiment, when a game ball wins in the second starting port 34, four game balls are paid out as prize balls. Note that an out port 43 is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 30, and game balls not winning any of the various winning ports are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 43.

  The through gate 35 has a through hole penetrating in the vertical direction. When the game ball wins the through gate 35, that is, when the game ball passes through the through-hole of the through gate 35, the main controller 60 performs an internal lottery (power-operated accessory opening lottery) using the winning as a trigger. As a result of the internal lottery, when the electrification opening is won, the electric auditors product 34a shifts to the electrification opening state which is opened in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is arranged on the upstream side of the second starting port 34 with respect to the flowing direction of the game ball, the game ball that has won the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after the winning and the second ball. It is possible to win the starting port 34. In the present embodiment, even if a game ball wins the through gate 35, the payout of the prize ball is not executed.

  The variable winning device 36 has a large winning opening 36a communicating with the back side of the game board 30 and an opening / closing door 36b for opening and closing the large winning opening 36a. The opening / closing door 36b is normally in a closed state where a game ball cannot enter the big winning opening 36a. As a result of the internal lottery (big hit lottery) by the main control device 60, when a big win is won and the mode is shifted to the open / close execution mode, the open / close door 36b repeats the open state and the closed state where the game ball can win. The opening / closing execution mode shifts to a case where a jackpot is won as a result of a jackpot lottery by the main control device 60 triggered by a prize to the first opening 33 or the second opening 34, and the opening / closing door 36b is opened. This is a mode that repeats the closed state. In other words, as a result of the jackpot lottery based on the winning in the first starting port 33, when the jackpot is won, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode in which the winning in the jackpot 36a of the variable winning device 36 becomes possible. Similarly, as a result of the jackpot lottery based on the winning in the second starting port 34, even when a jackpot is won, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode in which the variable winning device 36 can win the big winning port 36a. In the present embodiment, when a game ball wins in the special winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36, the payout device 71 pays out 15 game balls as prize balls.

  The special figure unit 37 includes a first result display section 37a and a second result display section 37b. Each of the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b is configured by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner. When a jackpot lottery triggered by a prize at the first opening 33 is performed, the first result display unit 37a displays a variable display or a variable display as a display mode until the segment display unit performs a display corresponding to the lottery result. A predetermined display is performed. When the lottery is completed, the first result display unit 37a causes the segment display to display a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

  When a jackpot lottery triggered by winning at the second starting port 34 is performed, the second result display unit 37b displays a variable display or a variable display as a display mode until the segment display unit performs a display corresponding to the lottery result. A predetermined display is performed. When the lottery is completed, the second result display unit 37b causes the segment display to display a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

  The special figure unit 37 further includes, at positions adjacent to the first result display portion 37a and the second result display portion 37b, a first hold display portion 37c and a second hold display portion 37d made of LED lamps. In the present embodiment, up to four game balls that have won the first starting port 33 are reserved. The first hold display section 37c displays the number of held first startup ports 33 by the color or combination of the LED lamps to be turned on. In the present embodiment, up to four game balls that have won the second starting port 34 are reserved. The second hold display section 37d displays the number of held second start-up ports 34 by the color or combination of the LED lamps to be turned on.

  The general-purpose unit 38 includes a light-emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the winning combination at the through gate 35 is triggered, the general-purpose unit 38 causes the light-emitting display to display in a light-on display, a blinking display, or a predetermined display, when the motor-powered character opening lottery is performed. When the motor-operated accessory opening lottery ends, the general-purpose unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result. Note that the special figure unit 37 and the general figure unit 38 are not limited to being constituted by a segment display or a light emitting display using an LED lamp. For example, a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, a CRT, or a dot matrix display For example, it may be constituted by various display devices capable of displaying the lottery result and the lottery result.

  The round display section 39 is configured by a light emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games that occur in the open / close execution mode, or displays corresponding thereto. The round game means that a predetermined upper limit duration time elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls wins the variable prize device 36 until one of the conditions is satisfied. This is a game in which the open state of 36b is continued. The number of round games differs depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the shift. The round display section 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the open / close execution mode is started, and ends when the open / close execution mode ends and a new game start is started.

  The variable display unit 40 is disposed substantially at the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 includes a symbol display device 41. The symbol display device 41 is configured by a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display. The display content of the symbol display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. Note that the symbol display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be configured by various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, and a CRT.

  When the first result display unit 37a performs the variable display or the predetermined display based on the winning in the first starting port 33, the symbol display device 41 performs the variable display or the predetermined display of the symbol accordingly. In addition, when the second result display unit 37b performs the variable display or the predetermined display based on the winning in the second starting port 34, the symbol display device 41 performs the variable display or the predetermined display of the symbol accordingly. . The symbol display device 41 performs not only the display effect triggered by winning in the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 but also a display effect in the opening / closing execution mode which shifts when a jackpot is won. Hereinafter, details of the symbol display device 41 will be described.

  FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a symbol and a display surface 41 a that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. FIG. 4A is an explanatory diagram showing a symbol that is variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. As shown in FIG. 4A, symbols 1 to 8 are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. In addition, you may employ | adopt the design which added the design of the character etc. to each design which shows number 1-8 as a design displayed by change.

  FIG. 4B is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display surface 41 a of the symbol display device 41. As shown in the figure, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed on the display surface 41a: left, middle, and right. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the symbols of numbers 1 to 8 shown in FIG. 4A are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers, and each symbol row is periodically arranged from top to bottom or from bottom to bottom. A variable display scrolling upward is performed. As shown in FIG. 4B, after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed on the activated line L in a stopped state. Specifically, when a game ball wins in the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, a variable display in which the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 scroll periodically in a predetermined direction is started. Then, the symbols to be scrolled are switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3, and the symbol row Z2, and finally a predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. . When the symbol change display is terminated and the stop display is performed, and when the result of the jackpot lottery by the main control device 60 is a jackpot winning, a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed on the activated line L. It is formed. For example, the same combination of symbols is formed on the effective line L. In addition, the mode of the variable display of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-described mode, and the number of symbol columns, the number of active lines, the direction of the variable display of the symbol in the symbol column, the symbol of each symbol column. Various modes can be adopted as the mode of variable display of symbols, such as the number.

  Here, the game time is one unit of a process of notifying a player of a lottery result of a jackpot lottery with respect to special information obtained based on winning of either the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. It is. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the result of one jackpot lottery for one piece of special information for each game. When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires the special information based on the winning of either the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, the first result display part 37a or the second result is displayed every game time. After one of the display units 37b displays the segment display fluctuating, the segment display is stopped and displayed so as to be a display corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Further, when the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires the special information based on the winning of either the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, a predetermined value is displayed on the symbol display device 41 every game time. After the symbol row is variably displayed, the symbol row is stopped and displayed so as to be a display corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information. The time required for one game round is also called a unit game time. The unit game time is constituted by a fluctuating time which is a time from when the fluctuating display is started until a predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and a stop time which is a time when the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. I have.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 4B, a first hold display area Ds1 and a second hold display area Ds2 are displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. In the first holding display area Ds1, the number of holdings based on winning in the first starting port 33 is displayed. In the second holding display area Ds2, the number of holdings based on winning in the second starting port 34 is displayed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the number of suspended game balls that have won the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is up to four each.

A2. Electrical configuration of gaming machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to a block diagram.

  FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 10 mainly includes a main control device 60, and also includes a sound emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 configured by elements having a plurality of functions. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 in which various control programs and fixed value data are recorded, and a RAM 64 which is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the programs recorded in the ROM 63. The MPU 62 further includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. Note that a part of the function of the MPU 62 may be provided in another element. The details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 will be described later.

  The main control board 61 is provided with an input port and an output port. On the input side of the main control board 61, various detection sensors 67a to 67e, a payout control device 70, and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in the power supply device 85 are connected. The main control board 61 receives the supply of DC stable 24 V power from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86. The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power supply as an external power supply, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power supply into necessary operating power by the main control device 60, the dispensing control device 70, and the like, and supplies the necessary power to each device. Supply power. The main control board 61 is provided as various detection sensors 67a to 67e at various winning ports such as a general winning port 32, a first starting port 33, a second starting port 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning device 36. Connected to a plurality of detection sensors. The main-side MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not a game ball flowing down the game area PA during a game has won each winning port. Further, the MPU 62 executes a jackpot lottery based on winning in the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34, and executes an electric accessory opening lottery based on a winning in the through gate 35.

  On the output side of the main control board 61, a variable winning drive unit 36c for opening and closing the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36, and an electric accessory driving unit 34b for opening and closing the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34. , And the main display unit 45. The main control board 61 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

  Specifically, in the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the variable winning drive unit 36c so that the open / close door 36b is opened / closed. Further, as a result of the election for opening the electrical accessory, when the election to open the electrical accessory is won, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electrical accessory driving unit 34b so that the electrical accessory 34a is opened. In each game round, the MPU 62 controls the display of the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b on the main display unit 45, and in the open / close execution mode, the round display unit 39 on the main display unit 45. Is executed.

  A payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the transmission side of the main control board 61. To the payout control device 70, for example, a prize ball command is transmitted from the main control device 60 based on a winning determination result. When the main control device 60 transmits the prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63. Specifically, when a winning in the general winning opening 32 is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and the winning in the first starting opening 33 is specified. In this case, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and when a prize to the second starting port 34 is specified, it corresponds to the payout of one game ball. The prize ball command is transmitted from main controller 60. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60 to pay out a prize ball. A firing control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70. The launch control device 80 controls the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 81. The game ball firing mechanism 81 is driven when a predetermined firing condition is satisfied.

  The sound emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60 and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When transmitting various commands, main controller 60 refers to command information storage area 63f of ROM 63. Details of these various commands will be described later.

  In addition, based on various commands received from the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90 controls driving of various lamps 47 including light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front door frame 14, and control of driving of the speaker 46. Is performed, and the display control device 100 is controlled. Further, the sound emission control device 90 is connected to the effect operation button 24, and when the effect operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, a game effect reflecting the operation is performed. It controls various lamps 47, speakers 46, the display control device 100, and the like.

  The display control device 100 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90. Specifically, based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90, the display control device 100 grasps the variation time of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 and the type of the combination of symbols to be finally stopped and displayed. , The presence or absence of the reach, the contents of the reach effect, and the contents of the notice effect to be executed in each game time are grasped. In the present embodiment, the stop time during which the symbol combination is stopped and displayed is constant. Therefore, by determining the fluctuation time, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game round, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

  FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the contents of various counters used for a jackpot lottery and the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 performs a jackpot lottery, sets the display of the main display unit 45, sets the symbol display of the symbol display device 41, and the like. Specifically, a jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the jackpot lottery. The big hit type counter C2 is used to determine the big hit type such as the probability change big hit result and the normal big hit result. A reach random number counter C3 is used for a reach lottery to determine whether or not to generate a reach when a symbol row displayed on the symbol display device 41 is shifted and fluctuated.

  A random number initial value counter CINI is used for setting an initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. In addition, a variation type counter CS is used when determining the variation time in the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b of the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 41. Further, an electric accessory opening counter C4 is used in an electric accessory opening lottery for determining whether or not the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is to be opened.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 64 a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64.

  The RAM 64 is provided with a suspended information storage area 64b. The hold information storage area 64b includes a first hold area Ra, a second hold area Rb, an execution area AE, and a total hold number storage area. When the game balls sequentially enter the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, the respective values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 at the timing of the winning are time-sequentially stored in the hold information storage area 64b. Is stored.

  The details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the jackpot lottery as described above. The jackpot random number counter C1 is configured, for example, to increment by 1 in the range of 0 to 599, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. When the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599).

  The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the hold information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. Specifically, the updated value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball has won the first starting port 33, and the game ball is stored in the second starting port 34. Is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of winning. The value of the random number for winning the jackpot is stored as a hit / fail table in a hit / fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63.

  FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the hit / fail table stored in the hit / fail table storage area 63a. In the pachinko machine 10, a low-probability mode and a high-probability mode are set as a lottery mode of a jackpot lottery. FIG. 7A shows a hit / fail table for the low probability mode, and FIG. 7B shows a hit / fail table for the high probability mode. As shown in FIG. 7A, in the gaming state in which the winning / losing table for the low-probability mode is referred to at the time of the jackpot lottery, there are two random number values that can win the jackpot. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 7 (b), in the gaming state in which the winning or losing table for the high probability mode is referred to at the time of the jackpot lottery, the number of the random numbers which is the jackpot winning is 20 pieces. The value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the low probability mode is included in the value group of the jackpot random counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the high probability mode. The number and value of random numbers to be won are arbitrary as long as the winning probability in the high probability mode is higher than in the low probability mode.

  Next, details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining a jackpot type such as a probability change jackpot or a normal jackpot. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by one in order within the range of 0 to 29, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is updated periodically, and is stored in the hold information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. More specifically, the game information is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b (RAM 64) at the timing when the game ball wins in the first starting port 33, and the holding information is stored at the timing when the game ball wins in the second starting port 34. It is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the storage area 64b (RAM 64).

Here, the jackpot type in the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, by providing a difference between the following three modes or modes, a plurality of types of jackpots can be set.
(1) Mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode (2) Lottery mode of the jackpot lottery after the end of the opening / closing execution mode (3) of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the end of the opening / closing execution mode Support mode

  In the pachinko machine 10, as an aspect of the opening / closing control of the variable prize device 36 in the (1) opening / closing execution mode, the frequency of occurrence of prizes to the variable prize device 36 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode. The high frequency winning mode and the low frequency winning mode can be set so that is relatively high and low. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, the opening and closing of the opening and closing door 36b is performed 15 times from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode, and one opening is performed until 30 seconds elapse or the number of winnings to the opening and closing door 36b is 10 times. It can be set to continue until the number is reached. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening and closing of the opening and closing door 36b is performed twice from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode, and one opening is performed until 0.2 seconds elapse or the number of winnings to the opening and closing door 36b. Can be set to continue until there are six.

  When the operation handle 25 is operated by the player, the game ball firing mechanism 81 is drive-controlled so that one game ball is fired toward the game area PA in 0.6 seconds. In the case of the above specific example, in the low frequency prize mode, one open time of the open / close door 36b is 0.2 sec. That is, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of one opening / closing door 36b is shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball. Therefore, in the opening / closing execution mode related to the low frequency prize mode, the prize of the game ball does not substantially occur. However, even in the opening / closing execution mode related to the low frequency winning mode, it may be set so that a winning of the game ball can occur.

  The number of times of opening and closing of the opening / closing door 36b, the opening limit time for one opening, and the opening limit number for one opening are determined by the winning in the variable prize device 36 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode. Is higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening mode of the opening / closing door 36b is arbitrary. Specifically, if the high frequency winning mode has a larger number of times of opening and closing than the low frequency winning mode, the opening limit time for one opening is longer or the opening limit number for one opening is set to be larger. Good. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, a configuration may be adopted in which no winning occurs in the variable winning device 36 in the open / close execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode.

  In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of the (2) jackpot lottery mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode, a probability change lottery mode in which a jackpot lottery is performed using a hit / fail table for a high probability as a hit / fail table, A normal lottery mode in which a jackpot lottery is performed using the low probability winning / failure table can be set. As described with reference to FIG. 7, when the jackpot lottery is performed using the high-probability winning / decreasing table, the jackpot is determined as compared with the case where the jackpot lottery is performed using the low-probability winning / decreasing table. High probability of doing.

  In the pachinko machine 10, as the mode of the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the end of the opening / closing execution mode (3), the launch of the game ball is continued in the same manner with respect to the game area PA. The high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode are configured such that the frequency of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 being opened per unit time is relatively high or low when compared in the situation where Can be set.

  Specifically, in the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electrification opening in the electric auditors character lottery using the electric accessory opening counter C4 is the same, but in the high-frequency support mode, The number of times the electric accessory 34a is opened when the electrification is released may be set to be larger than that in the low frequency support mode, and one opening time may be set longer. Further, in the case where the electric utility opening is elected in the high frequency support mode and the open state of the electric accessory 34a occurs a plurality of times, the closing time from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state is It may be set shorter than one open time. Further, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum securing time set after performing one electric-powered-object opening lottery and then performing the next electric-powered-object opening lottery is set shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. You may.

  As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability that the winning in the second starting port 34 will occur is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. That is, the high-frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary game state that assists in establishing the conditions for acquiring special information.

  In the low frequency support mode, there is a higher probability that a prize will occur in the first startup port 33 than in the second startup port 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the winning to the second startup port 34 is more advanced than in the first startup port 33. The probability of winning is increased. When a prize is generated in the second starting port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. In the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of balls held. Can be.

  Note that the configuration in which the high frequency support mode is set to the state in which the electric utility is opened per unit time more frequently than the low frequency support mode is not limited to the above-described configuration. It may be configured to increase the probability of winning the role. In addition, in a configuration in which a plurality of types of securing times are secured after one electric-power-use-opening lottery is performed and then the next electric-powered-object opening lottery is performed, a low-frequency support mode is used in the high-frequency support mode. A setting may be made such that a shorter securing time is easier to select or an average securing time is shorter than in the support mode. Further, increasing the number of times of opening, lengthening the opening time, and shortening the securing time secured after one electric-power-operated goods opening lottery is performed after the one electric-powered goods opening lottery is performed. Even if the average time of the securing time is shortened and the winning probability is increased, by applying any one or any combination of conditions, the advantage of the high frequency support mode with respect to the low frequency support mode is increased. Good.

  As described above, a plurality of types of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery, a plurality of jackpot types are sorted using the jackpot type counter C2. The distribution destination of the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.

  FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the distribution table set in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 8A shows the distribution table for the first starting port, and FIG. 8B shows the distribution table for the second starting port.

  As shown in the distribution table for the first starting port in FIG. 8A, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as the jackpot type based on the first starting port 33, a 16R positive variable jackpot, an 8R positive variable jackpot, 16R normal Jackpot, 8R normal jackpot is set.

  In the 16R probability changing jackpot and the 8R probability changing jackpot, the opening / closing control mode of the variable prize device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is a high frequency winning mode, the winning / rejecting lottery mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode is the high probability mode, and the opening / closing execution mode. Is a jackpot in which the support mode after the end of is the high frequency support mode.

  For the 16R normal jackpot and the 8R normal jackpot, the opening / closing control mode of the variable prize device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is a high frequency winning mode, the success / failure lottery mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode is the low probability mode, and the opening / closing execution mode Is a jackpot in which the support mode after the end of is the high frequency support mode.

  In the distribution table for the first opening, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 39”, “0 to 13” corresponds to the 16R certain jackpot, and “14 to 27” corresponds to the 8R regular jackpot. "28-33" corresponds to the 16R normal jackpot, and "34-39" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, four types of jackpots are set as jackpot types. Therefore, the jackpot mode is diversified. When the four types of jackpots are compared, the degree of advantage for the player is 16R probable jackpot the highest, 8R probable jackpot the next highest, then 16R normal jackpot, and finally 8R normal jackpot. By setting a plurality of types of jackpots having different degrees of advantage for the player in this manner, the monotony of the game is suppressed, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

  Next, as shown in the distribution table for the second starting port in FIG. 8B, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as the jackpot type based on the second starting port 34, a 16R positive variable jackpot and an 8R positive variable jackpot. Is set. In the distribution table for the second starting opening, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 39”, “0 to 27” corresponds to the 16R probability variable jackpot, and “28 to 39” corresponds to the 8R probability variable jackpot. It corresponds to. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, all jackpots based on winning in the second starting port 34 are probable variable jackpots. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won, the distribution mode of the jackpot type is the case where the jackpot is won based on the prize to the first starting port 33 and the second jackpot. This is different from the case where the jackpot is won based on the winning in the starting port 34.

  As described above, in the distribution mode of the jackpot type between the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34, a clear difference is provided in the advantage for the player. Therefore, the player plays the game while expecting a winning to occur in the second starting port 34 out of the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34. If the result of the winning / rejecting lottery is off, the mode does not shift to the opening / closing execution mode, and no change occurs in the winning / rejecting lottery mode and the support mode.

  As described above, the MPU 62 performs the jackpot lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and performs the jackpot classification using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. Further, the MPU 62 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to stop and display the segment display on the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b. Determine the display mode. In making the determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to.

  Next, details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one, for example, in the range of 0 to 238 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is updated periodically, and is stored in the hold information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the first starting port 33 or the second starting port. Specifically, the updated value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first holding area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball has won the first starting port 33, and at the timing when the game ball has won the second starting port 34. The updated value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the second holding area Rb of the RAM 64. Then, after the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first hold area Ra or the second hold area Rb is moved to the execution area AE, the reach determination value stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 is stored. It is checked against the table to determine whether or not to generate reach. However, as a result of the jackpot lottery, when the jackpot is won and the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 determines the occurrence of the reach regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

  Reach means that, for some of the symbol rows among the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, some of the symbol combinations corresponding to the jackpot may be stopped. This is a display state in which the symbols are displayed in that state, and the symbols are changed and displayed in the remaining symbol columns. The combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment refers to a combination of identical symbols in a predetermined activated line. Specifically, on the display surface 41a of FIG. 4B, the symbol is first stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z1, and then the same symbol as Z1 is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z3, thereby forming a reach line. In the situation where the reach line is formed, the reach is achieved by performing the variable display of the symbols in the symbol row Z2. Then, when a big hit occurs, the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z2.

  In addition, in the reach, in the state where the reach line is formed, while performing the fluctuation display of the symbols in the remaining symbol row, and performing a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the background screen, The combination of the design in which the reach line is formed is reduced or not displayed, and a reach effect is displayed by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a. In addition, when a reach effect is performed or before a reach display, a determination as to whether or not to perform a preview display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character is performed using a reach random number counter C3 or another counter. You may.

  Next, details of the variation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is configured to be added one by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The change type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the change time in the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b and the change time of the symbol in the symbol display device 41. The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time a normal process described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. The buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired at the time of starting the variation display on the first result display section 37a or the second result display section 37b and at the time of determining the variation pattern at the time of starting the symbol variation by the symbol display device 41. When determining the variation time in the first result display section 37a and the second result display section 37b, the variation time table stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is used.

  Next, details of the electric accessory opening counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory opening counter C4 has a configuration in which, for example, one is added in order within a range of 0 to 249, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is updated periodically, and is stored in the electric utility holding area 64c of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state using the stored value of the electric accessory open counter C4. For example, if C4 = 0 to 199, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to be open, and if C4 = 200 to 249, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to be closed.

  In addition, a combination of one set of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first holding area Ra corresponds to the holding information related to the first starting port 33, and the second holding area Rb The combination of one set of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first embodiment corresponds to the hold information related to the second starting port 34, and these hold information is the special information in the present invention. Equivalent to.

A3. Overview of processing by gaming machine:
Next, an outline of a process executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 9 is a time chart illustrating an example of a process executed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment. In the present description, the features of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 will be described using two cases, case a1 and case a2, as examples.

  FIG. 9A shows a case a1 in which a jackpot lottery is won in the first game round (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “big hit”), and in the second game round executed after the first game round, the jackpot is won. This shows the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 when the lottery is not selected. In the present embodiment, the case where the jackpot lottery of the game time immediately before the first game time is out of place, and there is no other game time between the first game time and the second game time Give an explanation. In addition, another game time may exist between the first game time and the second game time. The processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 when another game time exists between the first game time and the second game time will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 9A, when the jackpot lottery is won in the first game round, the pachinko machine 10 executes a notice effect and a reach effect. The announcement effect is an effect that is executed immediately before or after the start of the change of the symbol, and is an effect for indicating to the player the degree of expectation to win the jackpot lottery. The reach effect is an effect that is performed after the reach, and is an effect that indicates to a player the degree of expectation of winning a jackpot lottery. After executing the reach effect, the pachinko machine 10 executes a result notification effect of notifying the player of the result of the jackpot lottery relating to the first game round to the player. In the first game round, a jackpot is announced as a result announcement effect.

  Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 shifts the gaming state to the special gaming state. The special game state is a state in which a privilege is given to a player. As illustrated, the pachinko machine 10 executes an opening effect, an opening / closing execution mode, and an ending effect in a special game state. The pachinko machine 10 performs an effect indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is started as the opening effect. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 executes an opening / closing execution mode in which the opening / closing door 36b is repeatedly opened and closed. During the execution period of the opening and closing execution mode, a predetermined effect for the opening and closing execution mode is executed. After the end of the opening / closing execution mode, the pachinko machine 10 executes an ending effect. As shown in FIG. 9A, in this description, a period for executing an ending effect is referred to as an ending period.

  Here, the pachinko machine 10 performs a suggestion effect, a special game state reproduction effect, and a specific end effect during the ending period. The suggestion effect is an effect that suggests that the effect already performed is to be reproduced. In the present embodiment, the suggestion effect is an effect having a content suggesting that the notice effect, the reach effect, and the result notification effect selected and executed from a plurality of types in the first game round are reproduced. The special game state reproduction effect is an effect for reproducing at least a part of the effect already executed in the special game state.

  FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a suggestive effect, a specific end effect, and a specific start effect described later. 10A shows a suggestion effect, FIG. 10B shows a specific end effect, and FIG. 10C shows a specific start effect. The suggestion effect shown in FIG. 10A is an effect indicating that the female character reproduces the effect performed in the first game round, that is, the notice effect, the reach effect, and the result notification effect.

  As shown in FIG. 9A, after the pachinko machine 10 performs the suggestion effect in the ending period, the special effect state reproduction effect includes the notice effect, the reach effect, and the result effect effect performed in the first game round. Reproduce and execute. In the present embodiment, as the special game state reproduction effect, the notice effect, the reach effect, and the result announcement effect performed in the first game time are reproduced. However, the notice effect, the reach effect, or the result performed in the first game time. Only a part of the announcement effect may be reproduced. For example, when performing a notice effect, a reach effect and a result announcement effect as a special game state reproduction effect, the reach effect and the result announcement effect are preferentially reproduced, and a part or all of the advance effect is omitted and executed. Is also good. By omitting a part or all of the announcement effect that is normally performed at high frequency during normal times, by giving priority to the reach effect and the result announcement effect (bonanza announcement) that are executed only at the time of the reach or the jackpot, The special game state reproduction effect can be executed by focusing on the effect that strongly desires reproduction, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the case where the symbol variation display and the stop display are reproduced and executed as the special game state reproduction effect, the contents of the symbol displayed on the display surface 41a during the execution of the special game state reproduction effect are actually displayed in the first game round. The content of the design is partially different.

  After executing the special game state reproduction effect, the pachinko machine 10 executes a specific end effect. FIG. 10B shows an example of the specific end effect. As shown in the figure, the specific end effect in the present embodiment is an effect having a content indicating that the special play state reproduction effect has been completed by the female character.

  The description returns to FIG. The pachinko machine 10 ends the ending period and the special game state with the end of the specific end effect. After that, the second game round is executed. The jackpot lottery related to the second game round is missed. In the second game round, the pachinko machine 10 executes a normal announcement effect (also referred to as an ordinary announcement effect) for announcing the result of the jackpot lottery and a result announcement effect (missing announcement). The case a1 has been described above.

  Next, the case a2 will be described. FIG. 9B shows, as a case a2, a process executed by the pachinko machine 10 when the jackpot lottery is won in the first game round and the jackpot lottery is also won in the second game round. .

  As shown in FIG. 9B, when the jackpot lottery is won in the first game round, the pachinko machine 10 executes a notice effect and a reach effect. Then, after executing the reach effect, the pachinko machine 10 executes a result notification effect of notifying a player of a lottery result of the jackpot lottery relating to the first game round. In the first game round, a jackpot is announced as a result announcement effect.

  Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 shifts the gaming state to the special gaming state. As illustrated, the pachinko machine 10 executes an opening effect, an opening / closing execution mode, and an ending effect in a special game state. The pachinko machine 10 performs an effect indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is started as the opening effect. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 executes an opening / closing execution mode in which the opening / closing door 36b is repeatedly opened and closed. After the end of the open / close execution mode, the pachinko machine 10 performs an ending effect in the ending period.

  In the case a2, unlike the case a1, the pachinko machine 10 executes only the suggestion effect in the ending period. The content of the suggestion effect is the same as the content of the suggestion effect executed in case a1. The pachinko machine 10 ends the special game state with the end of the suggestion effect. That is, the ending period in case a2 is shorter than the ending period in case a1.

  The pachinko machine 10 ends the special game state with the end of the suggestion effect. After that, the second game round is executed. In case a2, the jackpot is also won in the second game round. The pachinko machine 10 executes a game time reproduction effect as an effect in the second game time. The game time reproduction effect is an effect that reproduces at least a part of the effect already executed in the game time. In the present embodiment, the effect performed in the first game time is reproduced as the game time reproduction effect. That is, the announcement effect, the reach effect, and the result announcement effect (big hit announcement) executed in the first game round are executed. In this case, the result announcement effect (big hit announcement) has a function as a part of the game time reproduction effect and also has a function as a result announcement about the second game time jackpot lottery. Then, the second game time is ended with the end of the game time reproduction effect.

  As will be described later with reference to a flowchart, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the number of games won in the jackpot lottery is constant. That is, in the case a2, the first game time and the second game time are both game times that have won the jackpot lottery, and thus the fluctuation time of the first game time and the fluctuation of the second game time The time is the same. Therefore, the announcement effect, the reach effect, and the result announcement effect executed in the first game time can be executed as the game time reproduction effect in the second game time.

  In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the game times won in the jackpot lottery is controlled to be constant, but the fluctuation time of the game times won in the jackpot lottery is set by using a random number. The fluctuation time of the game times at the time of the big hit may be different every time. In this case, when the second game time is longer than the first game time, at the start of the second game time, the time of the difference between the respective fluctuation times of the second game time and the first game time A suggested effect prepared in advance may be performed using (excess time). By preparing a plurality of types of suggestion effects for each length of surplus time, even if the surplus time differs each time, the suggestion effect can be executed at the start of the second game round. The suggestion effect performed using the surplus time is executed after the suggestion effect performed in the special game state after the first game round. Therefore, the suggestion effect to be executed in the special game state and the suggestion effect to be executed by using the surplus time are set such that the content of the suggestion effect to be executed by using the surplus time is set so as to have continuity. Is also good. In this way, even when the second game time is longer than the first game time, the game time reproduction effect can be executed in the second game time without giving a sense of incongruity to the player.

  In addition, when the second game time is shorter than the first game time, only a part of the preview effect, the reach effect, and the result notification effect executed in the first game time are executed as the game time reproduction effect. It may be. For example, when performing a notice effect, a reach effect, and a result announcement effect as a game effect reproduction effect, the reach effect and the result announcement effect are preferentially reproduced, and a part or all of the notice effect is omitted to reproduce the game effect. May be executed. By omitting a part or all of the announcement effect that is normally performed at high frequency during normal times, by giving priority to the reach effect and the result announcement effect (bonanza announcement) that are executed only at the time of the reach or the jackpot, It is possible to preferentially reproduce an effect that strongly desires reproduction.

  As shown in FIG. 9B, after the end of the second game round, the pachinko machine 10 shifts the gaming state to the special gaming state. The pachinko machine 10 executes a specific start effect in the opening effect in the special game state. The specific start effect is executed as an opening effect in a special game state when the jackpot lottery relating to the second game time is a win and the game time reproduction effect is executed in the second game time.

  FIG.10 (c) has shown an example of the specific start effect. The specific start production shown in the figure is a production suggesting that the female character has won the jackpot lottery in the second game round, and the special game state (opening and closing) due to the jackpot in the second game round. Execution mode). After executing the specific start effect, the pachinko machine 10 executes the opening / closing execution mode and the ending effect. In this case, the effect performed in the opening / closing execution mode and the ending effect (normal ending effect) are effects performed at the time of a normal jackpot. The normal ending effect executed as the ending effect is an effect indicating that the special game state ends.

  The processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 has been described above using two cases, case a1 and case a2. As described in the case a1, in the case where the jackpot lottery relating to the second game time is out of order, the notice effect, the reach effect, and the result notification effect executed after the suggestion effect are executed in the first game time. It is executed as a special game state reproduction effect for reproducing the effect, and the player also recognizes that the effect is to reproduce the effect already executed. On the other hand, as in case a2, when the jackpot lottery relating to the second game time has been won, the notice effect, the reach effect, and the result announcement effect performed after the suggestion effect have already been executed on the effect. It is performed as an effect that reproduces the effect that has been performed, but is actually a game time reproduction effect that is executed due to winning in the jackpot lottery related to the second game time. If the player has previously watched the special game state reproduction effect in the case a1, the player performs the game time reproduction effect in the second game time of the case a2 in the first game time as in the case a1. It is difficult to predict that the winning has been won in the jackpot lottery relating to the second game round, while recognizing that this is merely a reproduction of the effect. In such a state, after the notice effect and the reach effect have been executed in the second game time, the player is notified by the result notification effect that the jackpot lottery related to the second game time has been won. For the first time, the notice effect, the reach effect, and the result notification effect executed in the second game time are not reproductions of the effect performed in the mere first game time, but the second game time. Recognize that the game has been executed as a result of winning the jackpot lottery pertaining to the round. As described above, by executing the special game state reproduction effect in the case a1 and the game time reproduction effect in the case a2, the game is provided with an unexpectedness, and at least a part of the effect performed in the first game time is reproduced. This can give the player a sense of expectation. Further, by making the second game round in the case a2 an unexpected development of the player, the player can be surprised and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, in case a2, it is suggested that the announcement effect, the reach effect, and the result announcement effect executed in the first game time are reproduced even though the jackpot in the second game time has been won. Since the suggested effect is executed, it is more difficult for the player to expect that the player has won the jackpot lottery related to the second game round. Therefore, surprisingness can be given to the game.

  Also, as in the case a2, when the notice effect, the reach effect, and the result notification effect executed in the first game time are reproduced as they are and executed in the second game time, the result announcement effect in the second game time is executed. Even if it is done, there is a possibility that the player does not notice that he has won the jackpot lottery in the second game round, but after the end of the second game round, the specific start effect is executed in the special game state. At the point in time when the specific start effect is executed, the player can be made aware that the jackpot lottery in the second game has been won.

A4. Overview of processing in standby state:
Next, an outline of processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment in a standby state will be described. The standby state is a state after the game round has ended, and refers to a state in which neither the special game state nor the next game round has been started.

  FIG. 11 is a timing chart illustrating an example of a process performed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment in a standby state. FIG. 11 shows a state diagram indicating whether or not the symbol displayed on the main display unit 45 is changing, the display mode of the symbol display device 41, and the output of the audio output from the audio emission control device 90. The content and the audio output level (volume) are shown. FIG. 11 shows the ON / OFF state of the standby state flag in the main control device 60, the ON / OFF state of the transition condition establishment flag in the main control device 60, and the cueing determination flag in the sound emission control device 90. ON and OFF states are shown. These flags will be described later.

  A number such as “01” described in the display mode of the symbol display device 41 indicates a temporal position of the moving image data, and “01” indicates a head position of the moving image data. The temporal position of the moving image data is the position of the moving image data corresponding to each time of the moving image displayed with the temporal length, and is the temporal position of the moving image when the moving image data is captured by the temporal length. This is the position of the corresponding moving image data. As the time position of the moving image data, for example, a time code recorded in the moving image data can be used. In the present embodiment, when the moving image data of the background moving image is displayed to the temporal position of “30”, the moving image data returns to the temporal position of “01” and is displayed from the beginning.

  A number such as “01” described in the audio output content indicates a temporal position of the music data, and “01” indicates a head position of the music data. The temporal position of the music data is the position of the music data corresponding to each time of the music output with the temporal length, and is the temporal position of the music when the musical data is captured by the temporal length. This is the position of the corresponding music data. As the time position of the music data, for example, a time code recorded in the music data can be used. In the present embodiment, when the music data of the background music is output to the temporal position of “30”, the music data returns to the temporal position of “01” again and is output from the beginning.

  The display control device 100 displays the background moving image on the symbol display device 41 in the game round in which the display corresponding to the result of the jackpot lottery is performed, and also displays the background moving image on the symbol display device 41 even in a standby state after the game round ends. Is displayed continuously. The background moving image is a moving image displayed on the background side of the symbol in the symbol display device 41. When the image or the moving image such as the above-described notice effect or the reach effect is displayed, the background moving image is displayed on the background side of the image or the moving image. Is displayed. The background moving image according to the present embodiment is a moving image in which a character dances to the rhythm of background music described later.

  The sound emission control device 90 causes the background music (BGM: Background Music) corresponding to the background moving image described above to be output from the speaker 46 at the game time, and also outputs the background music from the speaker 46 in the standby state after the game time ends. Is output continuously. In the present embodiment, the background music is music that is continuously output corresponding to the background moving image, and has the same temporal length as the background moving image. Therefore, in the present embodiment, for example, the background music at the temporal position “10” is output at the timing when the background moving image at the temporal position “10” is displayed, thereby displaying the background moving image and the rhythm of the background music. And an effect corresponding to one to one is realized.

  As shown in FIG. 11, when the game round ends, that is, when the symbol change on the main display unit 45 stops, the main control device 60 turns on the standby state flag (time t1). Then, after 15 seconds have elapsed without any of the special game state or the next game time being started after the symbol change in the main display unit 45 is stopped and the standby state is established, That is, when 15 seconds have elapsed since the standby state flag was turned ON, it is determined that the transition condition has been satisfied, the transition condition satisfaction flag is turned ON, and the standby state flag is turned OFF (time t2).

  The transition condition is to change the output mode of the sound from the mode in which the background music is output at a volume preset by the player to the mode in which the volume of the background music is zero (mute state), and This is a condition for shifting the display mode from the mode displaying the background video to the mode displaying the demo video. That is, when the transition condition is satisfied, the audio output mode shifts to an aspect in which the continuity of the background music is interrupted, and the display mode of the symbol display device 41 shifts to an aspect in which the continuity of the background moving image is interrupted. . The demonstration moving image (demonstration moving image) is a moving image different from the background moving image, and is a moving image for conveying the appeal of the pachinko machine 10 to the player. For example, in the demonstration movie, the model name of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed, a game method of the pachinko machine 10 is described, and characters and stories appearing in the pachinko machine 10 are described. Note that the demonstration moving image may be called an attract moving image.

  As illustrated in FIG. 11, when the transition condition is satisfied at time t2, the sound emission control device 90 changes the sound output mode to a mode in which background music is output at a volume preset by the player (time t2). ), The volume of the background music is reduced (fade out) as time passes while the output of the background music is continued (the mode from time t2 to time t3). The mode is shifted to a certain mode (a mode after time t3). In the present embodiment, the sound emission control device 90 continues to output the background music until 5 seconds elapse after the volume of the background music becomes zero, and after the volume of the background music becomes zero, At the timing when 5 seconds have elapsed (time t4), the output of the background music is stopped. In the example shown in FIG. 11, the volume set in advance by the game ball is the maximum volume.

  When the transition condition is satisfied, the display control device 100 transitions the display mode of the symbol display device 41 to a mode in which the demonstration moving image is displayed 5 seconds after the background music volume becomes zero (time t4). The sound emission control device 90 turns on the cueing determination flag at the timing when the display of the demonstration moving image is started (time t4). The cueing determination flag is a flag for determining whether or not to start displaying and outputting the background moving image and the background music from the temporal start position “01” when a return condition described later is satisfied. is there. In this embodiment, the cueing determination flag indicates that the audio output mode has shifted to a mode in which the continuity of the background music has been cut off, and the display mode of the symbol display device 41 has changed to a mode in which the continuity of the background moving image has been cut off. It is turned ON when the operation is shifted to.

  After the transition condition is satisfied, the main control device 60 sets the return condition when the game ball enters the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 and the game time (variable display of symbols) is started. It is determined that the condition has been satisfied, and the transition condition satisfaction flag is turned off. The return condition is that the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is returned to the mode of displaying the background moving image, and the output mode of the audio is returned to the mode in which the background music is output at a volume preset by the player. Condition.

  As shown in FIG. 11, if the return condition is satisfied after the volume of the background music becomes zero and after the display of the demonstration moving image is started (time t5), the cueing determination flag is set. Is ON, the display control device 100 and the sound emission control device 90 execute the cueing process of the background moving image and the background music. Specifically, the display control device 100 returns the display mode of the symbol display device 41 from the mode of displaying the demonstration video to the mode of displaying the background video. Then, when displaying the background moving image on the symbol display device 41, the display control device 100 starts displaying the background moving image from the temporal start position “01”. The sound emission control device 90 executes a process of returning the volume of the background music to the volume set in advance by the player and, when outputting the background music, outputs the background music from the temporal start position “01” of the background music. To start. Therefore, the display and output of the background moving image and the background music are both started from the temporal start position.

  Note that the sound emission control device 90 can output a plurality of types of background music, and performs cueing processing (processing of starting music output or moving image display from the temporal start position “01”) for background music and background moving images. ) Is executed, the type of the background music to be subjected to the cueing process is randomly selected by lottery, and the display control device 100 displays a plurality of types of background moving images corresponding to the plurality of types of background music. A configuration is possible in which display is possible and a cueing process is performed by selecting a background moving image corresponding to the selected background music. With such a configuration, a plurality of types of background music and background moving images can be viewed by the player, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  FIG. 12 is a timing chart showing an example of a process when the return condition is satisfied after the volume of the background music has become zero and before the display of the demonstration moving image is started. As shown in FIG. 12, when the return condition is satisfied after the volume of the background music becomes zero and before the display of the demonstration moving image is started (time t4), the cueing determination flag is set. Is OFF, the display control device 100 continues the mode of displaying the background moving image on the symbol display device 41, and the sound emission control device 90 returns the volume of the background music to the volume set in advance by the player. Execute In this way, the display mode and the sound output mode of the symbol display device 41 return to the mode before the transition condition is satisfied.

  FIG. 13 is a timing chart illustrating an example of a process when the return condition is satisfied while the volume of the background music is being reduced. As shown in FIG. 13, when the return condition is satisfied while the volume of the background music is being reduced (time t3), the cueing determination flag is OFF, and the display control device 100 The mode of displaying the moving image is continued, and the sound emission control device 90 executes a process of returning the volume of the background music to the volume set in advance by the player. In this way, the display mode and the sound output mode of the symbol display device 41 return to the mode before the transition condition is satisfied.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, after the volume of the background music becomes zero and when the return condition is satisfied after the display of the demonstration moving image is started (FIG. 11), The display control device 100 returns the display mode of the symbol display device 41 from the mode of displaying the demonstration video to the mode of displaying the background video. Then, when displaying the background moving image on the symbol display device 41, the display control device 100 starts displaying the background moving image from a predetermined time position. Further, the sound emission control device 90 executes a process of returning the volume of the background music to the volume set in advance by the player, and when outputting the background music, from the predetermined time position of the background music. Start output. Therefore, the display of the background moving image and the output of the background music can be easily synchronized, as compared with a configuration in which the temporal position at which the display of the background moving image is started according to the timing at which the return condition is satisfied. As a result, the quality of the game effect can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, as a configuration in which the temporal position at which the display of the background moving image is started varies according to the timing at which the return condition is satisfied, for example, when the return condition is satisfied after the display of the demonstration moving image is started, the demo moving image is displayed. When the display of the background moving image is started from the temporal position of the background moving image displayed at the timing immediately before shifting to the displaying mode, or when returning from the mode of displaying the demo moving image to the mode of displaying the background moving image, A configuration in which the temporal position of the background moving image to start displaying is determined based on the elapsed time after shifting to the mode of displaying the demonstration moving image, after shifting from the mode of displaying the background moving image to the mode of displaying the demo moving image , The background video playback is continued as internal processing, and when returning from the mode of displaying the demo video to the mode of displaying the background video, it is continued as internal processing. Configuration, and the like to display the background video that is playing Te.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, after the volume of the background music becomes zero and when the return condition is satisfied after the display of the demonstration moving image is started (FIG. 11), the display control device 100 Starts display from the temporal start position "01" of the background moving image, and the sound emission control device 90 starts output from the temporal start position "01" of the background music. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort given to the player as compared with a configuration in which the display of the background moving image is started at a position in the middle of time and the output of the background music is started at a position in the middle of time. For example, if a configuration is adopted in which display is started from a position in the middle of the background moving image in time and output is started from a position in the middle of the background music in time, after the return condition is satisfied, Since the user views the background moving image and the background music from a position in the middle of time, he / she may feel uncomfortable or feel unsatisfactory that there is a portion of the background moving image and the background music that has not been watched. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the background video and the background music can be watched from the temporal start position by the player, so that the uncomfortable feeling given to the player can be reduced, It is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction that all of the background moving image and the background music can be viewed from the temporal start position. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, if the return condition is satisfied after the volume of the background music becomes zero and before the display of the demonstration moving image is started (FIG. 12), the display control is performed. The device 100 continues to display the background moving image on the symbol display device 41, and the sound emission control device 90 executes the process of returning the volume of the background music to the volume set in advance by the player. While maintaining the synchronization between the display and the output of the background music, it is possible to return to the mode before the transition condition is satisfied without a sense of incongruity with a natural flow.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, when the return condition is satisfied while the volume of the background music is being reduced (FIG. 13), the display control device 100 continues to display the background moving image on the symbol display device 41. Since the sound emission control device 90 performs the process of returning the volume of the background music to the volume set in advance by the player, the transition condition is satisfied while maintaining the synchronization between the display of the background moving image and the output of the background music. It is possible to return to the mode before the operation without a sense of incongruity with a natural flow.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, it is determined that the transition condition is satisfied when 15 seconds have elapsed without any of the special game state and the next game time being started after the game time has ended. In a state in which there is a high possibility that the player is not playing a game, the volume of the background music can be reduced over time.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, when the game round is started in the standby state, it is determined that the return condition is satisfied, and the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is returned to the mode of displaying the background moving image, and the voice mode is changed. Since the output mode returns to the mode in which background music is output at a volume set in advance by the player, the sense of expectation that the game has been started can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

A5. Various processes executed in main controller:
Next, an example of specific control for executing the processing shown in the case a1 and the case a2 in the pachinko machine 10 will be described. The processing executed in the main control device 60 will be described first, and then the processing executed in the audio light emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

  In order to advance the game of each game round, the main MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes a timer interrupt process and a normal process. The MPU 62 executes an NMI interrupt process started by input of a power failure signal in addition to the timer interrupt process and the normal process, but the description of these processes will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is started periodically (for example, at a period of 2 msec) by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  In step S101, a reading process of the various detection sensors 67a to 67e is performed. That is, the state of the various detection sensors 67a to 67e connected to the main controller 60 is read, the state of the sensors is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored. After that, it advances to step S102.

  In step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S103.

  In step S103, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory opening counter C4 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory opening counter C4, and when each counter value reaches the maximum value, Clear to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S104.

  In step S104, a winning process for the starting port is executed in accordance with the winning of the first starting port 33 and the second starting port. The details of the winning process for the starting port in step S104 will be described later. After executing step S104, the process proceeds to step S105.

  In step S105, a prize-for-through process associated with a prize to the through gate 35 is executed. Details of the winning processing for through in step S105 will be described later. After executing step S105, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt processing.

<Winning prize processing>
Next, the winning process for the starting port will be described. The winning opening process for the starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (S104 in FIG. 14).

  FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the winning process for the starting port. In step S201, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won the first starting port 33 (start winning) based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first starting port 33. If it is determined in step S201 that the game ball has won the first starting port 33 (S201: YES), the process proceeds to step S202, in which the payout control device 70 pays out three game balls. Is set. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S203.

  In step S203, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the gaming ball has won the first starting port 33. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S204.

  In step S204, a start reserved number RaN (hereinafter, also referred to as a first reserved start number RaN), which is a value stored in the reserved number storage area of the first reserved area Ra, is read, and the first reserved start number RaN will be described later. Set as the target of processing. The first start reserved number RaN indicates the reserved number based on winning in the first start port 33. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S209.

  If it is determined in step S201 that the game ball has not won the first starting port 33 (S201: NO), the process proceeds to step S205, where it is determined whether the game ball has won the second starting port 34. The determination is made based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting port 34.

  If it is determined in step S205 that the game ball has won the second starting port 34 (S205: YES), the process proceeds to step S206, and a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out four game balls. Is set. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S207. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S205 that the game ball has not won the second starting port 34 (S205: NO), the winning processing for the main starting port ends.

  In step S207, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the gaming ball has won the second starting port 34. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S208.

  In step S208, the start suspension number RbN (hereinafter, also referred to as the second start suspension number RbN), which is a value stored in the suspension number storage area of the second suspension area Rb, is read, and the second start suspension number RbN will be described later. Set as the target of processing. The second start reserved number RbN indicates the reserved number based on winning in the second start port 34. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S209.

  In step S209, it is determined whether or not the number N (RaN or RbN) of suspension of starting set in step S204 or step S208 described above is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment). If it is determined in step S209 that the number N of start-reserved items is not less than the upper limit value (S209: NO), the winning process for the starting port is terminated.

  On the other hand, in step S209, if the number N of start-up suspensions is less than the upper limit value (S209: YES), the process proceeds to step S210, where 1 is added to the number N of start-up suspensions of the corresponding suspension area, and then the process proceeds to step S211. , 1 is added to the value stored in the total reserved number storage area (hereinafter referred to as the total reserved number CRN). The total pending number CRN indicates the total value of the first starting pending number RaN and the second starting pending number RbN. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S212.

  In step S212, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 (FIG. 14) are stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the corresponding reservation area, that is, in step S212. In S210, the value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the suspended number obtained by adding 1. Specifically, when the first start pending number RaN is set as a processing target, each of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 (FIG. 14) is set. The value is stored in the first storage area of the free storage areas of the first reservation area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start reservation number RaN obtained by adding 1 in step S210. If the second start pending number RbN is set as a processing target, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 (FIG. 14) are It is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the second suspension area Rb, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start suspension number RbN obtained by adding 1 in step S210. After executing step S212, the process proceeds to step S213.

  In step S213, a first determination process is performed. The first determination process is based on information (reservation information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, and a jackpot lottery success / failure determination result (lottery result), a jackpot type, and occurrence of reach. This is a process for determining whether or not there is a request before the hold information is subjected to the jackpot lottery by the main control device 60. Details of the first determination process will be described later. After executing step S213, the process proceeds to step S214.

  In step S214, processing for setting a hold command is executed. Specifically, the determination result of the first determination process executed based on the information (holding information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is set as a hold command.

  The hold command indicates that a prize has occurred in the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34 and a determination result obtained by the first determination process based on the hold information acquired based on the prize. This is a command for causing the sub-side control device to confirm before being subjected to the jackpot lottery by 60. The hold command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in a command output process of a normal process described later (FIG. 18: step S503).

  Further, when receiving the hold command transmitted based on the winning in the first starting port 33, the sound emission control device 90 increases the number of held symbols in the first held display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41. Is transmitted to the display control device 100 to change the display control device 100 in accordance with the command. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first holding display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of holdings. On the other hand, when the hold command transmitted based on the winning in the second starting port 34 is received, the sound emission control device 90 increases the number of the held items displayed in the second held display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41. Is transmitted to the display control device 100 to change the display control device 100 in accordance with the command. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of holds.

  After executing the step S214, the main MPU 62 ends the winning processing for the starting port.

<First judgment processing>
Next, the first determination process will be described. The first determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (S213 in FIG. 15) of the winning process for the starting opening.

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the first judgment processing. As described above, the preliminary determination process is based on the hold information, the determination result of the jackpot lottery success / failure determination, the determination of the type of the jackpot, the determination of the presence or absence of the reach, and the like, the hold information is determined by the main controller 60 This is a process to be executed before the target of the lottery.

  In step S301, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the storage area due to the winning in the starting opening in the winning process for the opening (FIG. 15) is read. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S302, and the lottery mode at the time when the jackpot lottery by the current prize is executed as a game time is determined. Specifically, the determination result of the preliminary determination process executed by the winning before the current winning is read out from the corresponding storage area, and it is determined whether there is a probability change big hit that occurs before the big hit lottery by the current winning. Thereby, the lottery mode at the time when the jackpot lottery by the current winning is executed as the game times is determined.

  In step S302, when it is determined that the lottery mode is the low-probability mode at the time when the jackpot lottery by the current prize is executed as the game time (S302: YES), the process proceeds to step S303, and the winning / failing table storage area is determined. Reference is made to the low / high probability mode success / failure table stored in 63a. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S305, and as a result of referring to the success / failure table for the low probability mode, it is determined whether the information of the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot.

  On the other hand, in step S302, when it is determined that the lottery mode is not the low-probability mode at the time when the jackpot lottery by the current prize is executed as the game time (S302: NO), the process proceeds to step S304, and the high probability mode As a result of referring to the hit / fail table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S305, and as a result of referring to the winning / failing table for the high probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot.

  In step S305, when it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot (S305: YES), the process proceeds to step S306, where the value is stored in the storage area by winning the starting opening this time. The value of the jackpot type counter C2 is read. After that, the process advances to step S307 to refer to the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 63b. Specifically, in the case where the jackpot type counter C2 targeted for the current distribution is obtained based on winning in the first starting port 33, the first starting port distribution table is referred to. If it is obtained based on the winning in the second starting port 34, the distribution table for the second starting port is referred to. After executing Step S307, the process proceeds to Step S308.

  In step S308, as a result of referring to the distribution table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot type counter C2 read this time corresponds to the probability change jackpot. If it is determined in step S308 that the game corresponds to the jackpot, the process proceeds to step S309, and the jackpot information is stored in the previous determination result storage area 64f. Thereafter, the pre-determination process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S308 that it does not correspond to the probability change jackpot (S308: NO), the process proceeds to step S310, and the normal jackpot information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64f. Thereafter, the pre-determination process ends.

  In step S305, when it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time does not correspond to the jackpot (S305: NO), the process proceeds to step S311 and is stored in the storage area by winning the starting port this time. The read value of the reach random number counter C3 is read. After that, the process advances to step S312 to refer to the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S313, and as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether the value of the reach random number counter C3 read this time corresponds to the occurrence of the reach.

  If it is determined in step S313 that it corresponds to the occurrence of the reach (S313: YES), the process proceeds to step S314, and the reach occurrence information is stored in the previous determination result storage area 64f. Thereafter, the pre-determination process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S313 that it does not correspond to the occurrence of the reach (S313: NO), the pre-determination process ends.

<Prize processing for through>
Next, the winning processing for through will be described. The winning processing for the through is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14: S105).

  FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the winning processing for through. In step S401, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the through gate 35. If it is determined in step S401 that the game ball has won the through gate 35 (S401: YES), the process proceeds to step S402, and whether or not the number SN of retained bonuses is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). Is determined. In addition, the bonus item holding number SN is a value indicating the number of winnings to the through gate 35 which is reserved for performing the electrical accessory opening lottery. In the present embodiment, the maximum value of the number of held items SN is four. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S401 that the game ball has not won the through gate 35 (S401: NO), the winning processing for the through game ends.

  In step S402, when it is determined that the number of retained items SN is less than the upper limit value (less than 4) (S402: YES), the process proceeds to step S403, and 1 is added to the number of retained items SN. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S404.

  In step S404, the value of the motorized accessory opening counter C4 updated in step S103 (FIG. 14) is stored in the first storage area of the free storage area of the power saving area 64c of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the prize-winning process for the through is ended.

  On the other hand, in Step S402, when it is determined that the value of the number of reserved items SN is not less than the upper limit (S402: NO), that is, when it is determined that the value of the number of reserved items SN is not less than the upper limit, Without storing the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4, the winning processing for through ends.

<Normal processing>
Next, the normal processing will be described. The normal process is a process started by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 when the power is turned on. In the normal processing, main processing of the game is executed.

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the normal processing. In step S501, a start-up process is performed. Specifically, initialization of each control device upon power-on, determination of the validity of data stored and held in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S502.

  In step S502, a startup command is set. The start-up command is a command for starting the demonstration moving image for each control device on the sub side when the power is turned on. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S503.

  In step S503, output data such as the startup command set in step S502 and the command set in the timer interrupt process or the normal process executed last time is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, it determines the presence or absence of a prize ball command, and if the prize ball command is set, transmits it to the payout control device 70. If commands related to effects such as a start-up command, a change command, a type command, and a hold command are set, the commands are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. After executing step S503, the process proceeds to step S504.

  In step S504, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S505.

  In step S505, the prize ball count signal and the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step S506. In step S506, a game time control process for controlling a game in each game time is executed. In the game number control process, a jackpot lottery, setting of symbol change display by the symbol display device 41, display control of the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b, and the like are performed. The details of the game times control process will be described later. After executing step S506, the process proceeds to step S507.

  In step S507, a game state shift process for shifting the game state is executed. By executing the game state shift processing, the game state shifts to the open / close execution mode, the high probability mode, the high frequency support mode, and the like. The details of the game state transition processing will be described later. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S508.

  In step S508, a process for supporting the electric combination for driving and controlling the electric accessory 34a provided in the second starting port 34 is executed. In the process of supporting the electric combination, it is determined whether or not the electric combination 34a is to be opened. The details of the electronic role support process will be described later. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S509.

  In step S509, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed in the standby state, a standby process for causing each sub-side control device to start a demonstration moving image is executed. Details of the standby process will be described later. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S510.

  In step S510, it is determined whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current normal process (strictly, the start of the command output process in step S503). That is, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached. If it is determined in step S510 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed from the start of the current normal processing (S510: NO), in steps S511 and S512, until the next normal processing execution timing is reached. , The update of the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly executed. Specifically, in step S511, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. In step S512, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S510 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed from the start of the current normal process (S510: YES), the process returns to step S503, and the processes from step S503 to step S508 are performed. Execute.

  Note that the execution time of each of the processes from step S503 to step 507 changes according to the state of the game, and thus the remaining time until the next execution timing of the normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the updating of the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using the remaining time, the values of these counters can be updated at random.

<Game round control process>
Next, the game times control processing will be described. The game control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 18: S506).

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the game times control processing. In step S601, it is determined whether or not the game is in a special game state. Specifically, it is determined whether any of the opening period flag, the opening / closing execution mode flag, and the ending period flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The opening period flag is turned on at the start of the opening period, and is turned off at the end of the opening period. The opening / closing execution mode flag is turned ON when the game state is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode in the game state transition processing described later, and is turned OFF when the opening / closing execution mode is similarly ended in the game state transition processing. The ending period flag is turned on at the end of the open / close execution mode in the special game state (at the start of the ending period), and is turned off at the end of the ending period.

  If it is determined in step S601 that any of the opening period flag, the opening / closing execution mode flag, and the ending period flag are ON (S601: YES), it is determined that the game is in the special game state, and the processing in step S602 and subsequent steps is performed. Without executing any of them, the present game round control process ends. That is, in the special game state, the game time is not started regardless of whether or not a prize has occurred in the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S601 that the game is not in the special game state (S601: NO), the process proceeds to step S602.

  In step S602, it is determined whether the main display unit 45 is performing variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether one of the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b is performing variable display. This determination is made by determining whether the variable display flag in the variable display flag storage area in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The variable display flag is turned on when starting the variable display for either the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b, and is turned off when the variable display ends.

  If it is determined in step S602 that the main display unit 45 is not performing the variable display (S602: NO), the process proceeds to the game start process in steps S603 to S605. In step S603, it is determined whether or not the total pending number CRN is “0”. The case where the total reserved number CRN is “0” means that the starting suspended number is “0” for both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34. Therefore, if it is determined in step S603 that the total reserved number CRN is “0” (S603: YES), the game replay control process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S603 that the total reserved number CRN is not “0” (S603: NO), the process proceeds to step S604.

  In step S604, a data setting process is performed to set the data stored in the first reserved area Ra or the second reserved area Rb to the state after the start of the change, and the process proceeds to step S605. Details of the data setting process will be described later.

  In step S605, a fluctuation start process for starting the fluctuation display on the main display unit 45 and the fluctuation display on the symbol display device 41 is executed. The details of the change start process will be described later. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S606.

  In step S606, the value of the game number counter PNC is decremented by one. The number-of-games counter PNC is a counter for counting the number of games executed in the high-frequency support mode. After executing Step S606, the process proceeds to Step S607.

  In step S607, the standby state flag is turned off. The standby state flag is turned on at the timing when the standby state is started, and is turned off at the timing when the variable display of the main display unit 45 is started or when 15 seconds have elapsed after the standby state is started. is there. After executing step S607, the process proceeds to step S608.

  In step S608, it is determined whether the transition condition satisfaction flag is ON. The transition condition satisfaction flag is a flag that is turned on at a timing when 15 seconds have elapsed since the start of the standby state, and is turned off at a timing at which the variable display of the main display unit 45 is started. If it is determined in step S608 that the transition condition satisfaction flag is ON (S608: YES), the process proceeds to step S609. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S608 that the transition condition satisfaction flag is not ON (S608: NO), the game turn control process ends.

  In step S609, a return condition satisfaction command is set. The return condition satisfaction command is a command for causing each sub-side control device to recognize that the variable display on the main display unit 45 has been started, that is, that the return condition has been satisfied. After executing Step S609, the process proceeds to Step S610.

  In step S610, the transition condition satisfaction flag is turned off. Thereafter, the game times control process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S602 that the main display unit 45 is performing the variable display (S602: YES), the game round progress processing in steps S611 to S615 is executed.

  In step S611, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the current game has elapsed. As described above, the fluctuation time is a time from when the symbol row starts to change until all the symbol rows stop, and is a part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step S611, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation time information stored in the fluctuation time counter area (various counter areas 64d) of the RAM 64 has become “0”. The value of the fluctuation time information is set in a fluctuation time setting process (FIG. 22) described later. The value of the set fluctuation time information is decremented by one each time the timer interrupt processing is started.

  If it is determined in step S611 that the fluctuating time has not elapsed (S611: NO), the process proceeds to step S612, and a fluctuating display process is executed. The change display process is a process of changing the display mode in the result display unit relating to the current game round. After executing step S612, the game times control process ends.

  If it is determined in step S611 that the fluctuation time has elapsed (S611: YES), the process proceeds to step S613, and the fluctuation end processing is performed. The change ending process is performed on the result display unit such that the symbol form to be displayed on the result display unit determined in the later-described change start process (FIG. 21) is displayed on the result display unit relating to the current game round. Display control. After executing step S613, the process proceeds to step S614.

  In step S614, the standby state flag is turned off. After that, the process advances to step S615 to execute a standby state time setting process. Specifically, “7500” (that is, 15.0 sec) is set in the standby state timer counter Tw stored in the various counter areas 64d. The standby state timer counter Tw is a counter for measuring the elapsed time from the start of the standby state, and is decremented by one every time the timer interrupt processing is started, that is, every 2 msec. After executing step S615, the game number control process ends.

<Data setting process>
Next, the data setting process will be described. The data setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game number control process (S604 in FIG. 19).

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the data setting process. In step S701, it is determined whether or not the reserved area to be subjected to the data setting processing is the first reserved area Ra. Specifically, of the hold information stored in time series in the first hold area Ra (FIG. 6), the hold information stored first (the hold information stored in the first area of the first hold area Ra). The information (information) is the earliest of the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb (FIG. 6) in time series (stored in the first area of the second hold area Rb). If it is stored in the reserved area earlier than the reserved information), it is determined that the reserved area to be processed is the first reserved area Ra. On the other hand, out of the hold information stored first in the chronological order in the first hold area Ra (FIG. 6), the hold information is stored in the second hold area Rb (FIG. 6) in chronological order. If the hold information stored first in the hold information is stored in the hold area first, it is determined that the hold area to be processed is the second hold area Rb. That is, by executing the processing of step S701, the hold information can be processed in the order in which the hold information is stored in the first hold area Ra or the second hold area Rb.

  If it is determined in step S701 that the processing target reserved area is the first reserved area Ra (step S701: YES), the data setting processing for the first reserved area in steps S702 to S707 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S701 that the processing target reserved area is not the first reserved area Ra, that is, when it is determined that the processing target reserved area is the second reserved area Rb (step S701: NO) ), The data setting processing for the second reserved area in steps S708 to S713 is executed.

  In step S702, after subtracting 1 from the first start suspended number RaN of the first reserved area Ra, the process proceeds to step S703, and subtracts 1 from the total suspended number CRN. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S704. In step S704, the data stored in the first area of the first reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S705.

  In step S705, a process of shifting data stored in the storage area of the first reservation area Ra is performed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of the second area → the first area, the third area → the second area, the fourth area → the third area, and so on. After executing step S705, the process proceeds to step S706.

  In step S706, if the second result display section flag of the various flag storage area 64e is ON, the flag is turned OFF, and if not, the state is maintained. The second result display section flag is information for specifying whether the target of the start of the current variable display is the first result display section 37a or the second result display section 37b. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S707.

  In step S707, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command including information for causing the sound emission control device 90, which is the sub-side control device, to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63, information indicating that the reserved area to which the current data is shifted corresponds to the first reserved area Ra, that is, the information corresponding to the first starting port 33. The command at the time of shift including the information of the presence is selected, and the selected command at the time of the shift is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. Thereafter, the data setting process ends.

  The shift command set in step S707 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S503 in the normal processing (FIG. 18). The sound emission control device 90 transmits a command for changing the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of held items to the display control device 100 based on the received shift command. I do. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds.

  In step S701, when it is determined that the processing target reserved area is not the first reserved area Ra, that is, when it is determined that the processing target reserved area is the second reserved area Rb (step S701: NO), Proceed to step S708.

  In step S708, the second start holding number RbN in the second holding area Rb is decremented by one. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S709. In step S709, the total reserved number CRN is decremented by 1, and the process proceeds to step S710 to move the data stored in the first area of the second reserved area Rb to the execution area AE. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S711.

  In step S711, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second holding area Rb is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of the second area → the first area, the third area → the second area, the fourth area → the third area, and so on. After executing Step S711, the process proceeds to Step S712.

  In step S712, when the second result display section flag of the various flag storage area 64e is not ON, the flag is turned ON, and when it is ON, the state is maintained. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S713.

  In step S713, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command including information for causing the sound emission control device 90, which is the sub-side control device, to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63, information indicating that the reserved area for which the current data is shifted corresponds to the second reserved area Rb, that is, the information corresponding to the second starting port 34. The command at the time of shift including the information of the presence is selected, and the selected command at the time of the shift is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. Thereafter, the data setting process ends.

  The shift command set in step S713 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S503 in the normal processing (FIG. 18). Based on the received shift command, the sound emission control device 90 sends a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds. Send. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds.

<Change start processing>
Next, the fluctuation start processing will be described. The change start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game times control process (FIG. 19: S605).

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the change start process. In step S801, it is determined whether or not the win / fail lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The high-probability mode flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the high-probability mode in the MPU 62. In the present embodiment, the high-probability mode flag is turned ON at the end of the opening / closing execution mode related to the winning of the probability change jackpot. , And then turned OFF when a normal jackpot is won. If it is determined in step S801 that the mode is the high probability mode (S801: YES), the process proceeds to step S802.

  In step S802, a determination is made with reference to a winning / failing table for the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot winning in the winning / non-hitting table for the high probability mode shown in FIG. 7B. Is determined. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S804. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S801 that the mode is not the high probability mode (S801: NO), the process proceeds to step S803.

  In step S803, a determination is made with reference to a winning / failing table for the low probability mode. Specifically, whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot winning in the winning / not-hitting table for the low probability mode shown in FIG. Is determined. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S804.

  In step S804, it is determined whether or not the result of the win / fail determination (big hit lottery) in step S802 or step S803 is a big win. In step S804, if the result of the win / fail determination is a jackpot win (S804: YES), in steps S805 to S812, a process for setting a game result in the case of a jackpot win and a stop result are set. Execute the processing of

  In step S805, it is determined whether the second result display section flag of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step S805 that the second result display section flag is not ON (S805: NO), the process proceeds to step S806, and refers to the distribution table for the first startup port (see FIG. 8A). Then, the distribution is determined. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is set to any one of the numerical range of the 16R certain jackpot, the numerical range of the 8R certain jackpot, the numerical range of the 16R regular jackpot, and the numerical range of the 8R regular jackpot. Is determined.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S805 that the second result display section flag is ON (S805: YES), the process proceeds to step S807, and the distribution table for the second starting port (see FIG. 8B). Is performed with reference to. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is set to any one of the numerical range of the 16R certain jackpot, the numerical range of the 8R certain jackpot, the numerical range of the 16R regular jackpot, and the numerical range of the 8R regular jackpot. Is determined. After executing the processing of step S806 or step S807. Proceed to step S808.

  In step S808, it is determined whether or not the type of the jackpot allocated in step S806 or step S807 is a probable variable jackpot. If it is determined in step S808 that the game result is a jackpot, the process proceeds to step S809.

  In step S809, a stop result setting process for the probability change jackpot is executed. The stop result setting process for the probability change jackpot is a process in which the stop result is displayed on the first result display portion 37a or the second result display portion 37b in the current game round in which the player wins the probability change jackpot. This is a process for setting whether to end the display. Specifically, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the type of the jackpot distributed in step S806 or step S807 is referred to by referring to the stop result table for the probability change jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e. The obtained address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing Step S809, the process proceeds to Step S810.

  In step S810, the flag (big hit type flag) corresponding to the big hit type assigned in step S806 or step S807 is turned ON. Specifically, the 16R certain-variable flag is turned on when it is a 16R certain-change big hit, and the 8R certain-change flag is turned on when it is an 8R certain-variable big hit. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S814.

  In step S808, when it is determined that the type of the jackpot allocated in step S806 or step S807 is not the probability variable jackpot (S808: NO), that is, when the type of the allocated jackpot is the normal jackpot, the process proceeds to step S811. move on.

  In step S811, a normal jackpot stop result setting process is executed. The normal jackpot stop result setting process is a process in which any stop result is displayed on the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b in the current game round in which the normal jackpot is won. This is a process for setting whether to end the display. Specifically, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the type of the jackpot that has been sorted in step S806 or step S807 is referred to by referring to the stop result table for the normal jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e. The obtained address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S811, the process proceeds to step S812.

  In step S812, the flag (big hit type flag) corresponding to the big hit type allocated in step S806 or step S807 is turned ON. More specifically, the 16R normal jackpot is turned on when the 16R normal jackpot is hit, and the 8R normal flag is turned on when the 8R normal jackpot is hit. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S814.

  In step S804, if the result of the jackpot lottery in step S802 or step S803 is not a jackpot winning (S804: NO), the process proceeds to step S813 to execute a stop result setting process for a miss. The stop result setting process for a disconnection is a process of terminating the variable display in a state where any of the stop results is displayed on the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b in the current game round in which the disconnection result is obtained. This is a process for setting whether or not. Specifically, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is obtained by referring to the stop result table for the off-state in the stop result table storage area 63e. Then, the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S813, the process proceeds to step S814.

  In step S814, a setting process of the fluctuation time is executed. The setting process of the fluctuation time is to set the fluctuation time which is the time required for the current round of the game in the first result display portion 37a or the second result display portion 37b based on the presence or absence of the jackpot or the occurrence of the reach. This is the process. Details of the setting process of the fluctuation time will be described later. After executing Step S814, the process proceeds to Step S815.

  In step S815, it is determined whether the second result display section flag of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step S815 that the second result display section flag of the RAM 64 is not ON (S815: NO), the process advances to step S816 to set a first variation command. The first variation command includes information indicating that the current game time is related to the hold information acquired based on the winning in the first starting port 33, and whether or not a reach has occurred. And the fluctuation time information set in step S814. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S815 that the second result display section flag is ON (S815: YES), the flow advances to step S817 to set a second variation command. The second change command includes information indicating that the current game time is related to the hold information acquired based on the winning in the second starting port 34, and whether or not a reach has occurred. And the fluctuation time information set in step S814. After executing Step S816 or Step S817, the process proceeds to Step S818.

  In step S818, a type command is set. The type command includes information on the presence or absence of the jackpot and the result of the distribution determination. In other words, the type command includes information on the type of the jackpot, such as information on the 16R probability variable jackpot, information on the 8R probability variable jackpot, information on the 16R normal jackpot, information on the 8R normal jackpot, or information on the off result.

  The variation command and the type command set in steps S816 to S818 are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S503 in the normal processing (FIG. 18). The sound emission control device 90 determines the contents of the effect in the game time based on the received variation command and type command, and controls various devices so that the determined effect is executed. After executing step S818, the process proceeds to step S819.

  In step S819, the result display unit of the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b corresponding to the current game round is caused to start changing the symbol display. Specifically, when the second result display section flag of the RAM 64 is not ON, the result display section corresponding to the current game time is specified as the first result display section 37a, and the variable display is started. When the second result display section flag is ON, the result display section corresponding to the current game time is specified as the second result display section 37b, and the variable display is started. After executing Step S819, the fluctuation start process ends.

<Setting process of fluctuation time>
Next, the process of setting the fluctuation time will be described. The fluctuation time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 21: S814).

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the setting process of the fluctuation time. In step S901, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the fluctuation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S902.

  In step S902, it is determined whether or not the jackpot lottery for the current game has been won. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the probability variable jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is ON. If any of the flags is ON (S902: YES), the process proceeds to step S903.

  In step S903, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the fluctuation time table for big hits stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the game times won in the jackpot lottery is constant. After that, the process advances to step S904 to set the obtained fluctuation time information in the fluctuation time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the setting process of the fluctuation time is ended.

  If it is determined in step S902 that the jackpot lottery relating to the current game round is not a win (S902: NO), the process proceeds to step S905, and it is determined whether or not a reach occurs in the current game round. If the jackpot lottery related to the current game time has not been won in step S902, the present process (S905) is executed. Therefore, in step S905, a reach occurs among the game times not won in the jackpot lottery. It is determined whether or not it is a game time. Specifically, when the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of the reach, it is determined that the reach occurs (S905: YES), and the process proceeds to step S906. In specifying the presence or absence of the reach using the value of the reach random number counter C3, the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 63 is referred to.

  In step S906, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the reach generation fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fluctuation time for generating reach is constant. After that, the process advances to step S904 to set the obtained fluctuation time information in the fluctuation time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the setting process of the fluctuation time is ended.

  If it is determined in step S905 that the reach does not occur in the current game round (S905: NO), the process proceeds to step S907, and the non-reach variation time table stored in the variation time table storage area 63d is referred to. Then, a fluctuation time corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is obtained. After that, the process advances to step S904 to set the obtained fluctuation time information in the fluctuation time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the setting process of the fluctuation time is ended.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the fluctuation time information stored in the reach non-occurrence fluctuation time table is set so that the fluctuation time becomes shorter as the number of the total reserved number CRN increases. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration that does not depend on the number of the total reserved number CRN may be adopted, and the fluctuation time may be set to be shorter as the number of the total reserved number CRN is smaller. When the second number RbN of start-ups is “0”, the fluctuation time becomes shorter as the number RaN of first start-ups is larger, and when the number RbN of the second start-ups is “1” or more. May be set such that the larger the number of the second start pending numbers RbN, the shorter the fluctuation time. Further, when the second number of suspended start-ups RbN is “0”, the fluctuation time becomes longer as the number of first number of suspended start-ups RaN increases, and when the second number of suspended start-ups RbN is “1” or more. May be set so that the larger the number of the second start suspended numbers RbN, the longer the fluctuation time becomes, or may be constant without depending on the suspended numbers RaN and RbN.

  Also, in the situation where the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, no reach occurs so that a shorter fluctuation time is selected compared to the case where the number of pending information is the same as in the case where the support mode is the low-frequency support mode. A change time table may be set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the selected variation times may be the same, and the above relationship may be reversed.

  Furthermore, the above-mentioned configuration may be applied to the fluctuation time at the time of the reach occurrence, and the fluctuation time that is easy to be selected and the fluctuation time that is hard to be selected at the time of the jackpot winning and the out-of-reach reach may be different. Good. Further, a variation time table for the probability change jackpot, a variation time table for the normal jackpot, a variation time table for the off-reach, and a variation time table for the complete departure may be individually set.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition processing will be described. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 18: S507).

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing a game state transition process. In step S1001, it is determined whether the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned on at the end of the open / close execution mode in the special game state (at the start of the ending period), and is turned off at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing an ending effect in the special game state as described with reference to FIG.

  If it is determined in step S1001 that the ending period flag is not ON (S1001: NO), the process advances to step S1002 to determine whether the open / close execution mode flag is ON. As described above, the opening / closing execution mode flag is turned on when shifting the game state to the opening / closing execution mode, and is turned off when ending the opening / closing execution mode.

  If it is determined in step S1002 that the open / close execution mode flag is not ON (S1002: NO), the process advances to step S1003 to determine whether the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned on at the start of the opening period, and is turned off at the end of the opening period.

  If it is determined in step S1003 that the opening period flag is not ON (S1003: NO), the process proceeds to step S1004, at which the symbol variation display on the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b ends. Is determined. If it is determined in step S1004 that the timing does not indicate that the variable display has ended (S1004: NO), the present game state transition process ends.

  If it is determined in step S1004 that the timing at which the variable display has ended is reached (S1004: YES), the flow proceeds to step S1005, and the game result of the current game (the result of the jackpot lottery) shifts to the open / close execution mode. It is determined whether or not they correspond. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the 16R certain change flag, the 8R certain change flag, the 16R normal flag, and the 8R normal flag in the RAM 64 is ON. When it is determined that none of the above flags is ON (S1005: NO), the present game state transition processing ends.

  If it is determined in step S1005 that the game result of the current game (the result of the jackpot lottery) corresponds to the shift to the open / close execution mode (S1005: YES), the process proceeds to step S1006, and the standby state flag is set. Is turned off, the process proceeds to step S1007, and the high probability mode flag is turned off. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1008.

  In step S1008, an opening time setting process is performed. The opening time setting process is a process of setting a time length of an opening period in the special game state (hereinafter, also referred to as an opening time). In the present embodiment, an opening time of the same fixed length is set in each opening period. Specifically, "3000" (that is, 6 seconds) is set in the third timer counter area T3 for determining the opening time. The third timer counter area T3 is provided in the various timer counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. After executing Step S1008, the process proceeds to Step S1009.

  In step S1009, an opening command is set. The set opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S503 in the normal processing (FIG. 18). The opening command includes information on the set opening time and the number of rounds in the current open / close execution mode. The sound emission control device 90 determines the contents of the effect corresponding to the opening time and the opening / closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents are executed. After executing Step S1009, the process proceeds to Step S1010, and the opening period flag is turned ON. Thereafter, the present game state transition processing ends.

  If it is determined in step S1003 that the opening period flag is ON (S1003: YES), the process proceeds to step S1011.

  In step S1011, it is determined whether the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the third timer counter area T3 is "0". If it is determined in step S1011 that the opening period has ended (S1011: YES), the process proceeds to step S1012, and the opening period flag is turned off. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1013.

  In step S1013, a round display start process for notifying the type of the current open / close execution mode is executed. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 is confirmed. Then, based on the confirmed address information, the stop result data corresponding to the address information is specified from the stop result data group stored in the ROM 63, and the content of the number of rounds is determined from the specified stop result data. Confirm. Thereafter, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display section 39 of the main display section 45. As a result, the round display section 39 displays information on the round related to the output. After executing Step S1013, the process proceeds to Step S1014.

  In step S1014, the number of rounds in the current open / close execution mode is determined. Specifically, the jackpot type flags (16R certain change flag, 8R certain change flag, 16R normal flag, 8R certain change flag) stored in the RAM 64 are checked. If it is determined in step S1014 that the jackpot type flag stored in the RAM 64 is the 16R certainty change flag or the 16R normal flag (S1014: YES), the process proceeds to step S1015, where the flag is provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. "16" is set in the first round counter area RC1. The first round counter area RC1 is a counter area for counting the number of times the opening / closing door 36b has been opened.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1014 that the jackpot type flag stored in the RAM 64 is the 8R certainty change flag or the 8R normal flag (S1014: NO), the process proceeds to step S1016, where the flag is provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. "8" is set in the obtained first round counter area RC1. After executing Step S1015 or Step S1016, the process proceeds to Step S1017.

  In step S1017, the open / close execution mode flag is turned ON. Thereafter, the present game state transition processing ends.

  If it is determined in step S1002 that the opening / closing execution mode flag is ON (S1002: YES), the flow proceeds to step S1018 to execute a special winning opening opening / closing process. Specifically, when the special winning opening 36a is closed, the variable winning driving unit 36c is driven on condition that the first round counter area RC1 is equal to or greater than "1". The mouth 36a is opened. In addition, when the special winning opening 36a is being opened, the variable winning driving unit is provided on condition that the opening limit time has elapsed since the opening of the special winning opening 36a or that the opening limit number has won. The driving state of 36c is stopped, and the special winning opening 36a is closed. The details of the special winning opening opening and closing process will be described later. After executing Step S1018, the process proceeds to Step S1019.

  In step S1019, it is determined whether the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0”. When it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not “0” (S1019: NO), the present game state transition processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0” (S1019: YES), the process proceeds to step S1020, and the open / close execution mode flag is turned off. After executing Step S1020, the process proceeds to Step S1021.

  In step S1021, round display end processing is executed. In this process, the display control of the round display unit 39 is ended so that the round display unit 39 of the main display unit 45 is turned off. After executing Step S1021, the process proceeds to Step S1022.

  In step S1022, a condition determination process is performed. The condition determination process is a process of determining whether or not the case a2 illustrated in FIG. 9 is satisfied. Specifically, by winning the jackpot lottery in the next game round, a suggestion effect is executed in the ending period, and the effect performed in the current game round in the fluctuating time of the next game round (announcement effect, reach effect and It is determined whether or not to execute a process of reproducing the result announcement effect (big hit announcement). The condition determination processing will be described later. After executing Step S1022, the process proceeds to Step S1023.

  In step S1023, an ending time setting process is performed. The ending time setting process is a process of setting a time length of an ending period in the special game state (hereinafter, also referred to as an ending time). The ending time setting process will be described later. After executing Step S1023, the process proceeds to Step S1024.

  In step S1024, an ending command is set. The set ending command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S503 in the normal processing (FIG. 18). The sound emission control device 90 ends the effect corresponding to the open / close execution mode based on receiving the ending command. After executing Step S1024, the process proceeds to Step S1025.

  In step S1025, the ending period flag is turned ON. Thereafter, the present game state transition processing ends.

  If it is determined in step S1001 that the ending period flag is ON (S1001: YES), the process proceeds to step S1026.

  In step S1026, it is determined whether the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (S1023), it is determined whether or not the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is “0”. The value of the fourth timer counter area T4 is set in an ending time setting process (FIG. 25) described later. If it is determined in step S1026 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is “0” (S1026: YES), the process proceeds to step S1027.

  In step S1027, the ending period flag is turned off. After that, the process advances to step S1028 to execute a transition process at the end of the ending period. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes of the game times after the end of the current ending period. Details of the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing Step S1028, the process proceeds to Step S1029.

  In step S1029, the standby state flag is turned on. After that, the process advances to step S1030 to execute a standby state time setting process. Specifically, “7500” (that is, 15.0 sec) is set in the standby state timer counter Tw stored in the various counter areas 64d. After executing Step S1030, the present game state transition processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1026 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is not “0” (S1026: NO), the present game state transition processing is ended as it is.

<Grand Prize opening and closing process>
Next, the special winning opening opening and closing process will be described. The special winning opening opening / closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (1017 in FIG. 23) of the game state transition process.

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the special winning opening opening / closing process. In step S1101, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening 36a is being opened. Specifically, the determination is made based on the driving state of the variable winning drive unit 36c. If it is determined in step S1101 that the special winning opening 36a is not open (S1101: NO), the process proceeds to step S1102, and it is determined whether the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0”. If it is determined in step S1102 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0” (S1102: YES), the main winning opening / closing process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1102 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not “0” (S1102: NO), the process proceeds to step S1103.

  In step S1103, it is determined whether the value of the first timer counter area T1 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the special winning opening 36a. If it is determined in step S1103 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not "0" (S1103: NO), the main winning opening opening / closing process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1103 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0" (S1103: YES), the process proceeds to step S1104, and the variable winning drive unit opens the special winning opening 36a. 36c is driven. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1105.

  In step S1105, a setting process for each round is executed. In the case of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, since the set winning modes are all the high-frequency winning modes, "15000" (that is, 30 seconds) is set in the first timer counter area T1. Further, "10" is set in a winning counter area PC provided in various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 in order to count the number of winning of the game balls to the special winning opening 36a. The count value set in the first timer counter area T1 is decremented by one every time the timer interrupt processing is started, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec. If the low frequency prize mode is set in the pachinko machine 10, for example, "100" (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1, and "6" is set in the prize counter area PC. May be set. After executing Step S1105, the process proceeds to Step S1106.

  In step S1106, a release command is set. Thereafter, the main winning opening opening / closing process ends. The release command is a command including information for causing the audio light emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are the sub-side control devices, to recognize that the opening of the special winning opening 36a has been started. It is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by the external output process (FIG. 18: step S503). The sound emission control device 90 specifies that the opening of the special winning opening 36a for one round has been started on the basis of the received opening command, and also displays the effect contents of the various lamps 47 and the speakers 46 on the special winning opening 36a. Is updated to the content corresponding to the start of the release of. Further, the sound emission control device 90 transmits the release command to the display control device 100 while maintaining the information form. The display control device 100 specifies that the opening of the special winning opening 36a for one round has been started based on the received opening command, and displays the contents of the effect on the symbol display device 41 and the opening of the special winning opening 36a. Update to the content corresponding to the start.

  If it is determined in step S1101 that the special winning opening 36a is open (step S1101: YES), the process advances to step S1107 to determine whether the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0". I do. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the opening duration of the special winning opening 36a. If it is determined in step S1107 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not “0” (S1107: NO), the process proceeds to step S1108.

  In step S1108, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won the special winning opening 36a based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the variable winning device 36. If it is determined in step S1108 that no winning has occurred (S1108: NO), the main winning opening opening / closing process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1108 that a winning has occurred (S1108: YES), the flow advances to step S1109 to decrement the value of the winning counter area PC by one. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1110.

  In step S1110, it is determined whether the value of the winning counter area PC is “0”. If it is determined in step S1110 that the value of the winning counter area PC is not “0” (S1110: NO), the main winning opening / closing process ends.

  When it is determined in step S1107 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0" (S1107: YES), or when it is determined in step S1110 that the value of the winning counter area PC is "0". (S1110: YES), the process proceeds to step S1111 to execute a special winning opening closing process. Specifically, the variable winning drive unit 36c is set to a non-driven state in order to close the special winning opening 36a. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1112.

  In step S1112, the value of the first round counter area RC1 is decremented by one. After that, the process advances to step S1113 to determine whether the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0”. If it is determined in step S1113 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0” (S1113: YES), the main winning opening / closing process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1113 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not “0” (S1113: NO), “1000” (ie, 2 seconds) is set in the first timer counter area T1. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the special winning opening 36a. After executing step S1114, the process advances to step S1115 to set a close command. Thereafter, the special winning opening opening / closing process ends.

  The set closing command is a command including information for causing the audio light emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are the sub-side control devices, to recognize that the opening of the special winning opening 36a has been completed. Is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the external output process (FIG. 18: step S503). The sound emission control device 90 specifies that the opening of the special winning opening 36a for one round has been completed based on the received closing command, and determines the effect contents of the various lamps 47 and the speakers 46 in the special winning opening 36a. Update to the content corresponding to the completion of release. Further, the sound emission control device 90 transmits the above-mentioned closing command to the display control device 100 while maintaining the information form. The display control device 100 specifies that the opening of the special winning opening 36a for one round has been completed based on the received closing command, and displays the contents of the effect on the symbol display device 41 and ends the opening of the special winning opening 36a. Update to the content corresponding to what you did.

<Condition determination processing>
Next, the condition determination processing will be described. The condition determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 23: S1022).

  As described above, the condition determination process is a process of determining whether or not the case a2 illustrated in FIG. 9 is satisfied. The condition for enabling the processing of the case a2 is that the jackpot is won in the first game round and the jackpot is also won in the second game round. This condition determination process is executed immediately before the end of the opening / closing execution mode after winning the jackpot in the game round, and is a process of determining whether or not to win the jackpot lottery in the next game round.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart illustrating the condition determination process. In step S1201, it is determined whether or not the number of held items CRN> 0. By executing this processing, when executing the special game state after the first game round, it is confirmed whether or not the game round exists immediately after the special game state. When the game time does not exist, there is no game time corresponding to the second game time capable of executing the game time reproduction effect immediately after the suggested effect, and the execution of the case a2 becomes impossible. .

  If it is determined in step S1201 that the reserved number CRN> 0 (S1201: YES), the process proceeds to step S1202. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1201 that the hold number CRN is not greater than 0 (S1201: NO), the condition determination processing ends.

  In step S1202, the value of the big random number counter C1 for the next game is read. Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the storage area by the winning in the starting port in the winning process for the starting port (FIG. 15) is read. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1203.

  In step S1203, it is determined whether the normal big hit flag is ON. By executing the process, it is determined whether the jackpot lottery relating to the next game is executed in the high probability mode or the low probability mode.

  If it is determined in step S1203 that the normal big hit flag is ON (S1203: YES), the process proceeds to step S1204, and the win / fail table for the low probability mode stored in the win / fail table storage area 63a is referred to. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1206, and as a result of referring to the success / failure table for the low probability mode, it is determined whether or not the information of the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1203 that the normal big hit flag is not ON (S1203: NO), the process proceeds to step S1205, and the win / fail table for the high probability mode stored in the win / fail table storage area 63a is referred to. . Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1206, and as a result of referring to the winning / failing table for the high probability mode, it is determined whether or not the information of the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot.

  If it is determined in step S1206 that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot (S1206: YES), the process proceeds to step S1207.

  In step S1207, it is determined whether or not the effect duplication avoidance flag is ON. In the case of case a2 (FIG. 9), the effect duplication avoidance flag further reproduces the game time reproduction effect executed in the second game time in the ending period of the special game state after the second game time. This is a flag used to prevent execution. If it is determined in step S1207 that the effect duplication avoidance flag is not ON (S1207: NO), the flow advances to step S1208 to turn on the condition satisfaction flag. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1209.

  In step S1209, a condition satisfaction command is set. The condition satisfaction command is a command including information for causing the sound emission control device 90 on the sub side to recognize that the condition satisfaction flag is ON. The condition satisfaction command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by the external output process of the normal process (FIG. 18: step S503). Thereafter, the condition determination processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1206 that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time does not correspond to the jackpot (S1206: NO), or if it is determined in step S1207 that the effect duplication avoidance flag is ON. (S1207: YES), the condition determination processing is terminated as it is.

<Ending time setting process>
Next, the ending time setting process will be described. The ending time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 23: S1023).

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the ending time setting process. In step S1301, it is determined whether or not the effect duplication avoidance flag is ON.

  When it is determined in step S1301 that the effect duplication avoidance flag is not ON (S1301: NO), the process proceeds to step S1302, and it is determined whether the condition satisfaction flag is ON. If it is determined in step S1302 that the condition satisfaction flag is ON (S1302: YES), the process proceeds to step S1303.

  In step S1303, “3000” (6 seconds) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4 that is a timer for the ending time. The process of step S1303 is a process of setting the ending time in the special game state after the first game round in case a2 of FIG. In case a2, only the suggested effect is executed in the ending period, and the effect performed in the first game round is not reproduced. Therefore, in the present embodiment, 6 seconds is secured as the ending time required for executing the suggestion effect. After executing step S1303, the process advances to step S1304 to turn off the condition satisfaction flag. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1305.

  In step S1305, the effect duplication avoidance flag is turned ON. Thereafter, the ending time setting process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1302 that the condition satisfaction flag is not ON (S1302: NO), the process proceeds to step S1306.

  In step S1306, “15000” (30 seconds) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4. The process of step S1306 is a process of setting the ending time in the special game state after the first game round in case a1 of FIG. In case a1, a suggestion effect and a special game state reproduction effect are executed during the ending period. Therefore, in the present embodiment, 30 seconds is secured as the ending time necessary for executing the suggestion effect and the special game state reproduction effect. In the present embodiment, the time required for the suggestion effect is constant at 6 seconds, and the time required for the special game state reproduction effect is constant at 24 seconds. After executing step S1303, the ending time setting process ends.

  If it is determined in step S1301 that the effect duplication avoidance flag is ON (S1301: YES), the flow advances to step S1307 to set an effect duplication avoidance command. The effect duplication avoidance command is a command including information for causing the sound emission control device 90 on the sub side to recognize that the effect duplication avoidance flag is ON. The effect duplication avoidance command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process of the normal process (FIG. 18: step S503). After executing Step S1307, the process proceeds to Step S1308.

  In step S1308, “4000” (8 seconds) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4. The process of step S1308 is a process of setting the ending time in the special game state after the second game round in case a2 of FIG. In case a2, a normal ending effect is performed during the ending period. Therefore, in the present embodiment, 8 seconds is secured as the ending time required for executing the normal ending effect.

<Transition processing at the end of the ending period>
Next, transition processing at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition processing at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition processing (FIG. 23: S1028).

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the transition processing at the end of the ending period. In step S1401, it is determined whether or not the flag corresponding to the probability change jackpot is set to ON in the RAM 64 as the jackpot type flag. That is, it is determined whether the 16R probable change flag or the 8R probable change flag of the RAM 64 is ON.

  If it is determined in step S1401 that the 16R probable change flag or the 8R probable change flag in the RAM 64 is ON (S1401: YES), the process advances to step S1402 to execute a flag erasure process. Specifically, when the 16R certain change flag, the 8R certain change flag, the 16 normal flag, the 8R normal flag, and the high frequency support mode flag are ON, they are turned OFF, and when they are not ON, the state is maintained. . After executing step S1402, the process proceeds to step S1403.

  In step S1403, the high-probability mode flag is turned on, and then the process proceeds to step S1404, where the high-frequency support mode flag is turned on. As a result, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the game state shifts to the gaming state in which the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. Note that the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode are maintained at least until the next time a jackpot is won. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1405.

  In step S1405, 100 is set to the game number counter PNC provided in the various counter area 64d of the RAM 64. The value set in the number-of-games counter PNC is a value indicating the number of games when the high-frequency support mode is executed with the number of games limited. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1406.

  In step S1406, a high-probability mode command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the high-probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. I do. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1410.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1401 that the 16R normal flag or the 8R normal flag is ON in the RAM 64 (S1401: NO), the process advances to step S1407 to execute flag erasure processing. Specifically, when the 16R certain change flag, the 8R certain change flag, the 16 normal flag, the 8R normal flag, and the high frequency support mode flag are ON, they are turned OFF, and when they are not ON, the state is maintained. . Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1408.

  In step S1408, after turning on the high frequency support mode flag, the process proceeds to step S1409, in which 100 is set to the number-of-games counter PNC provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1410.

  In step S1410, a high-frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. Set. Then, the transition process at the end of the ending period ends.

<Process for electrical support>
Next, a description will be given of the processing for supporting electric power. The electric power support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 18: S508).

  FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing the process for supporting electric power. In step S1501, it is determined whether support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the support flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The supporting flag is a flag that is turned on when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is opened, and is turned off when the electric accessory 34a is returned to the closed state. If it is determined in step S1501 that the support flag is not ON (S1501: NO), the process proceeds to step S1502.

  In step S1502, it is determined whether the support winning flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is set to ON when the open state is won in the electric accessory opening lottery for determining whether or not the electric accessory 34a is set to the open state, and is set to OFF when the supporting flag is ON. It is. If it is determined in step S1502 that the support winning flag is not ON (S1502: NO), the process proceeds to step S1503.

  In step S1503, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the ordinary figure unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by one every time the timer interrupt processing is started, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec.

  If it is determined in step S1503 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not “0” (S1503: NO), the present electric power support process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S1503: YES), the process proceeds to step S1504.

  In step S1504, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the symbol variation display in the ordinary figure unit 38. If it is determined in step S1504 that it is the end timing of the variable display (S1504: YES), the process proceeds to step S1505, where the out-of-range display is set, and then the present electric power support process ends. By setting the off display, the change display of the symbol in the ordinary figure unit 38 is terminated in a state where the off display is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1504 that it is not the end timing of the variable display (S1504: NO), the process proceeds to step S1506.

  In step S1506, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of reserved items SN is greater than “0”. If it is determined in step S1506 that the value of the number of held items SN is “0” (S1506: NO), the present electronic role support process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1506 that the value of the number of reserved items SN is greater than “0” (S1506: YES), the process proceeds to step S1507.

  In step S1507, it is determined whether the mode is the open / close execution mode, and then the process proceeds to step S1508 to determine whether the mode is the high frequency support mode. If it is not the opening / closing execution mode in step S1507 (S1507: NO), and if the high frequency support mode is in step S1508 (S1508: YES), the process proceeds to step S1509 to perform an electric accessory opening lottery. More specifically, the value stored in the electric-power-use holding area 64c is shifted, and when the value of the electric-power-goods opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric-power-goods opening lottery is performed. Wins. Further, "750" (that is, 1.5 seconds) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the opening of the electric accessory. The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by one each time the timer interrupt processing is started. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1510.

  In step S1510, it is determined whether or not the result of the electrically powered accessory opening lottery in step S1509 is a support winning. In step S1510, when it is determined that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is a support win (S1510: YES), the process proceeds to step S1511, where the support win flag is turned on and provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. "3" is set in the obtained second round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 34a is opened. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1512. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1510 that the result of the electric auditors product open lottery is not a support winning (S1510: NO), the process proceeds to step S1512 without executing the process of step S1511.

  In step S1512, it is determined whether or not the win / fail lottery mode is the low probability mode. If it is determined in step S1512 that the winning / failure lottery mode is the low probability mode (S1512: YES), the process proceeds to step S1513. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1512 that the winning / rejecting lottery mode is not the low-probability mode (S1512: NO), the main-combination-support processing ends.

  In step S1513, it is determined whether or not the number-of-games counter area is “0”. In the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode, the game number counter is decremented by one each time one game is completed. If it is determined in step S1513 that the number-of-games counter area is not “0” (S1513: NO), the main control process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1513 that the number-of-games counter area is "0", the flow advances to step S1514 to turn off the high frequency support mode flag. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1515.

  In step S1515, the low-frequency support command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. I do. After that, the processing for electric role support ends.

  The low frequency support command set in step S1515 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the external output process of the normal process (FIG. 18: step S503). The sound emission control device 90 specifies that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode based on the reception of the low-frequency support command, and executes a process corresponding thereto.

  If it is determined in step S1507 that the mode is the opening / closing execution mode (S1507: YES), or if it is determined in step S1518 that the mode is not the high-frequency support mode (S1508: NO), the process proceeds to step S1516 to open the electric accessory. I do. More specifically, the value stored in the electric-power-use holding area 64c is shifted, and when the value of the electric-power-goods opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric-power-goods opening lottery is performed. Wins. Also, "14750" (that is, 29.5 seconds) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the opening of the electric accessory. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1517.

  In step S1517, it is determined whether or not the result of the electrically powered accessory opening lottery in step S1516 is a support winning. If it is determined in step S1517 that the winning is not the support winning (S1517: NO), the power-supplying support process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1517 that the support has been won (S1517: YES), the flow advances to step S1518 to turn on the support win flag and set “1” in the second round counter area RC2. Then, the processing for electric power support is ended.

  If it is determined in step S1502 that the support winning flag is ON (S1502: YES), the flow advances to step S1519 to determine whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the ordinary figure unit 38. In step S1519, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S1519: NO), the pattern change display is being performed in the general-purpose drawing unit 38, and therefore the main electric power support processing is performed as it is. To end. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1519 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (S1519: YES), the process proceeds to step S1520.

  In step S1520, a hit display is set. Thus, the variation display of the pattern in the ordinary figure unit 38 is terminated with the hit display stopped and displayed. Then, the process proceeds to step S1521, where the support flag is turned ON and the support winning flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the processing for electric power support is completed.

  If it is determined in step S1501 that the supporting flag is ON (S1501: YES), the process advances to step S1522 to execute an electric combination opening / closing control process for controlling opening / closing of the electric accessory 34a. Thereafter, the processing for electric power support is completed.

<Electronic opening / closing control processing>
Next, the electric-power opening / closing control processing will be described. The electric-power opening / closing control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the electric-power support process (FIG. 28: S1522).

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the electric-power opening / closing control processing. In step S1601, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is being opened. Whether or not the electric accessory 34a is being opened is determined based on whether or not the electric accessory driving unit 34b is in a driving state. If it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is open (S1601: YES), the process proceeds to step S1602.

  In step S1602, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the opening duration of the electric accessory 34a. In step S1602, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not “0” (S1602: NO), the present electric combination opening / closing control processing is ended as it is. That is, when the opening duration of the electric accessory 34a has not ended, the electric combination opening / closing control processing ends.

  If it is determined in step S1602 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S1602: YES), the flow advances to step S1603 to perform a closing process for controlling the electric accessory 34a to a closed state. "250" (that is, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as a means for measuring the opening duration of the electric accessory 34a is "0", the electric accessory 34a is closed and the second timer counter area T2 is electrically operated this time. “250” is set in the second timer counter area T2, which is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration time of the accessory 34a. After executing Step S1603, the process proceeds to Step S1604.

  In step S1604, after subtracting 1 from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the process proceeds to step S1605 to determine whether the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0”. If it is determined in step S1605 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not “0” (S1605: NO), the present electric combination opening / closing control processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1605 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0” (S1605: YES), the process proceeds to step S1606, and the supporting flag is turned off. After that, the present electric combination opening / closing control process ends.

  If it is determined in step S1601 that the electric accessory 34a is not being opened (S1601: NO), the process advances to step S1607 to determine whether the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step S1607 that the second timer counter area T2 is not “0” (S1607: NO), the main control unit opening / closing control processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1507 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S1607: YES), the process proceeds to step S1608, and an opening process for controlling the electric accessory 34a to an open state is executed. . Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1609.

  In step S1609, it is determined whether the mode is the open / close execution mode. If it is determined that the mode is not the open / close execution mode (S1609: NO), the process proceeds to step S1610 to determine whether the mode is the high frequency support mode. I do.

  If it is determined in step S1610 that the current mode is the high-frequency support mode (S1610: YES), the process advances to step S1611 to set "800" (that is, 1.6 seconds) in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the present electric combination opening / closing control process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1609 that the current mode is the open / close execution mode (S1609: YES), or if it is determined in step S1610 that the current mode is not the high frequency support mode (S1610: NO), the process proceeds to step S1612, and the second "100" (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the timer counter area T2. After that, the present electric combination opening / closing control process ends.

<Standby processing>
Next, the standby process will be described. The standby process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 18: S509).

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the standby process. In step S1701, it is determined whether the standby state flag is ON. If it is determined in step S1701 that the standby state flag is ON (S1701: YES), the process proceeds to step S1702. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1701 that the standby state flag is not ON (S1701: NO), the standby processing ends.

  In step S1702, it is determined whether 15 seconds have elapsed since the standby state flag was turned ON. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the standby state timer counter Tw is 0. If the value of the standby state timer counter Tw is 0, 15 seconds have elapsed since the standby state flag was turned ON. Is determined. If it is determined in step S1702 that 15 seconds have elapsed since the standby state flag was turned ON, the process advances to step S1703. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1702 that 15 seconds have not elapsed since the standby state flag was turned on, the standby processing ends.

  In step S1703, the standby state flag is turned off, and the process proceeds to step S1704, where the transition condition satisfaction flag is turned on. After that, the process advances to step S1705 to set a transition condition satisfaction command. The transition condition satisfaction command is a command for causing each sub-side control device to recognize that 15 seconds have elapsed since the start of the standby state, that is, the transition condition has been satisfied. After executing Step S1705, the standby processing ends.

A6. Electrical configuration of the sound emission control device and the display control device:
Next, the electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

  FIG. 31 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. Note that some components such as the power supply device 85 are omitted. The MPU 92 is mounted on the sound emission control board 91 provided in the sound emission control device 90. The MPU 92 is an element including a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like.

  The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, an effect pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like are provided in a part of the area of the ROM 93.

  The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93. For example, in a part of the area of the RAM 94, various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, and the like are provided. It is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 be integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 92, and each may be configured individually as a chip.

  The MPU 92 has an input port and an output port. The main controller 60 is connected to the input side of the MPU 92. Various commands are received from main controller 60. The output side of the MPU 92 is connected to the effect operation button 24, the speaker 46, the various lamps 47, and the display control device 100.

  A display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102 which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, a video RAM 107. Is installed. It is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 be integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 102, and each may be configured individually as a chip.

  The MPU 102 analyzes the various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, generate an internal command for the VDP 105). .

  The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG image data for a background image.

  The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when the MPU 102 executes various programs.

  The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 41. The VDP 105 is also called an “rendering chip” because it is formed as an IC chip, and is a kind of microcomputer chip having a built-in firmware dedicated to a rendering process. The VDP 105 adjusts the respective timings of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, and the like, intervenes in reading and writing of data, and reads out the image data to be stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41.

  The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 41. The character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color pallet table that is referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 106 in a shared manner. Further, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which JPEG format image data for a background image stored in the program ROM 103 is stored in the character ROM 106.

  The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41. The display content of the symbol display device 41 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 107.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 62, the ROM 63, and the RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as a main MPU 62, a main ROM 63, and a main RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, the ROM 93, and the RAM 94 of the audio emission control device 90 are referred to as a sound light MPU 92 and a sound light side, respectively. The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also called a display MPU 102.

A7. Various processes executed in the sound emission control device and the display control device:
Next, an example of specific control executed in the audio light emission control device and the display control device will be described. First, the processing executed in the sound emission control device 90 will be described, and then, the processing executed in the display control device 100 will be described.

<Various processes executed in the sound emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt processing executed by the sound-side MPU 92 will be described.

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed in the sound-side MPU 92. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed at a relatively short cycle (for example, 2 msec). Hereinafter, processing of each step executed in the timer interrupt processing will be described.

  In step S1801, command storage processing is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing the received command in the sound-light RAM 94 when a command is received from the main MPU 62. The sound light RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for enabling storage and reading of commands received from the main MPU 62. The commands received from the main MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , Are sequentially read out according to the stored order. After executing Step S1801, the process proceeds to Step S1802.

  In step S1802, a command corresponding process for performing a process corresponding to the received command is executed. The details of the command handling process will be described later. After executing Step S1802, the process proceeds to Step S1803.

  In step S1803, a standby state transition process for reducing the output level (volume) of the audio in the standby state or starting the demonstration moving image is executed. Details of the standby state transition processing will be described later. After executing Step S1803, the process proceeds to Step S1804.

  In step S1804, a light emission control process for performing light emission control of various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control processing, the light emission of the various lamps 47 is controlled based on the light emission data read in the command corresponding processing in step S1802. After executing Step S1804, the process proceeds to Step S1805.

  In step S1805, an audio output control process for performing audio output control of the speaker 46 is executed. In the audio output control process, the audio output of the speaker 46 is controlled based on the audio output data read in the command corresponding process in step S1802. After executing step S1805, the present timer interrupt process ends.

<Command processing>
Next, a command corresponding process will be described. The command corresponding process is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 32: S1802).

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the command handling process. As described above, in the command corresponding process, a process corresponding to the command received from the main MPU 62 is executed. Hereinafter, processing of each step executed in the command corresponding processing will be described.

  In step S1901, it is determined whether a startup command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S1901 that a startup command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S1901: YES), the process advances to step S1902 to execute a startup command corresponding process. Details of the start-up command processing will be described later. After executing Step S1902, the process proceeds to Step S1903. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1901 that a startup command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S1901: NO), the process advances to step S1903 without executing step S1902.

  In step S1903, it is determined whether a hold command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S1903 that a hold command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S1903: YES), the process advances to step S1904 to execute a hold command handling process. Details of the pending command processing will be described later. After performing Step S1904, the process proceeds to Step S1905. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1903 that the hold command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S1903: NO), the process proceeds to step S1905 without executing step S1904.

  In step S1905, it is determined whether a change command and a type command have been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S1905 that the variation command and the type command have been received (S1905: YES), the process proceeds to step S1906. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1905 that the variation command and the type command have not been received (S1905: NO), the process proceeds to step S1907.

  In step S1906, an effect setting process is executed. In the effect setting process, a notice effect, a reach effect, a stop symbol, a fluctuation display pattern, and the like to be executed in the current game round are set. The details of the effect setting process will be described later. After performing Step S1906, the process proceeds to Step S1907.

  In step S1907, it is determined whether an opening command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S1907 that an opening command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S1907: YES), the flow advances to step S1908 to execute an opening effect setting process. In the opening effect setting process, the type of the jackpot included in the opening command received this time is specified, the content of the opening effect corresponding to the type of the jackpot is set, and the information corresponding to the content of the effect is set. An opening effect command is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1909.

  In step S1909, an opening / closing execution mode effect setting process is executed. In the opening / closing execution mode effect setting processing, the contents of the effect to be executed in the opening / closing execution mode are set based on the information on the number of rounds and the information on the jackpot type included in the opening command. After performing Step S1909, the process proceeds to Step S1910.

  If it is determined in step S1907 that the opening command has not been received (S1907: NO), the process proceeds to step S1910 without executing steps S1908 and S1909.

  In step S1910, it is determined whether a condition satisfaction command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S1910 that a condition satisfaction command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S1910: YES), the flow advances to step S1911 to set the sound light stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the sound light RAM 94. Turn the side condition satisfaction flag ON. After executing Step S1911, the process proceeds to Step S1912. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1910 that the condition satisfaction command has not been received (S1910: NO), the process proceeds to step S1912 without executing step S1911.

  In step S1912, it is determined whether or not an effect duplication avoidance command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S1912 that the effect duplication avoidance command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S1912: YES), the process proceeds to step S1913, in which the sound stored in the various flag storage area 94a of the sound light RAM 94 is set. Turn on the light side effect duplication flag. After executing Step S1913, the process proceeds to Step S1914. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1912 that the effect duplication avoidance command has not been received (S1912: NO), the process proceeds to step S1914 without executing step S1913.

  In step S1914, it is determined whether an ending command has been received. If it is determined in step S1914 that the ending command has been received (S1914: YES), the process advances to step S1915 to execute an ending effect setting process. The ending effect setting process is a process of setting the content of the ending effect in the ending period based on the information on the ending time included in the ending command received this time and the ON / OFF information of the sound-light-side condition satisfaction flag. is there. The ending effect setting process will be described later. After performing Step S1915, the process proceeds to Step S1920.

  If it is determined in step S1914 that the ending command has not been received (S1914: NO), the process proceeds to step S1916 without executing step S1915.

  In step S1916, it is determined whether a transition condition satisfaction command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S1916 that a transition condition satisfaction command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S1916: YES), the flow advances to step S1917 to turn on the volume reduction flag. The volume reduction flag is stored in the various flag storage area 94a, and is turned on at a timing when the process of reducing the output level (volume) of the audio is started, and at a timing when the output level (volume) of the audio becomes zero. This flag is turned off. After executing Step S1917, the process proceeds to Step S1918. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1916 that the transition condition satisfaction command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S1916: NO), the process proceeds to step S1918 without executing step S1917.

  In step S1918, it is determined whether a return condition satisfaction command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S1918 that the return condition establishment command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S1918: YES), the process proceeds to step S1919, and the return condition establishment flag is turned ON. The return condition satisfaction flag is stored in the various flag storage area 94a, and is turned on when the process of restoring the output level (volume) of the sound or the process of ending the demonstration moving image is started, and the output level of the sound ( This is a flag that is turned off when the demo movie ends. After executing Step S1919, the process proceeds to Step S1920. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1918 that the return condition satisfaction command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S1918: NO), the process proceeds to step S1920 without executing step S1919.

  In step S1920, other setting processing is executed. In other setting processing, for example, the effect contents corresponding to the high frequency support mode command, the low frequency support mode command, the opening command, and the closing command are set. When the effect operation button 24 is pressed, an effect operation command for recognizing that the effect operation button 24 is pressed is transmitted to the display-side MPU 102. After executing step S1920, the command corresponding process ends.

<Startup command support processing>
Next, the startup command processing will be described. The start-up command handling process is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio light emission control device 90 as a command handling process subroutine (FIG. 33: S1902).

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the startup command handling process. As described above, the startup command corresponding process is a process executed when a startup command is received from the main MPU 62. Hereinafter, the processing of each step executed in the startup command corresponding processing will be described.

  In step S2001, a demonstration moving image start command is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. The demonstration moving image start command is a command for causing the display side MPU 102 to start displaying the demonstration moving image. The display-side MPU 102 that has received the demonstration moving image start command starts processing for displaying the demonstration moving image on the symbol display device 41. After executing step S2001, the process proceeds to step S2002.

  In step S2002, the demonstration moving image display flag is turned ON. The demonstration moving image display flag is a flag indicating that the demonstration moving image is displayed on the symbol display device 41, and is turned on when the display of the demo moving image is started, and is turned off when the display of the demo moving image is completed. Is the flag to be set. After executing Step S2002, the process proceeds to Step S2003.

  In step S2003, the cueing determination flag is turned ON. As described above, when the return condition is satisfied and the output of the background music and the display of the background video are started, the cueing determination flag starts output and display from the temporal start position of the background music and the background video. It is a flag for determining whether or not. If the cueing determination flag is ON at the timing when the return condition is satisfied, when the output of the background music and the display of the background video are started, the output and display are started from the temporal start position of the background music and the background video. I do. After executing step S2003, the start-up command handling process ends.

<Pending command support processing>
Next, the hold command handling process will be described. The suspended command handling process is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio light emission control device 90 as a command handling process subroutine (FIG. 33: S1904).

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the hold command handling process. As described above, the hold command corresponding process is a process executed when a hold command is received from the main MPU 62. Hereinafter, the processing of each step executed in the pending command corresponding processing will be described.

  In step S2101, a winning update process is executed. In the update process at the time of winning, the number of pieces of hold information obtained based on winning in the first opening 33, the number of holding information obtained based on winning in the second opening 34, A process for enabling the sound light side MPU 92 to specify the total number of information is executed. Details of the update processing at the time of winning in step S2101 will be described later. In the following, the number of pieces of hold information acquired based on the winning in the first opening 33 is also referred to as “first reserved number”, and the number of pieces of holding information acquired based on the winning in the second opening 34 is The total number of the first reserved number and the second reserved number is also referred to as a “second reserved number” and the total number of the first reserved number and the second reserved number. After executing Step S2101, the process proceeds to Step S2102.

  In step S2102, a hold display control process is performed. Specifically, the number of pieces of hold information obtained based on the winning in the first starting port 33 specified in step S2101 and the number of pieces of hold information obtained based on the winning in the second starting port 34 , The display mode (color or combination of LED lamps to be turned on) of the first hold display section 37c and the second hold display section 37d is controlled. After executing step S2102, the pending command handling process ends.

<Update process when winning>
Next, the update processing at the time of winning will be described. The update process at the time of winning is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the hold command corresponding process (FIG. 35: S2101).

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the updating process at the time of winning. In step S2201, it is determined whether or not the hold command to be read this time has been transmitted based on the winning in the first opening 33. If it is determined in step S2201 that the hold command to be read this time has been transmitted based on the winning in the first starting port 33 (S2201: YES), the process proceeds to step S2202, and the sound light is output. The update processing of the first reserved number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the side RAM 94 is executed. The first pending number counter area is a counter area for specifying the number of pending information acquired based on winning in the first starting port 33 in the sound-light-side MPU 92. In the update processing of the first pending number counter area, the information of the first pending number counter area is updated to the information of the pending number included in the pending command to be read this time. After executing Step S2202, the process proceeds to Step S2204.

  If it is determined in step S2201 that the hold command to be read this time is not transmitted based on the winning in the first opening 33 (S2201: NO), that is, the hold command is the second opening If it is determined that the data has been transmitted based on the winning of the No. 34, the process proceeds to step S2203, and the updating process of the second reserved number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound light RAM 94 is executed. . The second pending number counter area is a counter area for specifying the number of pending information acquired based on the winning in the second starting port 34 in the sound-light-side MPU 92. In the update processing of the second reserved number counter area, the information of the second reserved number counter area is updated to the information of the reserved number included in the command that has been read this time. After executing Step S2203, the process proceeds to Step S2204.

  The reason why the processes in steps S2202 and S2203 are described above will be described. In the present embodiment, while the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, backup power is supplied to the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, whereas backup power is supplied to the RAM 94 of the audio light emission control device 90. Not done. For this reason, when the power is cut off in a situation where the hold information relating to the winning in the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 is stored in the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, the main control device 60 displays the hold information. While being stored and held, the sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the number of hold information is zero. In this case, if a configuration is employed in which the first hold number counter area or the second hold number counter area is counted up each time the sound emission control device 90 receives a hold command, the main control device 60 actually stores the hold command. There may be a problem that the number of held pieces of information and the number of held pieces of information recognized by the sound emission control device 90 do not match. On the other hand, as in the above-described embodiment, the main control device 60 transmits the hold command including the information on the number of holds, and the sound emission control device 90 receives the hold command every time the command is received. By adopting a configuration in which the information on the number of held items included is set in the first held number counter area or the second held number counter area, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above-described inconvenience.

  In step S2204, an update process of the total reserved number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound light RAM 94 is executed. The total reserved number counter area stores the sum of the number of pending information acquired based on the winning in the first opening 33 and the number of the pending information acquired based on the winning in the second opening 34. This is a counter area for specifying in the side MPU 92. In the update processing, the information of the total reserved number counter area is represented by the sum of the information of the reserved number measured in the first reserved number counter area and the information of the reserved number measured in the second reserved number counter area. Update to After executing Step S2204, the update processing at the time of the final winning is ended.

<Direction setting process>
Next, the effect setting processing will be described. The effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the command corresponding process (FIG. 33: S1906).

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the effect setting process. As described above, the effect setting process is a process executed when it is determined that the variation command and the type command have been received, and is a process for setting the content of the effect executed in the current game round. . Hereinafter, specific processing of the effect setting processing will be described.

  In step S2301, the fluctuation command received this time is read, and from the command, information on the presence / absence of a big hit, the type of big hit, the presence / absence of reach, and the fluctuation time is read. Then, the read information is stored in the register of the MPU 92. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2302.

  In step S2302, it is determined whether the sound-light-side condition satisfaction flag is ON. If it is determined in step S2302 that the sound-light-side condition satisfaction flag is not ON (S2302: NO), the process proceeds to step S2303.

  In step S2303, the effect type setting process is executed. The effect type setting process executed in step S2303 is a process of setting the contents of the notice effect and the reach effect in the game times. The effect type setting process will be described later. After executing Step S2303, the process proceeds to Step S2304.

  In step S2304, a stop symbol setting process is executed. In the stop symbol setting process, if the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game is a 16R probability variable jackpot, 8R probability variable jackpot, 16R ordinary jackpot, or 8R ordinary jackpot, the same symbol on the activated line L The information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination is established is set as the information of the current stop symbol. Specifically, when the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game is a 16R probability variable jackpot or an 8R probability variable jackpot, the same odd symbol combination can be selected as the same symbol combination, and the same symbol combination can be selected. A combination of even symbols may be selected. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the selectivity is the same for the combination of the same odd symbols and the combination of the same even symbols, but instead, the former is more selective than the latter. A configuration having a higher rate may be adopted, and a configuration in which the latter has a higher selectivity than the former may be adopted. In addition, the combination of the symbol “7” is selected only in the case of the 16R probability change big hit. When the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game is 16R normal jackpot or 8R normal jackpot, the same even symbol combination is selected as the same symbol combination.

  If the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game is an outlier, it is determined whether or not a reach has occurred based on the content of the change command. If it is determined that the combination corresponds to the occurrence of the reach, the stop result is that the same symbol combination is not established on the activated line L, and the stop result is that the reach symbol combination is established on the activated line L. The information is determined as the information of the current stop result. On the other hand, when it is determined that it does not correspond to the occurrence of the reach, the stop result is that the same symbol combination is not established on the activated line L, and the stop result is that the reach symbol combination is not established on the activated line L. The corresponding information is set as the information of the current stop symbol. After executing Step S2304, the process proceeds to Step S2305.

  In step S2305, a process for determining a fluctuation display pattern of the current game is executed. In the process, the information of the fluctuation time of the current game time is specified from the content of the fluctuation command received this time, and the information of the fluctuation time and the combination of the information of the stop symbol specified in step S2304 are combined. Select the corresponding variable display pattern. When selecting the variation display pattern, the variation display pattern table stored in the variation display pattern table storage area 93b of the sound light ROM 93 is referred to. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2306.

  In step S2306, it is determined whether or not the jackpot lottery relating to the current game has been won. Specifically, the presence or absence of a big hit is determined based on the received fluctuation command. If it is determined in step S2306 that the jackpot lottery relating to the current game has been won (S2306: YES), the flow proceeds to step S2307.

  In step S2307, the information of the effect type, the stop symbol, and the variable display pattern set in the current game time is stored. Specifically, the setting contents in the effect setting processing in step S2303 are stored. This processing is performed in order to reproduce the effect in the game round that has won the jackpot lottery. After executing Step S2307, the process proceeds to Step S2312. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S2306 that the jackpot lottery relating to the current game has not been won (S2306: NO), the process proceeds to step S2312 without executing step S2307.

  If it is determined in step S2302 that the sound-light-side condition satisfaction flag is ON (S2302: YES), the process proceeds to step S2308. That is, when it is determined that the process corresponding to the case a2 described in FIG. 9 is to be performed, the process proceeds to step S2308.

  In step S2308, the information of the effect type, the stop symbol, and the variation display pattern stored in step S2307 of the effect setting process relating to the previous game time are read. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2309.

  In step S2309, an effect type setting process is executed based on the information on the effect type, the stop symbol, and the variable display pattern read out in step S2308. That is, an effect having the same content as the effect performed in the previous game round is set. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2310.

  In step S2310, stop symbol setting processing is executed based on the information on the effect type, the stop symbol, and the variable display pattern read in step S2308. That is, a stop symbol having the same content as the stop symbol displayed in the previous game round is set. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2311.

  In step S2311, a variable display pattern setting process is executed based on the information on the effect type, the stop symbol, and the variable display pattern read in step S2308. That is, a variable display pattern having the same content as the variable display pattern displayed in the previous game round is set. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2312.

  In step S2312, information of the effect type, the stop symbol, and the fluctuation display pattern set in the current game time are set in the effect command. After that, the process advances to step S2313 to transmit the effect command to the display-side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 executes a process of displaying the effect content corresponding to the received effect command on the symbol display device 41. After executing Step S2313, the process proceeds to Step S2314, and after performing the update process at the start of the fluctuation, the effect setting process ends. Details of the update process at the start of the change will be described later.

<Update process at the start of fluctuation>
Next, the update process at the start of the fluctuation will be described. The updating process at the start of the change is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the effect setting process (FIG. 37: S2314).

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the updating process at the start of the change. In step S2401, it is determined whether the variation command received this time is the first variation command. If it is determined in step S2401 that the variation command received this time is the first variation command (S2401: YES), the process proceeds to step S2402, where the first reserved number counter stored in the sound-light RAM 94 is incremented. Subtract one. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2404.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2401 that the variation command received this time is not the first variation command (S2401: NO), the process proceeds to step S2403, where the second reserved number stored in the sound-light side RAM 94 is stored. The counter is decremented by one. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2404.

  In step S2404, the information of the total reserved number counter area is updated so that the total reserved number stored in the total reserved number counter area of the sound-light side RAM 94 is decremented by one. Thereafter, the updating process at the start of the change is ended.

<Opening effect setting process>
Next, the opening effect setting process will be described. The opening effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the command corresponding process (FIG. 33: S1908).

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the opening effect setting process. In step S2501, it is determined whether the sound-light-side condition satisfaction flag is ON. If it is determined in step S2501 that the sound-light-side condition satisfaction flag is not ON (S2501: NO), the process proceeds to step S2502.

  In step S2502, a normal start effect is set as an opening effect. In the present embodiment, as described in case a2 of FIG. 9, as an opening effect in the special game state, an opening effect to be executed only in a special case, such as a specific start effect (see FIG. 10C), is prepared. are doing. In step S2502, a start effect (normal start effect) to be executed other than in a special case such as the case a2 is set as an opening effect. After executing Step S2502, the process proceeds to Step S2505.

  If it is determined in step S2501 that the sound-light-side condition satisfaction flag is ON (S2501: YES), the process proceeds to step S2503. In step S2503, the specific start effect is set as an opening effect. After executing step S2503, the process advances to step S2504 to turn off the sound light side condition satisfaction flag. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2505.

  In step S2505, an opening effect command is transmitted to display-side MPU. The opening effect command includes the information on the opening effect set in step S2502 or step S2503. The display side MPU 102 executes a process of displaying the effect contents corresponding to the received opening effect command on the symbol display device 41. After executing step S2505, the present opening effect setting process ends.

<Ending effect setting process>
Next, an ending effect setting process will be described. The ending effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the command corresponding process (FIG. 33: S1915).

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the ending effect setting process. In step S2601, it is determined whether the sound-light side effect duplication flag is ON. If it is determined in step S2601 that the sound-light-side effect duplication flag is not ON (S2601: NO), the process proceeds to step S2602.

  In step S2602, it is determined whether the sound-light-side condition satisfaction flag is ON. If it is determined in step S2602 that the sound-light-side condition satisfaction flag is not ON (S2602: NO), the process proceeds to step S2603. That is, if it is determined that an effect corresponding to the ending period in the special game state after the first game round in case a1 of FIG. 9 (indicative effect, special game state reproduction effect, and specific end effect) is to be executed, the process proceeds to step S2603. move on.

  In step S2603, the information of the effect type, stop symbol, and variable display pattern stored in step S2307 of the effect setting process (FIG. 37) is read. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2604.

  In step S2604, a special game state reproduction effect is constructed from the information read in step S2603. After that, the process advances to step S2605 to set the suggestion effect, the special game state reproduction effect, and the specific end effect as the ending effect. That is, the effect to be executed in the ending period in the special game state after the first game round in case a1 of FIG. 9 is set. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2609.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2602 that the sound-light-side condition satisfaction flag is ON (S2602: YES), the process proceeds to step S2606. That is, when it is determined that an effect (suggested effect) corresponding to the ending period in the special game state after the first game round in case a2 of FIG. 9 is to be executed, the process proceeds to step S2606.

  In step S2606, the suggestion effect is set as an ending effect. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2609.

  If it is determined in step S2601 that the sound-light-side effect duplication flag is ON (S2601: YES), the process proceeds to step S2607. That is, when it is determined that an effect (normal ending effect) corresponding to the ending period in the special game state after the second game round in case a2 of FIG. 9 is to be executed, the process proceeds to step S2607.

  In step S2607, the normal ending effect is set as the ending effect. As described above, the normal ending effect is an effect indicating that the special game state ends. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2608.

  In step S2608, the sound-light-side effect duplication flag is turned off, and thereafter, the flow proceeds to step S2609.

  In step S2609, an ending effect command including information corresponding to the effect contents set in step S2605, step S2606, or step S2607 is transmitted to the display side MPU 102 of the display control device 100. The display side MPU 102 executes a process of displaying the effect content corresponding to the received ending effect command on the symbol display device 41. After executing step S2609, the ending effect setting process ends.

  In the present embodiment, when the special game state reproduction effect is executed, as shown in steps S2603 to S2605 and S2609, the effect type, the stop symbol, and the variation display pattern executed in the first game round are shown. The information is stored in the sound emission control device 90, and when the special game state reproduction effect is executed, the command indicating the effect type, the stop symbol, and the variation display pattern executed in the first game round is part of the ending command. Is transmitted from the audio light emission control device 90 to the display control device 100 to cause the symbol display device 41 to display an image corresponding to the special game state reproduction effect. Specifically, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 receives the command indicating the effect type, the stop symbol, and the variable display pattern executed in the first game round from the audio light emission control device 90 as a part of the ending command. The pattern data table corresponding to the combination of the effect type, the stop symbol, and the fluctuation display pattern indicated by the command is read from the program ROM 103 and written to the work RAM 104. The pattern data table is necessary for displaying an image for one frame at the image update timing when displaying a moving image corresponding to the effect for the current game on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. This is an information group in which various processes are defined. That is, in the pattern data table, an information group corresponding to each frame from the start timing to the end timing in the present game effect is defined.

  The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads the information group corresponding to each frame, and issues a drawing instruction to the VDP 105 to display an image of one frame. The VDP 105 reads an image from the character ROM 106 in accordance with a drawing instruction from the MPU 102, generates image data to be displayed on the display surface 41a in the video RAM 107, and outputs the generated image data to the symbol display device 41 to display the image. One frame image is displayed on the surface 41a. The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 sequentially instructs the VDP 105 to draw the information group of each frame stored in the pattern data table, thereby rendering the effect type and the stop symbol executed in the first game round. The variable display pattern can be executed as a special game state reproduction effect.

  In the present embodiment, by executing the above processing, a special game state reproduction effect is executed. In addition, as a process of executing the special game state reproduction effect, the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 perform other operations. May be adopted. For example, in place of the process of storing the information indicating the effect type, the stop symbol, and the variable display pattern executed in the first game round in the sound emission control device 90 as in the present embodiment, the sound emission control device 90 displays the information. A command for instructing the control device 100 to temporarily store the pattern data table corresponding to the combination of the effect type, the stop symbol, and the variable display pattern executed in the first game round is transmitted. The display control device 100 temporarily stores a pattern data table corresponding to a combination of the effect type, the stop symbol, and the variable display pattern executed in the first game round in accordance with the command.

  Thereafter, when the special game state reproduction effect is executed, the audio light emission control device 90 outputs a command to the display control device 100 to instruct the VDP 105 to perform a drawing instruction in accordance with the temporarily stored pattern data table. . The display control device 100 can execute a special game state reproduction effect by instructing the VDP 105 to draw in accordance with the temporarily stored pattern data table in accordance with the command. As described above, various processes can be employed in the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 as the process of executing the special game state reproduction effect.

<Standby state transition processing>
Next, the standby state transition processing will be described. The standby state transition processing is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interruption processing (S1803 in FIG. 32).

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the standby state transition processing. In step S2701, it is determined whether the return condition satisfaction flag is ON. If it is determined in step S2701 that the return condition satisfaction flag is not ON (S2701: NO), the process proceeds to step S2702.

  In step S2702, it is determined whether the demonstration moving image displaying flag is ON. If it is determined in step S2702 that the demonstration moving image displaying flag is not ON (S2702: NO), the process proceeds to step S2703. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2702 that the demonstration moving image displaying flag is ON (S2702: YES), the standby state transition processing ends.

  In step S2703, it is determined whether the demonstration moving image start waiting flag is ON. The demonstration moving image start waiting flag is a flag for specifying in the sound emission control device 90 that the period is a period of waiting for the start of the demonstration moving image, and is turned on when the output level (volume) of the sound becomes zero. The flag is turned off at a timing when 5 seconds have passed without the return condition being satisfied after the output level (volume) of the sound becomes zero. If it is determined in step S2703 that the demonstration moving image start waiting flag is not ON (S2703: NO), the process proceeds to step S2704.

  In step S2704, it is determined whether the volume reduction flag is ON. If it is determined in step S2704 that the volume reduction flag is ON (S2704: YES), the flow advances to step S2705. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2704 that the volume reduction flag is not ON (S2704: NO), the standby state transition processing ends.

  In step S2705, a process of reducing the output level (volume) of the sound is performed. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the output level (volume) of the audio is set to 3000 levels, and a process of lowering the output level of the audio by one level is executed. In the present embodiment, the standby state transition processing is executed in a cycle of 2 msec, so that the output level (volume) of the sound becomes zero from the maximum value in about six seconds. After executing Step S2705, the process proceeds to Step S2706.

  In step S2706, it is determined whether the output level (volume) of the sound has become zero. If it is determined in step S2706 that the audio output level (volume) has become zero (S2706: YES), the flow advances to step S2707 to turn off the volume reduction flag, and the flow advances to step S2708 to wait for the start of the demonstration moving image. Turn on the flag. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2709. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2706 that the output level (volume) of the sound is not zero (S2706: NO), the standby state transition processing ends.

  In step S2709, a demonstration moving image start waiting time setting process is executed. Specifically, “2500” (that is, 5.0 seconds) is set in the demonstration moving image start waiting timer counter Tx stored in the various counter areas 94b. The demo moving image start waiting timer counter Tx is a counter for measuring the elapsed time from when the output level (volume) of the sound becomes zero, and is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt processing is started, that is, every 2 msec. You. After executing step S2709, the standby state transition processing ends.

  If it is determined in step S2703 that the demonstration moving image start waiting flag is ON (S2703: YES), the process proceeds to step S2710.

  In step S2710, it is determined whether the five-second demonstration moving image start waiting period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the demo movie start waiting timer counter Tx is 0. If the value of the demo movie start wait timer counter Tx is 0, the 5 second demo movie start wait period ends. It is determined that it has been performed. If it is determined in step S2710 that the demonstration moving image start waiting period has ended, the process advances to step S2711. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2710 that the demonstration moving image start waiting period has not ended, the standby state transition process ends.

  In step S2711, background music output stop processing is executed. After that, the process advances to step S2712 to transmit a demonstration moving image start command to the display side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 that has received the demonstration moving image start command starts processing for displaying the demonstration moving image on the symbol display device 41. After executing Step S2712, the process proceeds to Step S2713.

  In step S2713, the demonstration moving image start waiting flag is turned off, and the process advances to step S2714 to turn on the demonstration moving image display flag. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2715, where the cueing determination flag is turned ON, and the standby state transition processing ends.

  If it is determined in step S2701 that the return condition satisfaction flag is ON (S2701: YES), the process advances to step S2716 to determine whether the cueing determination flag is ON. If it is determined in step S2716 that the cueing determination flag is not ON (S2716: NO), the flow advances to step S2717 to return the audio output level (volume) to a value preset by the player. In the present embodiment, since the value preset by the player is the maximum value, the output level (volume) of the sound is returned to the maximum value. After executing Step S2717, the process proceeds to Step S2718.

  In step S2718, it is determined whether the volume reduction flag is ON. If it is determined in step S2718 that the volume reduction flag is ON (S2718: YES), the flow advances to step S2719 to turn off the volume reduction flag. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2720. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2718 that the volume reduction flag is not ON (S2718: NO), the process proceeds to step S2720 without executing step S2719.

  In step S2720, it is determined whether the demonstration moving image start waiting flag is ON. If it is determined in step S2720 that the demonstration movie start wait is ON (S2720: YES), the flow advances to step S2721 to turn off the demonstration movie start wait flag. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2722, where the return condition satisfaction flag is turned off. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2720 that the demonstration moving image start waiting flag is not ON (S2720: NO), the process proceeds to step S2722 without executing step S2721, and the return condition satisfaction flag is turned OFF. After executing Step S2722, the standby state transition processing ends.

  If it is determined in step S2716 that the cueing determination flag is ON (S2716: YES), the flow advances to step S2723 to transmit a demonstration moving image end command to the display side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 that has received the demonstration moving image end command executes a process for ending the display of the demonstration moving image. After executing step S2723, the process advances to step S2724 to turn off the demonstration moving image display flag. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2725.

  In step S2725, a background moving image start command is transmitted to display MPU. The display-side MPU 102 that has received the background moving image start command starts processing for displaying the background moving image on the symbol display device 41 from the temporal start position. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2726.

  In step S2726, the output level (volume) of the sound is returned to a value preset by the player. In the present embodiment, since the value preset by the player is the maximum value, the output level (volume) of the sound is returned to the maximum value. After performing Step S2726, the process proceeds to Step S2727.

  In step S2727, background music output start processing is executed. Specifically, since the cueing determination flag is ON, the output is started from the temporal start position of the background music. After that, the flow advances to step S2728 to turn off the cueing determination flag. After that, the flow advances to step S2729 to turn off the return condition satisfaction flag, and ends the standby state transition process.

<Various processes executed in display control device>
Next, processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

  The processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 is mainly a main processing that is repeatedly executed until the power is turned off after the power is turned on, and is executed when a command is received from the sound emission control apparatus 90. There are a command interrupt process and a V interrupt process executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal transmitted from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering process of the image for one frame is completed.

  The MPU 102 executes main processing after power-on, and executes command interruption processing and V interruption processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interruption signal. When the command reception and the detection of the V interrupt signal are performed at the same time, the command interrupt process is executed with priority. Therefore, the V interrupt processing can be executed by quickly reflecting the content of the command received from the sound emission control device 90.

<Main processing>
Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing a main process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the main process is executed when the power is turned on, and is continuously executed until the power is turned off. Hereinafter, processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described.

  In step S2801, an initial setting process is performed. Specifically, first, a process of initializing the MPU 102 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107. Further, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107. In addition, other settings necessary for initialization are performed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2802.

  In step S2802, interrupt permission setting is executed. After the interrupt permission setting is executed, in the main processing, an infinite loop processing is executed until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interrupt permission is set, the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing described below are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, a command interruption process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interruption process is a process executed each time a command is received from the sound emission control device 90.

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing a command interruption process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. In step S2901, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is stored in a command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. Various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read out by a command determination process of a V interrupt process described later, and a process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, the V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the V interrupt process is a process executed when a V interrupt signal from the VDP 105 is detected. In the V-interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command storage area are executed by the command interrupt process, and an image to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 is specified. Execute the display instructions.

  As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering process of the image for one frame is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 102. Therefore, when the MPU 102 executes the V interrupt processing in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction to the VDP 105 is issued every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the drawing processing or the display processing of the image is not completed, so that the VDP 105 starts drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image accompanying the new drawing instruction from being developed in the frame buffer area in which the image information inside is stored. Hereinafter, the details of the processing of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described.

  In step S3001, a command corresponding process is executed. In the command corresponding process, the contents of the command stored in the command storage area are analyzed by the command interrupt process (FIG. 43), and the process corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, when an effect command is stored, control of image drawing and display is started so that the effect mode specified by the effect command is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

  If the effect operation command has been stored, it is determined whether or not it is during the reception period of the press of the effect operation button 24, and if it is determined that it is the reception period of the press of the effect operation button 24, the effect operation is performed. The control of the drawing and display of the image is started so that the effect mode corresponding to the pressing of the button 24 is displayed on the symbol display device 41. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not during the reception period of the press of the effect operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

  In the command corresponding process (S3001), all commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and a process corresponding to all analyzed commands is executed. The reason will be described. This is because the command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds at which the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during the 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the sound emission control device 90 and the effect is started, there is a high possibility that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode of the effect such as the notice effect or the stop symbol set by the sound emission control device 90 is quickly grasped, and the effect image according to the mode is displayed on the symbol. The drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the device 41. The details of the command handling process will be described later.

  In step S3002, a display setting process is performed. In the display setting process, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the symbol display device 41 is specified based on the type of the screen to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 set by the command corresponding process (S3001) or the like. . Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3003.

  In step S3003, task processing is performed. In the task processing, based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 specified by the display setting processing (S3002), the type of the character (sprite, display object) constituting the image is determined. At the same time, various parameters necessary for drawing such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined for each character (sprite). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3004.

  In step S3004, a drawing process is performed. In the drawing process, the types of various characters constituting one frame and parameters necessary for drawing each character, which are determined by the task process (S3003), are transmitted to the VDP 105. The VDP 105 executes an image drawing process based on these pieces of information, and displays the image drawn based on the information received at the time of the immediately preceding V interrupt process on the symbol display device 41 together with a drive signal. The image data is transmitted to the symbol display device 41. After that, the process advances to step S3005 to execute other processing, and then ends the V interrupt processing.

<Command processing>
Next, a command corresponding process will be described. The command corresponding process is executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 as a subroutine of the V interrupt process (FIG. 44: S3001).

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the command handling process. In step S3101, it is determined whether an effect command is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. If it is determined in step S3101 that an effect command is stored, the process advances to step S3102 to execute an effect display start process corresponding to the effect command. Specifically, control of drawing and display of an image is started so that the effect mode specified by the effect command is displayed on the symbol display device 41. After executing Step S3102, the process proceeds to Step S3103. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3101 that the effect command is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3103 without executing step S3102.

  In step S3103, it is determined whether an opening effect command is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. If it is determined in step S3103 that the opening effect command is stored, the process advances to step S3104 to execute a display start process of the opening effect corresponding to the opening effect command. Specifically, control of drawing and display of an image is started so that the effect mode specified by the opening effect command is displayed on the symbol display device 41. After the opening effect is completed, the control of drawing and displaying the image is started so that the opening / closing execution mode effect is displayed on the symbol display device 41. After executing Step S3104, the process proceeds to Step S3105. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3103 that the opening effect command has not been stored, the process proceeds to step S3105 without executing step S3104.

  In step S3105, it is determined whether an ending effect command is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. If it is determined in step S3105 that the ending effect command is stored, the process advances to step S3106 to execute an ending effect display start process corresponding to the ending effect command. Specifically, control of drawing and display of an image is started so that the effect mode designated by the ending effect command is displayed on the symbol display device 41. After executing Step S3106, the process proceeds to Step S3107. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3105 that the ending effect command has not been stored, the process proceeds to step S3107 without executing step S3106.

  In step S3107, it is determined whether or not a demonstration moving image start command is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. If it is determined in step S3107 that the demonstration moving image start command is stored, the process advances to step S3108 to execute a demonstration moving image display start process. Specifically, control of drawing and display of an image is started so that the demonstration moving image designated by the demonstration moving image start command is displayed on the symbol display device 41. In the present embodiment, the display of the demonstration moving image is repeated until a demo moving image end command described later is received. After executing Step S3108, the process proceeds to Step S3109. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3107 that the demonstration moving image start command is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3109 without executing step S3108.

  In step S3109, it is determined whether a demonstration moving image end command is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. If it is determined in step S3109 that the demo moving image end command is stored, the process advances to step S3110 to execute processing for ending the display of the demo moving image. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3111. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3109 that the demonstration moving image end command is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3111 without executing step S3110.

  In step S3111, it is determined whether a background moving image start command is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. If it is determined in step S3111 that the background moving image start command is stored, the process advances to step S3112 to execute processing for starting display of the background moving image. Specifically, control of drawing and display of an image is started so that the background moving image is displayed on the symbol display device 41 from the temporal start position. After executing Step S3112, the process proceeds to Step S3113. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3111 that the background moving image start command is not stored, the process advances to step S3113 without executing step S3112.

  In step S3113, it is determined whether another command is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104, and a process corresponding to the stored command is executed. For example, when the above-mentioned effect operation command is stored, the processing performed when the above-described effect operation command is stored is executed. After that, the command corresponding processing ends.

  As described above, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, as in the case a1, when the jackpot lottery related to the second game time is out of order, the announcement effect and the reach effect performed after the suggestion effect. And the result announcement effect is executed as a special game state reproduction effect for reproducing the effect performed in the first game round, and the player also recognizes that the effect is to reproduce the effect already executed. On the other hand, as in case a2, when the jackpot lottery relating to the second game time has been won, the notice effect, the reach effect, and the result announcement effect performed after the suggestion effect have already been executed on the effect. It is performed as an effect that reproduces the effect that has been performed, but is actually a game time reproduction effect that is executed due to winning in the jackpot lottery related to the second game time. If the player has previously watched the special game state reproduction effect in the case a1, the player performs the game time reproduction effect in the second game time of the case a2 in the first game time as in the case a1. It is difficult to predict that the winning has been won in the jackpot lottery relating to the second game round, while recognizing that this is merely a reproduction of the effect. In such a state, after the notice effect and the reach effect have been executed in the second game time, the player is notified by the result notification effect that the jackpot lottery related to the second game time has been won. For the first time, the notice effect, the reach effect, and the result notification effect executed in the second game time are not reproductions of the effect performed in the mere first game time, but the second game time. Recognize that the game has been executed as a result of winning the jackpot lottery pertaining to the round. As described above, by executing the special game state reproduction effect in the case a1 and the game time reproduction effect in the case a2, the game is provided with an unexpectedness, and at least a part of the effect performed in the first game time is reproduced. This can give the player a sense of expectation. Further, by making the second game round in the case a2 an unexpected development of the player, the player can be surprised and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, in case a2, it is suggested that the announcement effect, the reach effect, and the result announcement effect executed in the first game time are reproduced even though the jackpot in the second game time has been won. Since the suggested effect is executed, it is more difficult for the player to expect that the player has won the jackpot lottery related to the second game round. Therefore, surprisingness can be given to the game.

  Also, in case a2, when the jackpot lottery related to the second game round is won, the reach effect executed after the suggestion effect is executed as a reproduction of the effect already executed on the effect, but is actually executed. Is executed due to winning in the jackpot lottery related to the second game round. Therefore, as a case where the reach effect is executed, a case where it is executed as an essential function of suggesting the degree of expectation regarding the success or failure of the jackpot lottery to the player, a case where it is executed as a reproduction of the already executed effect, The effect is performed as a reproduction of the effect that has already been performed, but in actuality, at least three cases, that is, the case where the effect is performed due to winning in the jackpot lottery related to the second game round, are set. can do. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's attention degree, interest degree, and expectation for the reach effect.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, after the volume of the background music becomes zero and when the return condition is satisfied after the display of the demonstration moving image is started (FIG. 11), the display control device 100 returns the display mode of the symbol display device 41 from the mode displaying the demonstration video to the mode displaying the background video. Then, when displaying the background moving image on the symbol display device 41, the display control device 100 starts displaying the background moving image from a predetermined time position. Further, the sound emission control device 90 executes a process of returning the volume of the background music to the volume set in advance by the player, and when outputting the background music, from the predetermined time position of the background music. Start output. Therefore, the display of the background moving image and the output of the background music can be easily synchronized, as compared with a configuration in which the temporal position at which the display of the background moving image is started according to the timing at which the return condition is satisfied. As a result, the quality of the game effect can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, after the volume of the background music becomes zero and when the return condition is satisfied after the display of the demonstration moving image is started (FIG. 11), the display control device 100 Starts display from the temporal start position "01" of the background moving image, and the sound emission control device 90 starts output from the temporal start position "01" of the background music. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort given to the player as compared with a configuration in which the display of the background moving image is started at a position in the middle of time and the output of the background music is started at a position in the middle of time. For example, if a configuration is adopted in which display is started from a position in the middle of the background moving image in time and output is started from a position in the middle of the background music in time, after the return condition is satisfied, Since the user views the background moving image and the background music from a position in the middle of time, he / she may feel uncomfortable or feel unsatisfactory that there is a portion of the background moving image and the background music that has not been watched. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the background video and the background music can be watched from the temporal start position by the player, so that the uncomfortable feeling given to the player can be reduced, It is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction that all of the background moving image and the background music can be viewed from the temporal start position. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, if the return condition is satisfied after the volume of the background music becomes zero and before the display of the demonstration moving image is started (FIG. 12), the display control is performed. The device 100 continues to display the background moving image on the symbol display device 41, and the sound emission control device 90 executes the process of returning the volume of the background music to the volume set in advance by the player. While maintaining the synchronization between the display and the output of the background music, it is possible to return to the mode before the transition condition is satisfied without a sense of incongruity with a natural flow.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, when the return condition is satisfied while the volume of the background music is being reduced (FIG. 13), the display control device 100 continues to display the background moving image on the symbol display device 41. Since the sound emission control device 90 performs the process of returning the volume of the background music to the volume set in advance by the player, the transition condition is satisfied while maintaining the synchronization between the display of the background moving image and the output of the background music. It is possible to return to the mode before the operation without a sense of incongruity with a natural flow.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, it is determined that the transition condition is satisfied when 15 seconds have elapsed without any of the special game state and the next game time being started after the game time has ended. In a state in which there is a high possibility that the player is not playing a game, the volume of the background music can be reduced over time.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, when the game starts in the standby state, it is determined that the return condition is satisfied, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 returns to the mode of displaying the background moving image, and the background music is played. Since the output mode returns to the mode in which background music is output at a volume set in advance by the player, the sense of expectation that the game has been started can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

B. Second embodiment:
FIG. 46 is a time chart illustrating processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. In the case a2 shown in FIG. 9B of the first embodiment, a jackpot lottery is won in the first game round, a jackpot lottery is also won in the second game round, and the first game round is performed. The processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 when the and the second game times are continuous has been described.

  On the other hand, in the second embodiment, as a case b1 shown in FIG. 46A, a jackpot lottery is won in the first game round, and a jackpot lottery is also won in the second game round. Processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 when another game time (hereinafter, also referred to as a preceding game time) exists between the first game time and the second game time will be described. In addition, the jackpot lottery in the preceding game round is missing.

  As shown in FIG. 46 (a), when a jackpot lottery is won in the first game round, the pachinko machine 10 executes a notice effect and a reach effect. After executing the reach effect, the pachinko machine 10 executes a result notification effect of notifying the player of the result of the jackpot lottery relating to the first game round to the player. In the first game round, a jackpot is announced as a result announcement effect.

  Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 shifts the gaming state to the special gaming state. In the special game state, an opening effect, an opening / closing execution mode, and an ending effect are executed. In the present embodiment, in the special game state after the first game round, the opening effect indicates the start of the special game state (normal opening effect), and the ending effect indicates the end of the special game state. The ending effect (normal ending effect) is executed. That is, the suggestion effect is not executed as the ending effect in the special game state as in the case a2 in FIG. 9B.

  When the special game state ends, the preceding game round is executed. In the present embodiment, the suggestion effect is executed in the preceding game round.

  FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display mode of the symbol display device 41 when performing the suggestion effect in the preceding game round. As shown in the figure, when the suggestion effect is executed, the display surface 41a is divided into a display area 41aS and a display area 41aL. Then, in the display area 41aS, a symbol change display and a stop display are executed. Specifically, in the unit game time, the symbol display is changed during the variable time, and the symbol stop display is executed during the stop time. On the other hand, in the display area 41aL, a suggestion effect is executed. In this way, by displaying the symbol change display and the stop display in the small area of the display surface 41a, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect without giving a sense of incongruity to the player in the preceding game. In addition, the change display and the stop display of the symbol may not be displayed on the display surface 41a, or a predetermined mark or character displayed in synchronization with the change display and the stop display of the symbol may be displayed blinking and lit. . Even in this case, the suggestion effect can be executed without giving a sense of incongruity to the player in the preceding game round.

  As shown in FIG. 46 (a), the pachinko machine 10 executes the second game time after executing the preceding game time. As described above, in the example shown in the case b1 of FIG. 46A, even in the second game round, the jackpot is won. The pachinko machine 10 performs a game time reproduction effect that reproduces the effect performed in the first game time as the effect in the second game time. That is, the announcement effect, the reach effect, and the result announcement effect (big hit announcement) executed in the first game round are executed. In this case, the result announcement effect (big hit announcement) has a function as a part of the game time reproduction effect and also has a function as a result announcement about the second game time jackpot lottery. Then, the second game time is ended with the end of the game time reproduction effect.

  In the second game round, since the jackpot has been won, the pachinko machine 10 shifts the game state to the special game state after the end of the second game round. The pachinko machine 10 executes a specific start effect in the opening effect in the special game state. The specific start effect is executed as an opening effect in a special game state when the jackpot lottery relating to the second game time is a win and the game time reproduction effect is executed in the second game time.

  The second embodiment can be realized, for example, by the following processing.

  In the case where a jackpot lottery is won in the first game round, the effect performed in the first game round (in this embodiment, advance notice is performed) in the same manner as the processing executed in the first embodiment (FIG. 37: S2307). Effects, reach effects, and result announcement effects). Note that the content to be stored is not limited to the effect itself performed in the first game round, but may be other information as long as the information can specify the performance performed in the first game round. That is, effects performed in the first game time, such as information indicating the type (pattern) of the effect performed in the first game time, address information of a memory storing the effect performed in the first game time, and the like. May be any information that can be called again.

  After storing the effect performed in the first game round, the game determination (second game round) that is the game round executed after the first game round and wins the jackpot lottery is specified by the pre-determination processing. Then, the notice effect, the reach effect, and the result notification effect in the stored first game time are executed as the game time reproduction effect in the second game time. At that time, for example, by setting the fluctuation times to be the same for any of the game times that have won the jackpot lottery, the reach effect and the result notification effect executed in the first game time are set to the second time. It can be executed within the fluctuating time in the game round.

  In addition, when the preceding game time exists between the first game time and the second game time, the present embodiment is realized by executing the suggestion effect according to the fluctuation time of each preceding game time. can do. In addition, when there are a plurality of preceding game times, a suggestion effect corresponding to each variation time may be executed in each of the preceding game times, for example, the preceding game time executed immediately before the second game time. , A normal effect may be executed in other preceding game times.

  In addition, the number of preceding game times is not limited to one, and if a plurality of preceding game times continuously exist between the first game time and the second game time, the first game time An upper limit value of the number of game times allowed as a preceding game time between the second game time and the second game time may be set.

  FIG. 46B is a time chart for explaining an example of a process in the case where a plurality of preceding game times are continuously present between the first game time and the second game time. As shown in the figure, for example, when the number of preceding game times in which the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is out of order after winning the jackpot lottery in the first game time is 5 or less (see FIG. 46 (b )) Then, in the second game time that wins the jackpot lottery, a game time reproduction effect that reproduces the effect performed in the first game time is executed, and the preceding game time exists in a number of 6 or more. (Not shown), the game reproduction reproduction effect may not be executed in the second game which subsequently wins the jackpot lottery. As the processing, when the jackpot lottery is won in the first game round, the effect performed in the first game round (this embodiment) is the same as the processing performed in the first embodiment (FIG. 46: S2307). , The announcement effect, the reach effect, and the result announcement effect) are stored in the sound-side RAM 94.

  In addition, a preceding game time counter that counts the number of preceding game times between the first game time and the second game time is provided, and when deciding the production of the second game time to win the jackpot lottery, It is determined whether the counter value of the preceding game time counter is 5 or less or 6 or more. When the counter value is 5 or less, the effect performed in the first game time is read out from the sound-light side RAM 94, and the game time reproducing the effect performed in the first game time is reproduced in the second game time. When the reproduction effect is executed and the counter value is 6 or more, the effect at the time of the normal big hit is executed in the second game time. By doing so, the present embodiment can be realized even when there are a plurality of preceding game times. The suggestion effect is executed in the preceding game round. Specifically, the preceding game time immediately before the second game time is specified by the previous determination process, and it is determined that the suggestion effect is to be executed in the preceding game time. Then, at the timing when the fluctuation time of the preceding game time is determined, the suggestion effect corresponding to the fluctuation time of the preceding game time is selected and executed. By doing in this way, even if a plurality of preceding game times are continuously present between the first game time and the second game time, the game time reproduction effect can be executed. it can. In this description, in the case where there are six or more preceding game times in which the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is out of the preceding game times after the first game time that has won the jackpot lottery, Then, it is assumed that the game reproduction effect is not executed in the second game time after which the jackpot is won, but the number (threshold) of the preceding game times determined to not execute the game reproduction effect is limited to 6. And can be set to any number.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment, even if another game time exists between the first game time and the second game time, another game is performed. By performing the suggestion effect at the time, the suggestion effect and the game time reproduction effect can be executed without giving the player an uncomfortable feeling. In addition, even when a plurality of other game times (preceding game times) exist between the first game time and the second game time, a suggestion effect corresponding to the fluctuation time of each preceding game time is provided. By executing the game, it is possible to execute the game reproduction effect in the second game without giving a sense of incongruity to the player.

C. Third embodiment:
FIG. 48 is a time chart for explaining processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, as the special game state reproduction effect and the game time reproduction effect, at least a part of the effect performed in the game time (FIG. 48: the first preceding game time) before the first game time is reproduced. In addition, a case will be described in which at least a part of the effect performed in the first game round is reproduced. In the present description, the features of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 will be described using two cases, a case c1 and a case c2, as examples.

  FIG. 48 (a) shows a case c1 in which the jackpot lottery is won in the first game round and the jackpot lottery is removed in the second game round executed after the first game round. Shows the processing to be executed. As shown in the figure, before the first game round that wins the jackpot lottery, there is a first preceding game round in which the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is off.

  As shown in FIG. 48 (a), in case c1, the pachinko machine 10 executes a series of continuous effects over a first preceding game time and a first game time. In the present embodiment, the continuous effect is an effect that gives a notice that the winning in the jackpot lottery in the first game round will be announced. After executing the continuous effect, the pachinko machine 10 executes a result notification effect of notifying the player of the result of the jackpot lottery relating to the first game round to the player. In the first game round, a jackpot is announced as a result announcement effect.

  The result announcement effect in the first preceding game round in the case where the continuous effect is executed will be described with reference to FIG. 47 described above. In the display area 41aS of the display surface 41a, the symbol change display and the stop display are executed. . Specifically, in the unit game time, the symbol display is changed during the variable time, and the symbol stop display is executed during the stop time. On the other hand, in the display area 41aL, a continuous effect is performed. In this way, a series of continuous effects can be executed from the first preceding game time to the first game time without giving the player a sense of incompatibility.

  As shown in FIG. 48 (a), after executing the result announcement effect (big hit announcement) in the first game round, the pachinko machine 10 shifts the gaming state to the special gaming state. In the special game state, the pachinko machine 10 executes an opening effect, an opening / closing execution mode, and an ending effect.

  The pachinko machine 10 performs a suggestion effect, a special game state reproduction effect, and a specific end effect during the ending period. In the present embodiment, as the special game state reproduction effect, the continuous effect executed from the first preceding game time to the first game time and the result announcement effect (big hit announcement) in the first game time are reproduced and executed. I do. In the case where the symbol variation display and the stop display are reproduced and executed as the special game state reproduction effect, the contents of the symbol displayed on the display surface 41a during the execution of the special game state reproduction effect are actually displayed in the first game round. The content of the design is partially different.

  After executing the special game state reproduction effect, the pachinko machine 10 executes a specific end effect. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 executes the second game round. The jackpot lottery related to the second game round is missed. In the second game time, the pachinko machine 10 executes a normal notice effect and a result notice effect (miss notification).

  Next, the case c2 shown in FIG. 48B will be described. In the case c2, as in the case c1, before the first game round to win the jackpot lottery, there is a first preceding game round in which the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is off. Further, in case c2, before the second game round to win the jackpot lottery, there is a second preceding game round in which the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is off.

  As in the case c1, the pachinko machine 10 executes a series of continuous effects over the first preceding game time and the first game time. After executing the continuous effect, the pachinko machine 10 executes a result notification effect of notifying the player of the result of the jackpot lottery relating to the first game round to the player. In the first game round, a jackpot is announced as a result announcement effect.

  After executing the result announcement effect (big hit announcement) in the first game round, the pachinko machine 10 shifts the game state to the special game state. In the special game state, the pachinko machine 10 executes an opening effect, an opening / closing execution mode, and an ending effect.

  In the case c2, the pachinko machine 10 executes only the suggestion effect in the ending period. Then, a game time reproduction effect is executed over the second preceding game time and the second game time. In the case c2, as the game time reproduction effect, a continuous effect executed from the first preceding game time to the first game time and a result announcement effect (big hit announcement) in the first game time are executed.

  After the end of the second game round, the pachinko machine 10 shifts the gaming state to the special gaming state. The pachinko machine 10 executes a specific start effect in the opening effect in the special game state. After executing the specific start effect, the pachinko machine 10 executes the open / close execution mode and the ending effect. In the special game state after the second game round, a normal ending effect is executed as the ending effect.

  The third embodiment can be realized, for example, by the following specific processing.

  In the present embodiment, the effects performed in the four game times already executed are always stored in the RAM 96. Then, every time a prize is generated in the first starting port 33, the result of the jackpot lottery in the game performed by the prize is grasped by the first determination process.

  If it is determined that the result of the jackpot lottery of the first game round is a jackpot as a result of the preceding determination processing, the jackpot lottery of the first preceding game round held immediately before the first game round is held. When the result is out of order, the continuous effect is executed over the first preceding game time and the first game time.

  Then, when there are two or more reserved game times after the first game time before the first game time ends, the result of the jackpot lottery of the two game times is grasped by the first determination process, If the result of the jackpot lottery for the two game times is continuously out of the two, the case c1 is executed. That is, the suggestion effect and the special game state reproduction effect are executed during the ending period of the special game state executed after the first game round.

  In addition, if the result of the jackpot lottery of the game executed earlier is out of the two game times and the result of the jackpot lottery of the game executed later is a jackpot, the case c2 is executed. . That is, the suggestion effect is executed during the ending period of the special game state executed after the first game time, and the game time reproduction effect is executed in the second preceding game time and the second game time.

  In addition, in the case c2, when the second preceding game time does not exist, that is, when the jackpot lottery in the game time executed after the special game state after the first game time is a big hit, the second game time In, the continuous effect executed from the first preceding game time to the first game time may be executed as a game time reproduction effect. In this case, if the fluctuation time of the second game time is shorter than the time required to reproduce all of the continuous effects, only a part of the continuous effects may be reproduced.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, a case where a continuous effect is executed from the game time before the first game time to the first game time. Also, as a special game state reproduction effect and a game times reproduction effect, the continuous effects can be reproduced. In addition, by using the processes of the case c1 and the case c2 together, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the continuous effect.

D. Fourth embodiment:
FIG. 49 is a time chart for explaining processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment. In the fourth embodiment, the effect performed in the first game round in which the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is out of order is executed as the game round reproduction effect in the second game round executed after the first game round. In the present description, the features of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 will be described using two cases, case d1 and case d2, as examples.

  FIG. 49 (a) shows a case d1 in which the pachinko machine 10 loses the jackpot lottery in the first game round and wins the jackpot lottery in the second game round executed after the first game round. The processing to be executed is shown. As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 10 executes a notice effect and a reach effect in the first game time. The reach effect performed in this case is an effect that suggests a degree of expectation to win the jackpot lottery to the player. After the execution of the reach effect, the pachinko machine 10 performs a miss notification in the result notification effect.

  After executing the first game round, the pachinko machine 10 executes the second game round. In the second game time, the pachinko machine 10 executes a suggestion effect, a game operation reproduction effect, and a result notification effect. The pachinko machine 10 executes, as a suggestion effect, an effect indicating that the effect executed in the first game time is reproduced, and as a game time reproduction effect, a notice effect and a reach executed in the first game time. Perform the production. In addition, a jackpot notification is performed as a result notification effect.

  After executing the second game round, the pachinko machine 10 shifts the gaming state to the special gaming state. As illustrated, the pachinko machine 10 executes an opening effect, an opening / closing execution mode, and an ending effect in a special game state. The pachinko machine 10 executes a specific start effect as an opening effect. In addition, a normal ending effect is executed as the ending effect.

  Next, the case d2 will be described. Case d2 is, as shown in FIG. 49 (b), when the player loses the jackpot lottery in the first game round and further loses the jackpot lottery in the second game round executed after the first game round. 2 shows the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10. As shown in the drawing, in the first game round, a notice effect and a reach effect are executed. The reach effect performed in this case is an effect that suggests a degree of expectation to win the jackpot lottery to the player. After the execution of the reach effect, the pachinko machine 10 performs a miss notification in the result notification effect.

  After executing the first game round, the pachinko machine 10 executes the second game round. In the second game time, the pachinko machine 10 executes a suggestion effect, a game operation reproduction effect, and a result notification effect. The pachinko machine 10 executes, as a suggestion effect, an effect indicating that the effect executed in the first game time is reproduced, and as a game time reproduction effect, a notice effect and a reach executed in the first game time. Perform the production. In addition, a miss notification is performed as a result notification effect.

  The fourth embodiment can be realized, for example, by the following specific processing.

  Each time a prize is generated in the first start-up opening 33, the first determination process is performed to determine whether or not the jackpot lottery related to the held game times is successful. Then, when it is specified that the jackpot lottery in the game times held two or more times ahead has been won, the game time winning the jackpot lottery (corresponding to the second game time in case d1) The notice effect and the reach effect are executed in the game time (corresponding to the first game time) that is held immediately before the game effect, and the executed notice effect and the reach effect are stored. As described above, the information to be stored is not limited to the data of the executed announcement effect and the reach effect itself, and may be any other information as long as the information of the executed announcement effect and the reach effect can be read out again. Good.

  The pachinko machine 10 performs a reach effect in the first game round, and then notifies the result as a result notification effect. Thereafter, in the second game time, the suggestion effect is executed, and the stored notice effect and the reach effect are executed as the game time reproduction effect. Further, the specific start effect performed in the special game state after the second game round is realized by executing the same process as the opening effect setting process performed by the sound emission control device 90 in the first embodiment. be able to. By executing such processing, case d1 in the fourth embodiment can be realized.

  In addition, in the case d2, by executing the first determination process, when there are two consecutive game times in which the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is out of order, the case d2 is executed first of the two reserved game times. It can be realized by executing a reach effect in a game time to be performed, and in a game time executed later, reproducing a suggestion effect and a notice effect and a reach effect performed in a previous game time as a game time reproduction effect. . In this case, in the second game time, the fluctuation time of the second game time is shorter than the time required to execute all of the notice effect and the reach effect in the first game time as the game time reproduction effect. In this case, for example, a part or all of the announcement effect to be executed as the game time reproduction effect may be omitted according to the variation time of the second game time.

  On the other hand, in the second game time, when the fluctuation time of the second game time is longer than the time required to execute all of the notice effect and the reach effect in the first game time as the game time reproduction effect For example, the execution time of the suggested effect may be set to a long effect according to the fluctuation time of the second game time. A plurality of types of suggestion effects corresponding to the time required for the effect are prepared, and the optimal suggestion effect is selected in accordance with the fluctuation time of the second game time, so that it is necessary for the suggestion effect and the game time reproduction effect. And the fluctuation time of the second game time can be made the same.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, by executing the process of the case d1, the jackpot lottery related to the second game time is won, Since the effect executed in the first game round where the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is off is executed in the second game round as the game round reproduction effect, the jackpot lottery related to the second game round is won. It is difficult for the player to expect that. Also, by executing a suggestion effect that suggests that the effect in the first game round deviated from the jackpot lottery is performed before the execution of the game round reproduction cycle, the first game round in the second game round is performed. The recognition that the effect performed in the round is merely reproduced can be further given to the player. Only when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery relating to the second game round is notified by the notification means, it is possible to make the player recognize that the player has won the jackpot lottery relating to the second game round. Properties can be imparted. That is, by setting the second game round to an unexpected development of the player, the player can be surprised and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, by executing the process of the case d2, in addition to the case where the jackpot lottery related to the second game time has been won, the case where the lottery result of the jackpot lottery related to the second game time is out of order, Since the game time reproduction effect is executed, it is possible to give the player a recognition that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery related to the game time in which the game time reproduction effect is executed is not always a big hit. As a result, when the game time reproduction effect is executed, the emotional inflection and expectation are given to the player, and the player's attention to the game time in which the already executed effect is reproduced is improved. be able to.

E. FIG. Fifth embodiment (example of effect type setting process):
Next, as a fifth embodiment, an example of processing performed in the effect type setting processing (FIG. 37: S2303) described in the first embodiment will be described. The effect type setting process is a process of setting the content of the effect to be executed in the game round in the sound emission control device 90 (the sound light side MPU 92). In this description, the outline of the effect type setting process executed by the sound-light-side MPU 92 in the present embodiment will be described first. Thereafter, the details of the processing will be described using a flowchart.

  FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an outline of the effect type setting process. When the sound-light-side MPU 92 starts the effect type setting process, the display pattern random number counter C11 for the object A, the display pattern random number counter C12 for the object B, and the display pattern random number counter for the object C in order to determine the content of the notice effect. The counter value is obtained at a predetermined timing from each random number counter of C13.

  Each of the display pattern random number counters C11 to C13 is a random number counter used to determine how to combine a plurality of object images constituting a notice effect in each game. Each of the display pattern random number counters C11 to C13 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the counter value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter value is updated at short time intervals. Each of the display pattern random number counters C11 to C13 is configured to sequentially add one by one within a range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  In the present embodiment, the announcement effect in each game round is configured by combining three types of object images. The display pattern random number counter C11 for the object A, the display pattern random number counter C12 for the object B, and the display pattern random number counter C13 for the object C are random numbers for determining the display mode of these three types of object images. In the effect type setting process, the combination of these three types of object images, the arrangement position on the display surface 41a, and the display timing are determined and set as a notice effect. Here, three types of object images constituting a notice effect in the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an object A that is an object image that constitutes a notice effect. As shown in the figure, the object A shows the behavior of a character expressing a person, and is composed of three images, an image A1, an image A2, and an image A3. FIG. 51A shows an image A1, FIG. 51B shows an image A2, and FIG. 51C shows an image A3. The object A is displayed as an image that changes over time by displaying at least two of the three images A1, A2, and A3 in a predetermined order, that is, when the object A is displayed as a moving object image. In some cases, one of the images A1, A2, and A3 is displayed as a still image by being continuously displayed for a predetermined period.

  FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an object B that is an object image forming a preview effect. As shown in the drawing, the object B shows a state in which the weather changes, and is composed of three images, an image B1, an image B2, and an image B3. FIG. 52A shows the image B1, FIG. 52B shows the image B2, and FIG. 52C shows the image B3. The object B is an image that changes over time by displaying at least two images of the three images B1, B2, and B3 in a predetermined order, that is, when the object B is displayed as a moving object image, and One of the two images B1, B2, and B3 may be displayed as a still image by being displayed continuously for a predetermined period.

  FIG. 53 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an object C that is an object image that constitutes a notice effect. As shown in the figure, the object C shows the behavior of the dog in the box, and is composed of three images, an image C1, an image C2, and an image C3. FIG. 53 (a) shows the image C1, FIG. 53 (b) shows the image C2, and FIG. 53 (c) shows the image C3. The object C is displayed as an image that changes over time by displaying at least two of the three images C1, C2, and C3 in a predetermined order, that is, when the object C is displayed as a moving object image. In some cases, one of the images C1, C2, and C3 is displayed as a still image by being continuously displayed for a predetermined period.

  As described above, in the effect type setting process in the present embodiment, a notice effect is set by combining the three types of object images (objects A to C) described with reference to FIGS.

  The description returns to FIG. Upon acquiring the counter values from the display pattern random number counters C11 to C13, the sound light side MPU 92 refers to the object A display pattern table, the object B display pattern table, and the object C display pattern table, and Collation with each counter value acquired from C11 to C13 is executed, and a display pattern is determined for each object.

  FIG. 54 is an explanatory diagram showing a display pattern table for the object A as an example of the display pattern table. As shown in the drawing, the display pattern table for the object A includes a case where the result of the jackpot lottery is a big hit, a case where the result of the jackpot lottery is out and a reach effect is executed (“outside (reach present)”), and a big hit. There are three cases where the result of the lottery is off and the reach effect is not executed ("off (no reach)". For each case, the value of the display pattern random number counter of 0 to 99 and In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54, as a display pattern of the object A, a pattern not displaying the object A (non-display) and a pattern displaying only the image A1 (see FIG. 54). A1), a pattern (A1-A2) for sequentially displaying the image A1 and the image A2, and a pattern (A1-A2) for sequentially displaying the image A1, the image A2, and the image A3 ( 1-A2 over A3) and is set in advance.

  When setting a notice effect in a predetermined game time, the sound-light-side MPU 92 checks whether the game time corresponds to a jackpot, a miss (with reach), or a miss (without reach). Then, a portion corresponding to the game number is referred to in the display pattern table. For example, when the game time is a big hit, the "big hit" column of the display pattern table is referred to. Then, the display pattern is determined by collating with the acquired value of the display pattern random number counter C11.

  As shown in FIG. 54, in the present embodiment, the way of assigning a random number value to each display pattern is different in each of a big hit, a miss (with reach), and a miss (no reach). For example, the display pattern (A1-A2-A3) includes a frequency displayed when a jackpot is hit, a frequency displayed when there is a deviation (with reach), and a frequency displayed when there is a deviation (without reach). And different. In other words, the probability that the display pattern (A1-A2-A3) is displayed is higher in the order of the jackpot, the deviation (with reach), and the deviation (without reach). Conversely, the probability that the display pattern (A1) is displayed is higher in the order of deviation (without reach), deviation (with reach), and jackpot. Therefore, in the notice effect in the game time, the probability of a big hit is higher when the display pattern (A1-A2) is displayed than when only the display pattern (A1) is displayed, and the display pattern (A1-A2) Are set so that the probability of a big hit is higher when the display pattern (A1-A2-A3) is displayed than when is displayed. In other words, the production by the object A indicates the degree of the advantage or disadvantage of the game to the player by suggesting the probability of the jackpot of the game times, and the degree of expectation of the jackpot to the player (hereinafter, the degree of expectation). It also functions as a step-up effect that shows

  In the present embodiment, the display pattern tables of the objects A, B, and C are different in the way of allocating the random numbers in the cases of the jackpot, the miss (with reach), and the miss (without reach). The expectation degree of the jackpot indicated by the step-up effect of the object A, the expectation degree of the jackpot indicated by the step-up effect of the object B, and the expectation degree of the jackpot indicated by the step-up effect of the object C are different from each other. For example, in the object B, the value of the display pattern random number in the display pattern for the object B is set so that the value is not displayed in the game time in the case of the departure (there is no reach) but is displayed in the case of the departure (there is a reach) and a big hit. It may be sorted. Specifically, in the display pattern for the object B, in the case of a departure (no reach), it can be realized by setting “non-display” in all the display pattern random numbers 0 to 99. By doing so, the jackpot expected when the object A is not displayed and the jackpot expected when the object A and the object B are displayed can be different from each other. That is, in each of the display pattern tables of the object A, the object B, and the object C, the method of distributing the values of the random numbers in each of the case of the jackpot, the miss (reach is present), and the miss (no reach) is set differently. In addition to the step-up mode of each object image, the jackpot expectation can be expressed by the presence or absence of each object display. By doing so, the player's attention to the object image can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the display pattern table of each of the objects A, B, and C is divided into three cases of a jackpot, a miss (with reach), and a miss (without reach), and each display pattern random number is displayed. For example, the jackpot classification in the display pattern table of the object B is further divided into 16R probability variable jackpot, 8R probability variable jackpot, 16R ordinary jackpot, and 8R ordinary jackpot, and the effect by the object B is expected to be the probability variable jackpot. You may make it function as a step-up effect which shows a degree. In addition, for example, in a gaming machine in which a latent probability change state (a game state in which the player does not recognize that the lottery mode is the high probability mode), the effect by the object C is used as the expectation degree of the current game round probability change state. May be caused to function as a step-up effect. As described above, if the objects A, B, and C have a function of indicating the advantage / disadvantage of the game according to the display pattern, each object is of a different type (for example, a jackpot expectation level or a jackpot expectation level). (Eg, the degree of expectation of a probability change jackpot) may be shown.

  As shown in FIG. 50, after determining the display pattern for the object A, the object B, and the object C, the sound-light-side MPU 92 arranges the objects so that the objects are combined and displayed on the display surface 41a. The position and the display timing of each object are set. Specifically, the sound-light-side MPU 92 determines the arrangement position and display timing of each object with reference to a preset arrangement / timing setting table.

  FIG. 55 is an explanatory diagram showing an arrangement / timing setting table. As shown in the figure, the arrangement / timing setting table starts display on the display object determined to be displayed, the coordinates of the arrangement position of each object to be displayed on the display surface 41a, and the display surface 41a of each object. The timing is set in association with each other. The display patterns determined in the processing using the random number counter are, for example, the display pattern (A1-A2) for the object A, the display pattern (non-display) for the object B, and the display pattern (C1-C2-) for the object C. In the case of C3), since the objects to be displayed are the object A and the object C, "AC" in the left column of the arrangement / timing setting table is referred to. In this case, as shown in the middle column of the arrangement / timing setting table, the arrangement coordinates of the objects A and C are such that the center coordinates of the object A are located at (Xa2, Ya2) on the display surface 41a for the object A. Are set so that the object C is displayed such that the center coordinates of the object C are located at (Xc1, Yc1) on the display surface 41a. Further, in this case, as shown in the right column of the arrangement / timing setting table, the display of the object A is started at ta2 seconds after the start of the game, and the object C is displayed after the start of the game. The display is set to start after tc1 second.

  Although the coordinates indicating the arrangement of each object in the arrangement / timing setting table in FIG. 55 are set as fixed coordinates, the arrangement positions (coordinates) of each object may be set so as to change over time. That is, a dynamic trajectory of the center position of the object may be set. Even in this case, the arrangement position (coordinates) changes over time so that each object is displayed on the display surface 41a in a related manner, and each object displayed on the display surface 41a in the same period is changed. The arrangement of the display objects and the timing of the display start in the arrangement / timing setting table are set so as not to overlap each other.

  In the present embodiment, when two or more objects are displayed in one notice effect, the relative position between the objects is taken into consideration, and the display surface 41a is displayed in a manner in which the objects have relevance. In the arrangement / timing setting table, the arrangement of the display objects (relative arrangement positions between the objects) and the display start timing (relative timing between the objects) are set. Further, the arrangement and display start timing of the display objects in the arrangement / timing setting table are set so that the objects displayed in the same period on the display surface 41a do not overlap each other.

  FIG. 56 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a preview effect in which a plurality of object images are combined. The example of FIG. 56 shows a case where the coordinates indicating the arrangement of each object in the arrangement / timing setting table of FIG. 55 change with time. The notice effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 56 (a), FIG. 56 (b), and FIG. 56 (c). FIG. 56 shows a preview effect in which the object A, the object B, and the object C are combined. The display pattern (A1-A2-A3) is displayed for the object A, and the display pattern (B1-B2) is displayed for the object B. -B3) is displayed, and for the object C, the announcement effect is set so that the display pattern (C1-C2-C3) is displayed.

  In the announcement production shown in FIG. 56, a person walking on a sunny day finds a box, notices that there is a dog in the box while the weather gradually worsens, and gives a umbrella to the dog. Is expressed. As described above, in the present embodiment, when two or more objects are displayed in one announcement effect, the relative positions between the objects are considered, and the objects have a relevance. Further, the arrangement of the display objects and the timing of the display start in the arrangement / timing setting table are set so as to be displayed on the display surface 41a in a story-like manner. By doing so, a notice effect produced by displaying a plurality of types of object images in the same period can be made to be an effect that does not make the player feel uncomfortable. Amusement can be improved.

  In the example shown in FIG. 56 (c), the object A is displayed on the display surface 41a without an image frame indicating the area of the object image. More specifically, the object A is composed of a layer image of an image frame and a layer image showing a character representing a person, and displays only a layer image showing a character representing a person. Is running. By doing in this way, an effect in which a plurality of object images are displayed can be an effect that does not make the player feel uncomfortable.

  In FIG. 56, the process of not displaying the image frame is performed only on the image A3 of the display pattern (A1-A2-A3) using the object A, but the image A1 displayed as the display pattern (A1-A2-A3) is displayed. A configuration in which some or all of the image frames of the image A2 and the image A3 are not displayed may be adopted. Further, the same processing may be performed on other object images.

  The sound-light-side MPU 92 sets the arrangement position of each object and the display timing of each object in this way, and sets a notice effect.

  Next, the above-described effect type setting process will be described with reference to a flowchart.

  FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the process of setting the effect type. The effect type setting process is executed by the sound light side MPU 92 of the audio light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the effect setting process (FIG. 37: S2303).

  In step S3201, a counter value is obtained from each of the display pattern random number counters C11 to C13. After that, the process advances to step S3202 to check whether the game time for which the announcement effect is to be set is a jackpot, a miss (with reach), or a miss (without reach). After executing Step S3202, the process proceeds to Step S3203.

  In step S3203, the display pattern of each object is determined with reference to the display pattern tables for the objects A to C. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3204.

  In step S3204, when a display pattern is set for each object, it is determined whether or not there is no object display in the announcement effect of the game time. That is, it is determined whether or not the display patterns of all the objects A to C are “non-display”.

  In step S3204, when it is determined that the object display is not absent (not displayed) in the announcement effect in the game time (S3204: NO), the process proceeds to step S3205, where the display is performed with reference to the arrangement / timing setting table. The coordinates of the arrangement position of each object on the display surface 41a and the timing of starting display on the display surface 41a are determined. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3206.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S3204 that the object display is not present (not displayed) in the announcement effect of the game time (S3204: YES), the process proceeds to step S3206 without executing step S3205.

  In step S3206, a notice effect is set. Specifically, the determined display object, the coordinates of the arrangement position of each object on the display surface 41a, and the timing at which the display of each object is started are set in the announcement effect in the game round. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3207.

  In step S3207, it is determined whether or not the game time is a big hit or a miss (with reach). That is, it is determined whether or not to execute the reach effect after executing the notice effect in the game time.

  In step S3207, when it is determined that the game time is a big hit or a miss (with reach) (S3207: YES), the process proceeds to step S3208 to execute a reach effect setting process. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3209.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3207 that the game number is not a big hit or a miss (with reach) (S3207: NO), the process proceeds to step S3209 without executing step S3208.

  In step S3209, the notice effect and the reach effect set in step S3206 and step S3208 are set in the effect command. Then, the process of setting the effect type ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when each object is displayed in the same period as the announcement effect, the objects are displayed on the display surface 41a in a related manner, so that each object is the same. The effect performed by being displayed during the period does not give a complicated impression to the player, and the quality of the effect can be improved. Further, each object may be displayed in the same period as another object or may not be displayed in the same period (that is, each object may be displayed alone). An effect can be performed, and the object can be effectively used.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 56, when a plurality of object images are displayed in the same period, each object image is displayed in a related and narrative manner, so that the plurality of object images are displayed in the same period. Can be made an effect that does not make the player feel uncomfortable. Moreover, the effect performed by the display of the plurality of object images during the same period has a narrative, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  Also, in the present embodiment, the display pattern tables of the objects A, B, and C are different in the way of allocating random numbers in the case of a jackpot, a miss (with reach), and a miss (without reach). The advantage / disadvantage degree and the jackpot expectation degree of the game indicated by the step-up effect using the object images of the objects A, B and C are different from each other. That is, even when each object is displayed, the degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game differs depending on whether or not other objects are also displayed during the same period. Expectation can be improved.

  Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, depending on the setting mode of the display pattern table, for example, the jackpot division in the display pattern table of the object B is determined to be 16R probable big hit, 8R probable big hit, 16R normal big hit, and 8R normal big hit. By classifying into the jackpot, the effect by the object B can be made to function as a step-up effect indicating the degree of expectation of the probability change jackpot. That is, the effect by each object can be made to function as an effect indicating the degree of advantage / disadvantage of different types of games. Therefore, using each object, it is possible to suggest the advantages / disadvantages of various types of games.

  In addition, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the object images are displayed in the same period, the relative positions between the objects are displayed on the display surface 41a at the predetermined arrangement positions. A plurality of objects displayed on the display surface 41a during the same period are not superimposed and displayed without any relation. Specifically, when two or more objects are displayed in one announcement effect, the arrangement / timing is set so that the relative positions between the objects are considered and the objects are related. The arrangement of the display objects in the setting table and the display start timing are set. The arrangement and display start timing of the display objects in the arrangement / timing setting table are set so that the objects displayed in the same period on the display surface 41a do not overlap each other. Therefore, the effect performed by displaying a plurality of objects in the same period does not give a complicated impression to the player, and the quality of the effect can be improved. In addition, there are cases where each object image is displayed in the same period and cases where each object image is not displayed in the same period (that is, each object is displayed alone), so that a plurality of effects are executed using each object image. And the object image can be effectively used.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIGS. 54 and 55, for example, the object A includes the display pattern (A1), the display pattern (A1-A2), and the display pattern (A1-A2-A3). ) May be displayed in three different display modes. Corresponding to each display mode, a relative position with respect to other object images (objects B and C) is displayed on the display surface 41a in a predetermined arrangement. Therefore, various effects using each object image can be executed. In addition, since the relative position between the object images is displayed on the display surface 41a at a predetermined arrangement position according to each of a plurality of different display modes (display patterns), each object mode has Images are not superimposed and displayed without relevance. Therefore, various effects performed by displaying each object image in the same period do not give a complicated impression to the player, and the quality of the effects can be improved.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 55, the timing at which the display of each object is started on the display surface 41a is set in advance by the arrangement / timing setting table. Therefore, when each object image is displayed in the same period, each object image is displayed at a relatively predetermined timing, so that each object image is displayed at a timing having no relation. Nothing. Therefore, the effect performed by displaying each object image in the same period does not give a complicated impression to the player, and the quality of the effect can be further improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, since each object image is an image that changes over time (moving image in the present embodiment), various effects can be executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the probability of a jackpot in the jackpot lottery when the object A is displayed as the announcement effect, the probability of the jackpot in the jackpot lottery when the object B is displayed as the announcement effect, and the object C Is different from the probability of a jackpot in the jackpot lottery when is displayed as a notice effect. Furthermore, the probability of winning a jackpot in a jackpot lottery when the object images are combined and displayed as a notice effect is also different. By doing so, the player's attention to the object image can be improved.

F. Sixth embodiment (another example of the effect type setting process):
Next, as a sixth embodiment, another example of the effect type setting process (FIG. 37: S2303) will be described. As described above, the effect type setting process is a process of setting the content of the effect to be executed in the game round in the sound emission control device 90 (the sound light side MPU 92). In this description, the outline of the effect type setting process executed by the sound-light-side MPU 92 in the present embodiment will be described first. Thereafter, the details of the processing will be described using a flowchart.

  FIG. 58 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an overview of the effect type setting process in the sixth embodiment. The difference between this embodiment and the fifth embodiment described above is the method of determining the type of the object to be displayed as the announcement effect. In the fifth embodiment, the combination of objects to be displayed in the announcement effect is determined by the display pattern random number and the display pattern table prepared for each object.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a plurality of combinations of objects to be displayed in the notice effect are set in advance by the display object table, and the sound-light-side MPU 92 acquires the counter value from the display object random number counter C21, and displays the acquired value. By comparing with the object table, a combination of objects to be displayed in the announcement effect is determined.

  Further, in the fifth embodiment, the arrangement position and the display start timing of the object displayed in the notice effect are determined by the arrangement / timing setting table. In accordance with the display pattern, the arrangement position of each object and the display start timing are set in advance. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

  Upon starting the effect type setting process, the sound-light-side MPU 92 acquires a counter value at a predetermined timing from the display object random number counter C21. The display object random number counter C21 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The counter value is updated at short time intervals. The display object random number counter C21 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of 0 to 99, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  After acquiring the counter value from the display object random number counter C21, the sound-light-side MPU 92 refers to the display object table, executes comparison with the acquired counter value of the display object random number counter C21, and displays the object to be displayed in the announcement effect. Determine the combination.

  FIG. 59 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the display object table. As shown in the figure, in the display object table, a counter value of the display object random number counter C21 and a combination of each object to be displayed as a notice effect are set in association with each other. For example, when the value of the acquired display object random number counter C21 is 75, the objects A and C are set as the object images displayed in the announcement effect. The display object table in the present embodiment differs in the way of assigning the value of the display object random number to the combination of the objects displayed as the announcement effect (the number of assigned values). For example, when only the object A is displayed as the display object, the values of the display object random numbers are 0 to 19, and 20 values are assigned. The values of the display object random numbers when the object A and the object B are displayed are 60 to 71, and twelve values are allocated. The values of the display object random numbers when the objects A, B, and C are displayed are 96 to 99, and four values are allocated. As described above, the number of allocations of the display object random numbers to the combinations of the objects is different, so that the frequency of displaying the combinations of the objects as the announcement effect is different.

  The description returns to FIG. When determining the combination of objects to be displayed in the announcement effect, the sound-side MPU 92 obtains a counter value at a predetermined timing from the display pattern random number counter C22. The display pattern random number counter C22 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The counter value is updated at short time intervals. The display pattern random number counter C22 is configured to be incremented by one in order within the range of 0 to 99, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  After acquiring the counter value of the display pattern random number counter C22, the sound-light-side MPU 92 refers to the display pattern table corresponding to the previously determined combination of the display objects, and checks the acquired counter value of the display pattern random number counter C22. To determine a display pattern corresponding to the combination of the display objects. FIG. 58 shows a case where it is determined from the display object random number counter C21 and the display object table that the object A and the object C are displayed as a combination of the objects to be displayed in the announcement effect. In this case, the sound light side MPU 92 refers to the AC display pattern table as the display pattern table.

  FIG. 60 is an explanatory diagram showing an AC display pattern table as an example of the display pattern table. As shown in the figure, the AC display pattern table is divided into three cases: big hit, miss (with reach), and miss (no reach). Then, for each case, the value of the display pattern random number counter C22 of 0 to 99 and the display pattern of the effect using the objects A and C are set in association with each other.

  In the present embodiment, as a display pattern using the objects A and C, a pattern (non-display) in which neither the object A nor the object C is displayed, and an image A1 of the object A and an image C1 of the object C are combined. A pattern (A1 / C1) to be displayed, a pattern (A1-A2 / C1-C2) for displaying the images C1 and C2 of the object C while displaying the images A1 and A2 of the object A in order, and an image of the object A A display pattern (A1-A2 / C1-C2-C3) for displaying A1 and the image A2 in order and displaying the image C1, the image C2, and the image C3 of the object C in order is set. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the arrangement position of each object on the display surface 41a and the timing of the display start are set in advance for each display pattern, and by determining the display pattern, The arrangement position and the display start timing are determined.

  For example, when the game number is a big hit and the display object random number counter C21 and the display object table determine that the object A and the object C are displayed as a combination of the objects to be displayed in the notice effect. In the case where the counter value acquired by the display pattern random number counter C22 is "62", the display pattern of the announcement effect is determined to be (A1-A2 / C1-C2-C3).

  FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram showing a notice effect when a display pattern (A1-A2 / C1-C2-C3) is set as an example of the display pattern. The notice effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIGS. 61 (a), 61 (b), and 54 (c). As illustrated, in the notice effect, the image A1 and the image A2 of the object A are sequentially displayed on the display surface 41a, and the image C1 and the image C2 of the object C are sequentially displayed. As described above, the display pattern (A1-A2 / C1-C2-C3) includes the arrangement positions of the images A1 and A2 of the object A and the display start timing, and the images C1, C2, and C3 of the object C. Since the arrangement position and the display start timing are set in advance, the mode of the notice effect is determined by determining the display pattern (A1-A2 / C1-C2-C3).

  In FIG. 60, the display pattern table for AC has been described, but a display pattern table is prepared for each combination of objects. In addition, a plurality of types of display patterns are set for each display pattern table by combining the images of the objects.

  FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram showing an A display pattern table. In the case of the display pattern table for A, in the three cases of jackpot, miss (with reach), and miss (without reach), non-display, display pattern (A1), display pattern (A1-A2), and display pattern (A1) -A2-A3) (see FIG. 51). As shown in the figure, the display pattern table for A indicates that the display pattern (A1) is most frequently displayed among the above four display patterns in the case of deviation (no reach), and in the case of deviation (reach is present). Among the four display patterns, the display pattern (A1-A2) is displayed most frequently, and in the case of a jackpot, the display pattern (A1-A2-A3) is the most frequently displayed. The values of the display pattern random number counter C22 of 0 to 99 are allocated so that the frequency of display is high. By allocating the value of the display pattern random number counter C22 in this manner, the player can display the image A1 on the display surface 41a later than when the image A1 is displayed on the display surface 41a. However, when the expectation for the jackpot lottery is increased and the image A3 is displayed on the display surface 41a later than when the image A2 is displayed after the image A1 on the display surface 41a, the jackpot lottery is performed. Expectations for winning will increase.

  Next, the display pattern table for B will be described.

  FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram showing a display pattern table for B. In the case of the B display pattern table, in three cases of a jackpot, a miss (with reach), and a miss (no reach), non-display, display pattern (B1-B2-B3), display pattern (B1-B2), Four display patterns of a display pattern (B1) (see FIG. 52) are allocated. As shown in the figure, when the display pattern table for B is out of range (no reach), the display pattern (B1-B2-B3) among the four display patterns is displayed most frequently, and out of reach (reach). In the case of "Yes", the display pattern (B1-B2) is most frequently displayed among the above four display patterns, and in the case of a big hit, the display pattern (B1) is the most frequently displayed of the four display patterns. The values of the display pattern random number counter C22 of 0 to 99 are allocated so that the frequency of display is high. That is, by assigning the value of the display pattern random number counter C22 in this way, unlike the above-described announcement effect by the object A, the player can set the display pattern random number counter C22 later than when the image B1 is displayed on the display surface 41a. When the image B2 is displayed on the display surface 41a, the expectation for the winning of the jackpot lottery is reduced, and the image B2 is displayed on the display surface 41a after the image B2 is displayed after the image B1 on the display surface 41a. When the image B3 is displayed, the expectation of winning the jackpot is reduced.

  Next, the display pattern table for C will be described.

  FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram showing the C display pattern table. In the case of the display pattern table for C, in the three cases of jackpot, miss (with reach), and miss (no reach), non-display, display pattern (C1), display pattern (C1-C2), display pattern (C1) -C2-C3) (see FIG. 53). As shown in the figure, in the case of the deviation (no reach), the display pattern (C1) is displayed most frequently among the four display patterns, and in the case of the deviation (reach), the four display patterns are displayed. Among the patterns, the display pattern (C1-C2) is displayed most frequently, and in the case of a big hit, the display pattern (C1-C2-C3) is displayed most frequently among the above four display patterns. Thus, the values of the display pattern random number counter C22 of 0 to 99 are allocated. By allocating the value of the display pattern random number counter C22 in this manner, the player can display the image C1 on the display surface 41a later than when the image C1 is displayed on the display surface 41a. However, when the expectation for the winning of the jackpot lottery is increased and the image C3 is displayed on the display surface 41a later than when the image C2 is displayed after the image C1 on the display surface 41a, the jackpot lottery is performed. Expectations for winning will increase.

  Next, the AB display pattern table will be described.

  FIG. 65 is an explanatory diagram showing an AB display pattern table. In the case of the AB display pattern table, in the three cases of jackpot, miss (with reach), and miss (no reach), no display, display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2-B3), and display pattern (A1) -A2-A3 / B1) and four display patterns (A1-A2-A3 / B1-B2-B3). As shown in the drawing, the AB display pattern table has the highest frequency of display of the display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2-B3) among the four display patterns in the case of a deviation (no reach). In the case of a miss (reach), the display pattern (A1-A2-A3 / B1) is displayed most frequently among the four display patterns, and in the case of a big hit, the display pattern is displayed among the four display patterns. The values of the display pattern random number counter C22 from 0 to 99 are assigned so that the pattern (A1-A2-A3 / B1-B2-B3) is displayed most frequently.

  FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram showing a notice effect when the display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2-B3) is set by the AB display pattern table. The announcement effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIGS. 66 (a), 66 (b), and 66 (c). As shown in the drawing, the notice effect represents a situation in which the walking person gets wet with rain while the weather changes to sunny, cloudy, and rainy.

  When an image composed of the image A1 and the image B1 shown in FIG. 66A is displayed on the display surface 41a, a person walking on a sunny day is expressed in the image. Since it is not given, the player is not given disadvantageous recognition regarding the situation of the game. Thereafter, when an image composed of the image A2 and the image B2 shown in FIG. 66B is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image expresses a state in which the person notices that the weather has changed from sunny to cloudy. This gives an impression that is generally not good compared with the image shown in FIG. 66 (a), and gives the player an advantage regarding the situation of the game as compared with the image shown in FIG. 66 (a). Give unrecognizable recognition. Then, when an image composed of the image A2 and the image B3 shown in FIG. 66C is displayed on the display surface 41a, a person wet with rain is expressed in the image, and generally gives a bad impression, Give the player a disadvantageous perception of the game situation. That is, the preview effect by the display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2-B3) changes the recognition of the situation of the game to a disadvantageous recognition for the player as the display of the preview effect proceeds.

  FIG. 67 is an explanatory diagram showing a notice effect when the display pattern (A1-A2-A3 / B1) is set by the AB display pattern table. The announcement effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIGS. 67 (a), 67 (b), and 67 (c). As shown in the figure, the notice effect represents a situation in which a walking person notices that the sun is clear and wears an umbrella to prevent sunburn.

  When an image composed of the image A1 and the image B1 shown in FIG. 67A is displayed on the display surface 41a, a person walking on a sunny day is expressed in the image, and generally a bad impression is given. Since it is not given, the player is not given disadvantageous recognition regarding the situation of the game. Thereafter, when an image composed of the image A2 and the image B1 shown in FIG. 67 (b) is displayed on the display surface 41a, a person who has noticed that it is sunny is expressed in the image. As in the case of the image in FIG. 67 (a), a bad impression is not generally given, so that the player is not disadvantageously recognized as to the situation of the game. Thereafter, when an image composed of the image A3 and the image B1 shown in FIG. 67 (c) is displayed on the display surface 41a, a person who wears an umbrella to take measures against sunburn is generally poor. It does not give an impression and gives a less than unfavorable perception of the game situation. That is, the notice effect by the display pattern (A1-A2-A3 / B1) gives the player a recognition that it is difficult to determine whether the game situation is advantageous or disadvantageous even if the notice effect is displayed.

  FIG. 68 is an explanatory diagram showing a notice effect when a display pattern (A1-A2-A3 / B1-B2-B3) is set by the AB display pattern table. The announcement effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIGS. 68 (a), 68 (b), and 68 (c). As shown in the figure, the notice effect was that while the weather changed to sunny, cloudy, and rainy, the person who walked noticed the change in the weather, put an umbrella, and was able to respond appropriately to the worsening weather Is expressed.

  When an image composed of the image A1 and the image B1 shown in FIG. 68A is displayed on the display surface 41a, a person walking on a sunny day is expressed in the image, and a bad impression is generally given. Since it is not given, the player is not given disadvantageous recognition regarding the situation of the game. Thereafter, when an image including the image A2 and the image B2 shown in FIG. 68B is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image expresses a state in which the person notices that the weather has changed from sunny to cloudy. This gives an impression that is generally not good compared with the image shown in FIG. 68 (a), so that the player is more advantageous in the situation of the game than the image shown in FIG. 68 (a). Gives recognition that cannot be said. After that, when an image composed of the image A3 and the image B3 shown in FIG. 68 (c) is displayed on the display surface 41a, a person who can properly cope with the deterioration of the weather with an umbrella is represented in the image. And generally give a good impression and give a favorable perception about the playing situation. That is, the notice effect by the display pattern (A1-A2-A3 / B1-B2-B3) gives the player a recognition that the situation of the game is not disadvantageous in the image of FIG. In the image of FIG. 68 (b), the player is given an unrecognizable recognition of the game situation, and thereafter, in the image of FIG. 68 (c), the player is given an advantageous recognition of the game situation. . By displaying such a notice effect, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the game.

  As shown in FIG. 66, FIG. 67, and FIG. 68, the effect set by the AB display pattern table indicates to the player that the state of the game is advantageous or disadvantageous as the notice effect proceeds. Is configured to give. In particular, a case where a notice effect by the display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2-B3) described in FIG. 66 and a notice effect by (A1-A2-A3 / B1-B2-B3) described in FIG. 68 are compared. 66 (a) and FIG. 68 (a) are the same image, and FIG. 66 (b) and FIG. 68 (b) are the same image. It is possible to give the player a sense of urgency as to which of the announcement effect of FIG. 66 and the announcement effect of FIG. More specifically, a person who has noticed a change in the weather can give the player a sense of urgency with respect to a change such as whether or not the umbrella is pointed at the end, and the degree of attention of the player to the notice effect can be increased. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Next, the BC display pattern table will be described.

  FIG. 69 is an explanatory diagram showing a BC display pattern table. In the case of the BC display pattern table, non-display, display pattern (B2-B3 / C1-C3), and display pattern (B2-B3) are respectively used in three cases of a jackpot, a miss (with reach), and a miss (no reach). / C1-C3) and four display patterns (B1 / C1-C2-C3). As shown in the figure, when the display pattern table for BC is off (no reach), the display pattern (B2-B3 / C1-C3) is displayed most frequently among the above four display patterns, and is off. In the case of (with reach), the display pattern (B2-B3 / C1-C3) is displayed most frequently among the above four display patterns, and in the case of a big hit, the display pattern (of the four display patterns) B1 / C1-C2-C3) are assigned the values of the display pattern random number counter C22 from 0 to 99 so that the frequency of displaying B1 / C1-C2-C3) is highest.

  FIG. 70 is an explanatory diagram showing a preview effect when the display pattern (B2-B3 / C1-C3) is set by the BC display pattern table. The notice effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 70 (a), FIG. 70 (b), and FIG. 70 (c). As shown in the drawing, the notice effect shows that the weather changes from cloudy to rain, while the dog comes out of the box and the dog gets wet in the rain.

  When an image composed of the image B2 and the image C1 shown in FIG. 70A is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image shows a state in which a box is placed in a cloudy state. Since a bad impression is not given, the player is not given a disadvantageous perception of the game situation. Thereafter, when an image composed of the image B3 and the image C1 shown in FIG. 70 (b) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image represents a state in which a box is placed in the rain and the image is displayed. The images also do not give the player any adverse perception of the game situation. However, after that, when an image composed of the image B3 and the image C3 shown in FIG. 70 (c) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image shows that the dog with a large face out of the box gets wet in the rain. Is generally given a bad impression, and gives the player a disadvantageous perception of the game situation. That is, the notice effect by the display pattern (B2-B3 / C1-C3) gives a disadvantageous recognition to the player about the game situation when the image of FIG. 70 (c) is displayed.

  FIG. 71 is an explanatory diagram showing a notice effect when the display pattern (B2-B3 / C1) is set by the BC display pattern table. The notice effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 71 (a), FIG. 71 (b), and FIG. 71 (c). As shown in the figure, the notice effect represents a situation in which the weather changes from cloudy to rain and a box is placed in such weather.

  When an image composed of the image B1 and the image C1 shown in FIG. 71A is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image represents a state in which a box is placed in a cloudy state. Since a bad impression is not given, the player is not given a disadvantageous perception of the game situation. Thereafter, when an image composed of the image B3 and the image C1 shown in FIG. 71 (b) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image represents a state in which a box is placed in the rain and the image is displayed. The images also do not give the player any adverse perception of the game situation. Then, when an image composed of the image B3 and the image C1 shown in FIG. 71 (c) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image has not changed from the image of FIG. 71 (b), and the image is also a game. Is not given any disadvantageous recognition of the game situation. As described above, the display pattern (B1-B2-B3 / C1) does not give the player any disadvantageous recognition regarding the game situation.

  FIG. 72 is an explanatory diagram showing a preview effect when the display pattern (B1 / C1-C2-C3) is set by the BC display pattern table. The notice effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 72 (a), FIG. 72 (b), and FIG. 72 (c). As shown in the figure, the notice effect shows a dog appearing from the box on a sunny day.

  When an image composed of the image B1 and the image C1 shown in FIG. 72A is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image shows a state in which a box is placed in a sunny day, and is generally displayed. Since a bad impression is not given, the player is not given a disadvantageous perception of the game situation. Thereafter, when an image composed of the image B1 and the image C2 shown in FIG. 72 (b) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image shows a state in which the dog comes out of the box during a sunny day. Thus, as compared with FIG. 72 (a), the player is given an advantageous recognition regarding the game situation. When the notice effect by the display pattern table for C of FIG. 64 is set, the change of the notice effect from the image C1 to the image C2 and the image C3 has a higher probability of winning the jackpot, and therefore, FIG. Also in the announcement effect by the objects B and C shown in the drawing, when the image advances from FIG. 72 (a) to FIG. 72 (b), the image by the object C changes from the image C1 to the image C2, so On the other hand, it gives an advantageous recognition of the game situation. Thereafter, when an image composed of the image B1 and the image C3 shown in FIG. 72 (c) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image shows a state in which the dog makes a large face out of the box while it is sunny. And generally gives a good impression, so that the player is given an advantageous perception of the game situation. As described above, in the effect by the display pattern (B1 / C1-C2-C3), the object C changes from the image C1 to the image C2 and the image C3 as well as the notice effect by the display pattern table for C in FIG. Since an image that gives a bad impression is not displayed, it is possible to give the player an advantageous recognition of the situation of the game as the notice effect proceeds.

  Here, among the effects set by the display pattern table for BC, a notice effect by the display pattern (B2-B3 / C1-C3) shown in FIG. 70 and a display pattern (B2-B3 / C1) shown in FIG. The comparison with the notice effect by -C3) will be described.

  The two preview effects are the same image up to the middle image. More specifically, FIGS. 70 (a) and 71 (a) are the same image, and FIGS. 70 (b) and 71 (b) are the same image. Therefore, regardless of which of the two announcement effects is displayed, the recognition of the situation of the game given to the player is the same until halfway. However, depending on the image displayed thereafter, the recognition of the situation of the game given to the player greatly differs between the two preview effects. The image in FIG. 70C is an image in which the image C3 is combined with the image B3, and the image of a dog that gets wet in general is an image that gives a bad impression. Give a disadvantageous perception about On the other hand, the image in FIG. 71 (c) is an image in which the image C1 is combined with the image B3, and the image in which the box is placed in the rain does not give a bad impression. On the other hand, it does not give disadvantageous recognition about the game situation. In other words, in a state where an image in which the image B2 and the image C1 are combined is displayed, if the image C1 subsequently changes to the image C3, the image is shown in FIG. 70 (c). Is given a disadvantageous recognition of the situation of the game, while, in a state where an image in which the image B2 and the image C1 are combined is displayed and the image C1 does not change thereafter, Since the image is shown in FIG. 71 (c), the player is not disadvantageously recognized about the game situation. Therefore, by executing the notice effect shown in FIG. 70 or the notice effect shown in FIG. 71 and displaying the image in which the image B2 and the image C1 are combined, it is possible to determine whether or not the image C1 changes to the image C3. The player's attention can be gathered, and a sense of urgency can be given to the player.

  In the announcement effect by the display pattern table for C in FIG. 64, when the image of the object C is displayed without being combined with the image B3, the image C3 is displayed more than the image C1 displayed on the display surface 41a. Is displayed on the display surface 41a, giving the player an advantageous recognition of the game situation. More specifically, an image showing a dog's face appearing inside a box gives a better impression than an image showing a box placed, Give the player an advantageous perception of the game situation. Further, in the case where the notice effect by the display pattern table for C in FIG. 64 is set, the change in the notice effect from the image C1 to the image C2 and the image C3 has a higher probability of winning in the jackpot lottery. The situation of the game for the player when the image C3 is displayed on the display surface 41a without being combined with the image B3 is more than when the image C3 is displayed on the display surface 41a without being combined with the image B3. Give favorable recognition.

  However, when the image C3 and the image C3 are combined with the image B3, when the image C1 is combined with the image B3 and displayed on the display surface 41a (FIG. 71 (c)), the image C3 is not displayed. This gives the player more advantageous recognition of the game situation than when displayed on the display surface 41a in combination with the image B1 (FIG. 70 (c)).

  That is, when the image B3 (rain image) is not combined with each of the image C1 and the image C3, the image C3 (the image in the box) is displayed more than the image C1 (the image of the box) is displayed on the display surface 41a. When the image of the dog is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image B3 (the image of the rain) ), The case where the image C1 (the image of the box) is displayed on the display surface 41a is better than the case where the image C3 (the image of the dog in the box) is displayed on the display surface 41a. Give the player an advantageous perception of the game situation.

  Therefore, depending on how the images are combined, it is possible to give the player various recognitions about the situation of the game. In the case of the present embodiment, when a predetermined image is combined with an effect image that is stepped up as the probability of winning the jackpot lottery or the degree of expectation is higher, the player recognizes completely different recognition of the game situation. Can be given to Even if the player recognizes the image C1 (box image) or the image C3 (dog image in the box) displayed on the display surface 41a, whether or not the image B3 (rain image) is displayed It recognizes that the situation of the game is different depending on. Therefore, the player's attention to the image displayed on the display surface 41a can be improved.

  Further, as described in the display pattern table for C in FIG. 64, in the present embodiment, the image C1 (box image) is displayed in combination with the image C3 (rain image) rather than the image C3 (rain image). When the image of the dog in the box) is displayed without being combined with the image B3 (the image of rain), the image C1 (the image of the box) is displayed even though the probability of winning the jackpot is high. When the image C3 (the image of the dog in the box) is displayed in combination with the image B3 (the image of rain), the image is displayed in combination with the image B3 (the image of the rain). Probability is high. Therefore, when the object C or a part of the image such as the image C1 (box image) and the image C3 (dog image in the box) is displayed, it is determined whether the image B3 (rain image) is displayed. The degree of attention of the player can be improved.

  Normally, the effect image, in which the probability of winning the jackpot lottery increases as the step-up increases (for example, as the effect image progresses from image P1 to image P2 to image P3), is image P2 from image P1 and image P2 from image P2. P3 is configured to be an image that gives a good impression to the player. That is, in the images P1, P2, and P3, the order of the probability of winning the jackpot lottery and the order of the impression given to the player are aligned. With such a configuration, as the effect image is stepped up (progressed), the player's sense of expectation can be improved. [Image P1 + Image Q], [Image P2 + Image Q], [Image P3 + Image Q] are displayed by combining another image (eg, image Q) with such a normal effect image. Even so, [Image P2 + Image Q] is better than [Image P1 + Image Q], and [Image P3 + Image Q] is better than [Image P2 + Image Q] so as to give a better impression to the player. It is composed of That is, when the image P3 gives a better impression to the player than the image P2, even if the image Q is simply combined, the [image P2 + image Q] is given to the player more than the [image P3 + image Q]. It is difficult to make an image that gives a good impression. In the present embodiment, such a problem is solved by devising the content of the image displayed as the effect image to be stepped up and the content of the image to be combined. In the present embodiment, by devising the contents of the image P1, the image P2, the image P3, and the image Q, the image Q3 is combined with the image P3 even though the image P3 gives the player a better impression than the image P2. In this case, [image P2 + image Q] can give a better impression to the player than [image P3 + image Q].

  By doing so, it is possible to execute an effect that gives the following recognition to the player. In other words, in the effect image not combined with the image Q, the recognition that the progress of the game is more advantageous as the image P1 → the image P2 → the image P3 progresses is given, and in the effect image combined with the image Q, [image P1 + image Q] → [Picture P2 + Picture Q] → [Picture P3 + Picture Q].

  FIG. 73 is an explanatory diagram showing an ABC display pattern table. In the case of the ABC display pattern table, in the three cases of jackpot, miss (with reach), and miss (no reach), non-display and display patterns (A1-A2 / B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3), respectively. ), Display patterns (A1-A2 / B1-B2 / C1-C2-C3) and display patterns (A1-A2-A3 / B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) are allocated. I have. As shown in the drawing, the display pattern table for ABC (A1-A2 / B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) among the four display patterns is the most out of the four display patterns when the display pattern table is off (no reach). In the case where the display pattern is displayed frequently and is off (there is a reach), the display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2 / C1-C2-C3) is displayed most frequently among the above four display patterns, and the jackpot. In the case of, the display patterns (A1-A2-A3 / B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) of the four display patterns are displayed in the order of 0-99 so that the display frequency is the highest. The value of the random number counter C22 is allocated.

  Next, the AC display pattern table will be described.

  FIG. 74 is an explanatory diagram showing a notice effect when the display patterns (A1-A2 / B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) are set by the ABC display pattern table. The announcement effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 74 (a), FIG. 74 (b), and FIG. 74 (c). As shown in the figure, the notice effect shows that while the weather changes to sunny, cloudy, and rain, the walking person and the dog that comes out of the box get wet in the rain. I have.

  When an image including an image A1, an image B1, and an image C1 shown in FIG. 74A is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image represents a person and a box in a sunny day, and is generally displayed. Since a bad impression is not given, the player is not given a disadvantageous perception of the game situation. Thereafter, when an image composed of the image A2, the image B2, and the image C2 shown in FIG. 74B is displayed on the display surface 41a, the weather changes from sunny to cloudy and the person changes the weather. , And the appearance of the dog appearing a little in the box, and the image does not give the player any disadvantageous recognition of the game situation. However, after that, when an image composed of the image A2, the image B3, and the image C3 shown in FIG. 74 (c) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image includes the person who noticed the change in the weather and the inside of the box. It shows that a dog with a big face from the front gets wet in the rain, generally giving a bad impression and giving the player a disadvantageous perception of the game situation. That is, the notice effect by the display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) gives inflection to the expectation of the player for the game, and at the end of the notice effect, the player , Giving a disadvantageous perception about the playing situation.

  FIG. 75 is an explanatory diagram showing a preview effect when the display patterns (A1-A2 / B1-B2 / C1-C2-C3) are set by the ABC display pattern table. The notice effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 75 (a), FIG. 75 (b), and FIG. 75 (c). As shown in the drawing, the notice effect shows a person who notices the change in the weather and a dog coming out of the box while the weather changes from sunny to cloudy.

  When an image composed of the image A1, the image B1, and the image C1 shown in FIG. 75A is displayed on the display surface 41a, a state in which a walking person and a box are placed in a sunny day is shown in the image. Is generally not given a bad impression, so that the player is not disadvantageously recognized as to the situation of the game. After that, when an image including the image A2, the image B2, and the image C2 illustrated in FIG. 75B is displayed on the display surface 41a, the user notices the change in the weather in the weather that has changed from sunny to cloudy. The figure shows the person and the dog appearing slightly in the box, and the image does not give the player any disadvantageous recognition of the game situation. When an image including the image A2, the image B2, and the image C3 shown in FIG. 75C is displayed on the display surface 41a, a person and a dog that comes out of the box greatly in cloudy weather are represented. The images do not give the player any disadvantageous perceptions about the game situation. As described above, the display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2 / C1-C2-C3) does not give the player any disadvantageous recognition regarding the game situation.

  FIG. 76 is an explanatory diagram showing a notice effect when the display patterns (A1-A2-A3 / B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) are set by the ABC display pattern table. The notice effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 76 (a), FIG. 76 (b), and FIG. 76 (c). As shown in the illustration, the notice effect shows that the person walking was aware of the change in the weather while the weather changed to sunny, cloudy, and rain, and gave an umbrella to the dog who came out of the box and showed his face. Have been.

  When an image composed of the image A1, the image B1, and the image C1 shown in FIG. 76A is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image includes a person walking and a box in a sunny day. Is generally not given a bad impression, so that the player is not disadvantageously recognized as to the situation of the game. After that, when an image including the image A2, the image B2, and the image C2 illustrated in FIG. 76B is displayed on the display surface 41a, the user notices a change in the weather in the weather that has changed from sunny to cloudy. The figure shows the person and the dog appearing slightly in the box, and the image does not give the player any disadvantageous recognition of the game situation. Then, when the image including the image A3, the image B3, and the image C3 shown in FIG. 76 (c) is displayed on the display surface 41a, a dog with a big face out of the box in the rain and an umbrella are given to the dog. The person to be given is represented, and the image generally gives a moving impression, and thus gives the player an advantageous perception of the game situation. Thus, the display pattern (A1-A2-A3 / B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) gives the player an advantageous perception of the game situation.

  Here, of the effects set by the display pattern table for ABC, a notice effect by the display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) shown in FIG. 74 and the effect shown in FIG. 76. A description will be given of a comparison with a notice effect by a display pattern (A1-A2-A3 / B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3).

  The two preview effects are the same image up to the middle image. Specifically, FIGS. 74 (a) and 76 (a) are the same image, and FIGS. 74 (b) and 76 (b) are the same image. Therefore, regardless of which of the two announcement effects is displayed, the recognition of the situation of the game given to the player is the same until halfway. However, depending on the image displayed thereafter, the recognition of the situation of the game given to the player greatly differs between the two preview effects. The image in FIG. 74 (c) is an image in which the image A2, the image B3, and the image B3 are combined, and an image in which a person and a dog get wet with rain is an image that generally gives a bad impression. On the other hand, it gives a disadvantageous recognition of the game situation. On the other hand, the image in FIG. 76 (c) is an image in which the image A3, the image B3, and the image C3 are combined, and an image in which a person holds an umbrella so that the dog does not get wet in the rain. Is an image that gives a good impression, and gives the player an advantageous recognition of the game situation. In other words, in a state where an image in which the image A2, the image B2, and the image C2 are combined is displayed, if the image A2 does not change thereafter, the image is as shown in FIG. Gives the player a disadvantageous recognition of the situation of the game, while, on the other hand, in a state where an image obtained by combining the image A2, the image B2, and the image C2 is displayed, the image A2 is thereafter replaced with the image A3. When the image has changed to the image shown in FIG. 76 (c), the player is given an advantageous recognition of the game situation. Therefore, the notice effect shown in FIG. 74 or the notice effect shown in FIG. 76 is executed, and by displaying an image in which the image A2, the image B2, and the image C2 are combined, it is determined whether the image A2 changes to the image A3. In this respect, the player's attention can be gathered, and the player can be given a sense of urgency.

  In addition, the announcement effect by the display pattern (A1-A2-A3 / B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) shown in FIG. 76 has the following characteristics.

  In the announcement effect using the display pattern table for B in FIG. 63 described above, as the effect image progresses as the image B1, the image B2, and the image B3, a state in which the weather deteriorates is expressed. To give the player a disadvantageous perception of the game situation. In addition, when the notice effect by the display pattern table for B in FIG. 63 is set, the probability that the notice effect changes from the image B1 to the image B2 and the image B3 is set to be low in the jackpot lottery. Therefore, as the image B1, the image B2, the image B3, and the effect image progress, the player is further disadvantageously recognized as to the situation of the game. That is, the object B gives the player disadvantageous recognition by advancing the images in the order of the image B1, the image B2, and the image B3.

  However, the object B is combined with the object A whose image advances in the order of the image A1, the image A2, and the image A3, and the object C whose image advances in the order of the image C1, the image C2, and the image C3, and the display pattern (A1-A2- By displaying as A3 / B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3), it is possible to change to an effect image having a content that impresses the player, and it is advantageous for the player in the situation of the game. It can be changed to an image that gives recognition. As described above, each image configured as the object A, the object B, and the object C in the present embodiment is displayed as one object by combining the contents of the image, and displayed in combination with another object. Depending on the case, it is possible to greatly change the impression given by the image, and to greatly change the recognition of the situation of the game given to the player.

  In the present embodiment, a notice effect by the object A, the object B, and the object C, or a notice effect composed of a combination thereof is used as an effect that indicates whether or not the jackpot has been won. That is, although these announcement effects are used as the effects indicating the degree of expectation of the jackpot, they may be used as the effects indicating the degree of expectation of the probability change jackpot or the expectation of being in the probability change state to the player. Also in this case, similarly to the present embodiment, it is possible to give the player recognition that the game situation is advantageous or disadvantageous, depending on how the images of the objects are combined.

  Next, the process of setting the effect type in the sixth embodiment described above will be described with reference to a flowchart.

  FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the process of setting the effect type in the sixth embodiment. The effect type setting process is executed by the sound light side MPU 92 of the audio light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the effect setting process (FIG. 37: S2303).

  In step S3301, a counter value is obtained from the display object random number counter C21. After that, the process advances to step S3302 to refer to the display object table, execute collation with the acquired counter value of the display object random number counter C21, and determine a combination of objects to be displayed as a notice effect. After executing Step S3302, the process proceeds to Step S3303.

  In step S3303, a counter value is obtained from the display pattern random number counter C22. After that, the process advances to step S3304 to check whether the game time for which the notice effect is to be set is a jackpot, a miss (with reach), or a miss (without reach). After executing Step S3304, the process proceeds to Step S3305.

  In step S3305, the display pattern table corresponding to the combination of the objects to be displayed as the announcement effect is referred to, the acquired pattern value is compared with the counter value of the display pattern random number counter C22, and the display pattern is determined. After that, the process advances to step S3306 to set the determined display pattern as a notice effect. After executing Step S3306, the process proceeds to Step S3307.

  In step S3307, it is determined whether or not the game time is a big hit. If it is determined in step S3307 that the game number is a big hit (S3307: YES), the flow proceeds to step S3308.

  In step S3308, it is determined whether the display pattern of the announcement effect set in step S3306 is a full display pattern. Here, the full display pattern is a combination of objects A, B, and C that are displayed as a notice effect, and the display pattern is (A1-A2-A3 / B1-B2-B). B3 / C1-C2-C3). That is, it refers to the display pattern shown in FIG. If it is determined in step S3308 that the set display pattern of the notice effect is a full display pattern (S3308: YES), the process proceeds to step S3309.

  In step S3309, as a reach effect setting process, the reach effect executed after the notice effect of the full display pattern is set to a sequel effect expressing the sequel of the effect represented in the full display pattern.

  FIG. 78 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a sequel effect performed as a reach effect. The sequel effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIGS. 78 (a), 78 (b), and 78 (c). As shown in the figure, the sequel effect is an effect that shows a person walking with a dog under his umbrella in the rain. By executing such a sequel effect, it is possible to indicate to the player that the probability of a big hit is high, and to improve the player's sense of expectation.

  The description returns to FIG. In step S3309, after setting a sequel effect as a reach effect, the process proceeds to step S3310.

  If it is determined in step S3307 that the game number is not a big hit (S3307: NO), the process proceeds to step S3311.

  In step S3311, it is determined whether the game time is reach, that is, whether or not the game time is out of reach (reach is present). If it is determined in step S3311 that the game time is reach (S3311: YES), or if it is determined that the display pattern of the notification effect set in step S3308 is not the full display pattern (S3308: NO), Proceed to step S3312.

  In step S3312, a normal reach effect is set as the reach effect setting process. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3310.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3311 that the game number is not reach (S3311: NO), the process proceeds to step S3310 without executing step S3312.

  In step S3310, the announcement effect set in step S3306 and the reach effect set in step S3309 are set as effect commands. After that, the process of setting the effect type ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to change the perception of the advantage / disadvantage of the situation of the game given to the player by changing the combination of the objects, so that various effects using the objects are executed. It is possible to effectively use each object image. For example, even when the object A is displayed, the advantage of the game situation given to the player depends on how to combine with the other object or whether or not the object A is displayed in the same period as the other object. Since the disadvantages are recognized differently, various effects using each object image can be executed, and each object image can be used effectively. Further, since the probability of winning the jackpot lottery when the display pattern is displayed is different for each of various display patterns composed of combinations of the object images, the player's attention to the effect constituted by each display pattern, The degree of interest and expectations can be improved.

  Furthermore, when the object images are combined and displayed, a display pattern in which the relative arrangement position of each object is changed in accordance with a game situation (for example, a jackpot, a miss (with reach), or a miss (no reach)) Therefore, by adjusting the arrangement position, it is possible to give the player various recognitions regarding the advantages and disadvantages of the game. Furthermore, in the case of displaying each object image in combination, a display pattern in which the display start timing of each object is changed is set according to a game situation, so that the display start timing of each object is adjusted. It is possible to give the player various recognitions regarding the advantages and disadvantages of the game.

G. FIG. Seventh embodiment:
FIG. 81 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment. The present embodiment is different from the above-described first to sixth embodiments in that an RTC 96 (RTC: Real-Time Clock) for outputting year / month / day information and time information is provided in the sound emission control device 90. is there. The RTC 96 has a backup power supply, and can update the date and time information and the time information even when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off.

  The MPU 92 of the audio light emission control device 90 acquires the date and time information and the time information output from the RTC 96, and executes an RTC effect that is an effect based on the acquired date and time information and the time information. In the present embodiment, the sound emission control device 90 determines whether or not the acquired time information matches a predetermined time set as the RTC effect start condition. Start the process to be executed. The RTC effect of the present embodiment is composed of an RTC effect moving image for 300 seconds and RTC effect music corresponding to the RTC effect moving image, and is executed every hour at 00 minutes.

  FIG. 82 is a timing chart illustrating an example of a process when the RTC effect start condition is satisfied while the symbol display device 41 is displaying the background moving image. The RTC effect flag shown in the figure is a flag that is turned on when the RTC effect start condition is satisfied and the RTC effect is started, and is turned off when the RTC effect ends.

  The display control device 100 changes the display mode of the symbol display device 41 to the background when the time reaches hourly hour and the RTC effect start condition is satisfied (time t1) while the symbol display device 41 is displaying the background moving image. The mode is shifted from the mode of displaying a moving image to the mode of displaying an RTC effect moving image. Further, when the display mode of the symbol display device 41 shifts from the mode of displaying the background moving image to the mode of displaying the RTC effect moving image (time t1), the sound emission control device 90 stops outputting the background music. At the same time, while maintaining the output level (volume) of the sound preset by the player, the output of the RTC effect music is started from the temporal start position "01".

  When a predetermined display period (300 seconds in the present embodiment) of the RTC effect moving image ends (time t2), the display control device 100 displays the display mode of the symbol display device 41 on the RTC effect moving image. The mode is shifted from the mode to a mode in which a background moving image is displayed. Then, when shifting to the mode of displaying the background moving image, the display control device 100 starts displaying the background moving image from the temporal start position “01”. Further, when the display mode of the symbol display device 41 shifts to the mode of displaying the background moving image (time t2), the sound emission control device 90 stops the output of the RTC effect music and sets it in advance by the player. While the output level (volume) of the output sound is maintained, the output is started from the temporal start position “01” of the background music.

  Note that the sound emission control device 90 can output a plurality of types of background music, and when executing background music cueing processing (processing for starting output or display from the temporal head position “01”). The type of the background music to be subjected to the cueing process is randomly selected by lottery, and the display control device 100 can display a plurality of types of background moving images corresponding to the plurality of types of background music. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which a background moving image corresponding to the background music is selected and the cueing process is executed. With such a configuration, a plurality of types of background music and background moving images can be viewed by the player, so that the interest of the game can be improved. In FIG. 85 to be described later, similarly, when the audio light emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 execute the cueing process of the background music and the background moving image, a configuration in which the background music and the background moving image are selected from a plurality of types. Can be adopted.

  FIG. 83 is a timing chart illustrating an example of a process when the RTC effect start condition is satisfied while the symbol display device 41 is displaying the demonstration moving image.

  When the time reaches 00 minutes and the RTC effect start condition is satisfied (time t1) while the symbol display device 41 is displaying the demonstration movie, the display control device 100 changes the display mode of the symbol display device 41 to the demonstration movie. Is shifted from a mode in which is displayed to a mode in which an RTC effect moving image is displayed. In addition, when the display mode of the symbol display device 41 shifts from the mode of displaying the demonstration video to the mode of displaying the RTC performance video (time t1), the sound emission control device 90 determines the time of the RTC performance music. The output is started from the head position "01", and the output level (volume) of the sound is returned to the output level preset by the player.

  When a predetermined display period (300 seconds in the present embodiment) of the RTC effect moving image ends (time t2), the display control device 100 displays the display mode of the symbol display device 41 on the RTC effect moving image. The mode is shifted from a mode to a mode in which a demonstration moving image is displayed. Then, when shifting to the mode of displaying the demonstration moving image, the display control device 100 starts the display from the temporal start position “01” of the demonstration moving image. Further, when the display mode of the symbol display device 41 shifts to the mode of displaying the demonstration moving image (time t2), the sound emission control device 90 stops the output of the RTC effect music and outputs the sound output level ( Volume) to zero.

  FIG. 84 is a timing chart illustrating an example of a process when the transition condition is satisfied while the symbol display device 41 is displaying the RTC effect moving image. As described above, the transition condition is to shift the display mode of the symbol display device 41 to the mode for displaying the demonstration moving image and to shift the audio output mode to the mode in which the volume is zero (silence state). Condition.

  When the time reaches 00 minutes and the RTC effect start condition is satisfied (time t1) while the symbol display device 41 is displaying the background moving image, the display control device 100 changes the display mode of the symbol display device 41 to the background moving image. Is shifted from a mode in which is displayed to a mode in which an RTC effect moving image is displayed. Further, when the display mode of the symbol display device 41 shifts from the mode of displaying the background moving image to the mode of displaying the RTC effect moving image (time t1), the sound emission control device 90 stops outputting the background music. At the same time, while maintaining the output level (volume) of the sound preset by the player, the output of the RTC effect music is started from the temporal start position "01".

  The display control device 100 stops the change of the symbol on the main display unit 45 while the symbol display device 41 is displaying the RTC effect moving image (time t2), and 15 seconds have elapsed after the stop of the symbol change, and the transition condition is satisfied. Is established (time t3), the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is changed to the mode of displaying the demonstration video after the predetermined display period (300 seconds in the present embodiment) of the RTC effect video has ended. The time is shifted (time t4). Then, when shifting to the mode of displaying the demonstration moving image, the display control device 100 starts the display from the temporal start position “01” of the demonstration moving image. Further, when the display mode of the symbol display device 41 shifts to the mode of displaying the demonstration moving image (time t4), the sound emission control device 90 stops the output of the RTC effect music and outputs the sound output level ( Volume) to zero.

  FIG. 85 is a timing chart illustrating an example of a process when the return condition is satisfied while the symbol display device 41 is displaying the RTC effect moving image. As described above, the return condition is to return the display mode of the symbol display device 41 to the mode of displaying the background moving image, and to change the output mode of the audio to the background music at a preset volume. This is the condition for returning to the mode.

  When the time reaches 00 minutes and the RTC effect start condition is satisfied (time t1) while the symbol display device 41 is displaying the demonstration movie, the display control device 100 changes the display mode of the symbol display device 41 to the demonstration movie. Is shifted from a mode in which is displayed to a mode in which an RTC effect moving image is displayed. In addition, when the display mode of the symbol display device 41 shifts from the mode of displaying the demonstration video to the mode of displaying the RTC performance video (time t1), the sound emission control device 90 determines the time of the RTC performance music. The output is started from the head position "01", and the output level (volume) of the sound is returned to the output level preset by the player.

  The display control device 100 determines the RTC effect moving image in advance when the symbol display device 41 is displaying the RTC effect moving image and the symbol change in the main display unit 45 starts and the return condition is satisfied (time t2). After the completion of the display period (300 seconds in the present embodiment), the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is returned to the mode of displaying the background moving image (time t3). When the display mode of the symbol display device 41 returns to the mode of displaying the background moving image (time t3), the sound emission control device 90 stops the output of the RTC effect music and sets the display mode in advance by the player. While the output level (volume) of the output sound is maintained, the output is started from the temporal start position “01” of the background music.

  Next, an example of a process executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, processing different from the above-described first embodiment will be described, and description of the same processing as the above-described first embodiment will be omitted.

  FIG. 86 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process executed in the sound-side MPU 92 of the seventh embodiment. The difference from the timer interrupt process (FIG. 32) executed in the sound-light-side MPU of the first embodiment is after executing the command corresponding process (step S1802), and executing the standby state shift process (step S1803). Before performing the process, the RTC effect process (step S1802a) is executed, and the other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment. In the process for the RTC effect, a process for executing the RTC effect is executed. The details of the RTC effect processing will be described below.

  FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the RTC effect processing executed in the sound-side MPU 92 of the seventh embodiment. In step S3401, it is determined whether the RTC effect flag is ON. The RTC effect flag is a flag for the sound light side MPU 92 to recognize whether or not the RTC effect is being executed. If it is determined in step S3401 that the RTC effect flag is not ON (S3401: NO), the process advances to step S3402 to read the time information output from the RTC 96. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3403.

  In step S3403, it is determined whether or not the read time information matches a time set in advance as a time at which execution of the RTC effect is started. In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the read time information matches hourly hour. If it is determined in step S3403 that the read time information does not match the time set in advance as the time to start the execution of the RTC effect (S3403: NO), the RTC effect processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3403 that the read time information matches the time set in advance as the time to start the execution of the RTC effect (S3403: YES), the process advances to step S3404.

  In step S3404, an RTC effect time setting process is executed. Specifically, “150,000” (that is, 5.0 min) is set in the RTC effect time timer counter Tr stored in the various counter areas 94b. The RTC effect time counter Tr is a counter for measuring the elapsed time from the start of the RTC effect, and is decremented by one every time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, every 2 msec. After executing Step S3404, the process proceeds to Step S3405.

  In step S3405, an RTC effect moving image start command is transmitted to display-side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 that has received the RTC effect moving image start command starts processing for displaying the RTC effect moving image on the symbol display device 41. After executing Step S3405, the process proceeds to Step S3406.

  In step S3406, an RTC effect music output start process is executed. Specifically, the output is started from the temporal start position of the RTC effect music. When the background music is being output, the output of the background music is stopped, and the output is started from the temporal start position of the RTC effect music. After that, the process advances to step S3407 to turn on the RTC effect flag. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3408.

  In step S3408, it is determined whether any of the volume reduction flag, the Temo moving image start waiting flag, and the demonstration moving image display flag is ON. A situation in which any of the volume reduction flag, the Temo video start waiting flag, and the demonstration video display flag is ON means that the above-mentioned transition condition is satisfied and the audio output level (volume) is reduced. Means. If it is determined in step S3408 that any one of the volume reduction flag, the Temo moving image start waiting flag, and the demonstration moving image displaying flag is ON (S3408: YES), the process proceeds to step S3409.

  In step S3409, the output level (volume) of the reduced sound is returned to a value preset by the player. After that, the process advances to step S3410 to turn on the demonstration video start flag after the RTC effect. The demonstration video start flag after the RTC effect is a flag for starting the demonstration video after the RTC effect ends, and the transition condition is satisfied before the start of the RTC effect, or the transition condition during the execution of the RTC effect. Is a flag that is turned on when the condition is satisfied. After executing step S3410, the process proceeds to step S3411, and the flag that has been ON, among the volume reduction flag, the Temo moving image start waiting flag, and the demonstration moving image display flag, is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3412. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3408 that all of the volume reduction flag, the Temo video start waiting flag, and the demonstration video display flag are OFF (S3408: NO), the processing from step S3409 to step S3411 is performed. No, the process proceeds to step S3412.

  In step S3412, it is determined whether the return condition satisfaction flag is ON. If it is determined in step S3412 that the return condition satisfaction flag is ON (S3412: YES), the process advances to step S3413 to turn off the RTC effect demonstration moving image start flag and advances to step S3414 to satisfy the return condition satisfaction. Turn off the flag. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3412 that the return condition satisfaction flag is not ON (S3412: NO), the process for real-time RTC production ends without executing the processes in steps S3413 and S3414.

  If it is determined in step S3401 that the RTC effect flag is ON (S3401: YES), that is, if the RTC effect is being executed, the process proceeds to step S3415.

  In step S3415, it is determined whether it is time to end the RTC effect. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RTC effect time timer counter Tr set in step S3403 is zero. If it is determined in step S3415 that it is time to end the RTC effect (S3415: YES), the process proceeds to step S3416, and proceeds to the process in the case where the RTC effect ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3415 that it is not time to finish the RTC effect (S3415: NO), the process proceeds from step S3408 to step S3414. The reason is that the transition condition and the return condition may be satisfied even during the period in which the RTC effect is being executed, and it is necessary to execute the processing from step S3408 to step S3414.

  In step S3416, the RTC effect flag is turned off. After that, the flow advances to step S3417 to execute an RTC effect music output stop process. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3418.

  In step S3418, it is determined whether or not the after-RTC demonstration video start flag is ON. If it is determined in step S3418 that the demonstration moving image start flag after the RTC effect is not ON (S3418: NO), the process advances to step S3419 to transmit a background moving image start command to the display side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 that has received the background moving image start command starts processing for displaying the background moving image on the symbol display device 41 from the temporal start position. After that, the process advances to step S3420 to execute background music output start processing. Specifically, the output is started from the temporal start position of the background music. After that, the RTC effect processing ends.

  If it is determined in step S3418 that the demonstration video start flag after the RTC effect is ON (S3418: YES), the flow advances to step S3421 to transmit a demonstration video start command to the display-side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 that has received the demonstration moving image start command starts processing for displaying the demonstration moving image on the symbol display device 41 from the temporal start position. After that, the flow advances to step S3422 to turn off the demonstration moving image display flag. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3423.

  In step S3423, the output level (volume) of the sound is reduced to zero. This is because, in the present embodiment, music to be output together with the demo moving image is not set. After executing step S3423, the process advances to step S3424 to turn on the cueing determination flag. By this processing, the cueing determination flag can be turned ON during the display of the demonstration moving image. After executing step S3424, the process advances to step S3425 to turn off the demonstration moving image start flag after the RTC effect. After that, the RTC effect processing ends.

  FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing a standby state transition process executed in the sound-side MPU 92 of the seventh embodiment. The difference from the standby state transition process (FIG. 41) executed by the sound-light-side MPU 92 of the first embodiment is that before executing the process (step S <b> 2701) of determining whether the return condition satisfaction flag is ON. , The process of determining whether or not the RTC effect flag is ON (step S2700), and the other processes are the same as those of the first embodiment.

  In step S2700, it is determined whether or not the RTC effect flag is ON. If it is determined that the RTC effect flag is ON (S2700: YES), the standby state transition process ends. That is, it is configured not to shift to the standby state during the period in which the RTC effect is being executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2700 that the RTC effect flag is not ON (S2700: NO), the process advances to step S2701 to determine whether the return condition satisfaction flag is ON. The following processing is the same as in the first embodiment, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing a command handling process executed in the display MPU 102 of the seventh embodiment. The difference from the command corresponding process (FIG. 45) executed in the display-side MPU 102 of the first embodiment is after executing the process of starting the display of the background moving image (step S3112) and other processes (step S3113). ) Is executed before executing step S3112a and step S3112b, and other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment.

  In step S3112a, it is determined whether an RTC effect moving image start command is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. If it is determined in step S3112a that the RTC effect moving image start command is stored, the process advances to step S3112b to execute processing for starting display of the RTC effect moving image. Specifically, control of drawing and display of an image is started so that the RTC effect moving image is displayed on the symbol display device 41 from the temporal start position. After executing Step S3112b, the process proceeds to Step S3113. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3112a that the RTC effect moving image start command is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3113 without executing step S3112b. The following processing is the same as in the first embodiment, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 82, the mode shifts from the mode of displaying the background moving image to the mode of displaying the RTC effect moving image, and thereafter, the predetermined display of the RTC effect moving image is performed. When the period ends, the mode shifts from the mode of displaying the RTC effect animation to the mode of displaying the background video, and at the time of shifting to the mode of displaying the background video, from the predetermined time position of the background video. Start display. Therefore, the control can be simplified as compared with a configuration in which the temporal position at which the display of the background moving image starts is changed when the mode shifts to the mode of displaying the background moving image. The configuration in which the temporal position at which the display of the background moving image starts to change when shifting to the mode of displaying the background moving image may be, for example, when the predetermined display period of the RTC effect moving image ends, the RTC effect Transition to a configuration in which display of the background moving image is started from the temporal position of the background moving image displayed at the timing immediately before the transition to the moving image display mode, or a mode in which the RTC effect moving image is displayed to display the background moving image When the display is started, the temporal position of the background moving image to be displayed is determined based on the elapsed time after the transition to the mode for displaying the RTC effect moving image, and the RTC effect moving image is displayed from the mode for displaying the background moving image. After the transition to the mode, the reproduction of the background moving image is continued as internal processing, and the mode is changed from the mode of displaying the RTC effect moving image to the mode of displaying the background moving image. Configuration or the like for displaying a background video being played continuously as internal processing on the symbol display device 41 may be mentioned when.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 83, the mode is shifted from the mode of displaying the demonstration video to the mode of displaying the RTC video, and the predetermined display period of the RTC video has ended. In this case, the mode is shifted from the mode of displaying the RTC effect animation to the mode of displaying the demo video, and when the mode is shifted to the mode of displaying the demo video, the display of the demo video is started from a predetermined time position. . Therefore, control can be simplified as compared with a configuration in which the temporal position at which the display of the demonstration moving image starts is changed when the mode shifts to the mode of displaying the demonstration moving image. The configuration in which the temporal position at which the display of the demo video starts to change when shifting to the mode of displaying the demo video may be, for example, when a predetermined display period of the RTC video has ended, Transition to a configuration in which the display of the demo video is started from the temporal position of the demo video displayed at the timing immediately before the transition to the mode of displaying the video, or a mode in which the demonstration video is displayed from the mode in which the RTC effect video is displayed When the display is started, the temporal position of the demonstration moving image to be displayed is determined based on the elapsed time from the transition to the mode of displaying the RTC effect moving image, and the RTC effect moving image is displayed from the mode of displaying the demo moving image. After the transition to the mode, the reproduction of the demo movie is continued as an internal process, and the mode is changed from the mode of displaying the RTC effect movie to the mode of displaying the demo movie. Configuration and the like for displaying the demonstration video being played continuously as internal processing on the symbol display device 41 may be mentioned when.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 84, even when the transition condition is satisfied while the RTC effect moving image is displayed, the RTC effect moving image is interrupted in the middle of a predetermined display period. Instead, the mode is shifted to a mode in which the demonstration moving image is displayed after a predetermined display period of the RTC effect moving image has ended, so that a sense of incongruity given to the player can be reduced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 85, even when the return condition is satisfied while the RTC effect movie is being displayed, the RTC effect movie is interrupted in the middle of the predetermined display period. Instead, the display returns to the mode in which the background moving image is displayed after the predetermined display period of the RTC effect moving image ends, so that the uncomfortable feeling given to the player can be reduced and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, when a plurality of pachinko machines 10 of the present embodiment are installed, as shown in FIG. 82 and FIG. When shifting to the mode of displaying the background moving image, each pachinko machine 10 starts displaying the background moving image from a predetermined time position when displaying the background moving image. Background videos can be synchronized. That is, it is possible to create a spectacular situation in which the background moving image displayed on each pachinko machine 10 is synchronized. For this reason, a player who has visited a gaming hall in which a plurality of pachinko machines 10 of the present embodiment are installed will witness a spectacular situation in which background moving images displayed on the respective pachinko machines 10 are synchronized. As a result, it is possible to make the player interested in the pachinko machine 10.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 82 and 85, when the display period of the RTC effect moving image ends and the mode shifts to the mode of displaying the background moving image, the temporal start position of the background moving image is displayed. Since the display is started from, the discomfort given to the player can be reduced as compared with a configuration in which the display is started from a position in the middle of the background moving image when shifting to the mode of displaying the background moving image. . For example, if a configuration is adopted in which display is started from a position in the middle of time of the background moving image when shifting to a mode of displaying a background moving image, the player can watch the background moving image from the position in the middle of time. Therefore, there is a possibility that the user may feel uncomfortable or feel unsatisfactory that there is a portion of the background moving image that has not been watched. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the background video can be viewed from the temporal start position for the player, so that the uncomfortable feeling given to the player can be reduced and the background video can be displayed. It is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction that he / she has been able to appreciate everything from the temporal start position. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 82 and 85, when the display period of the RTC effect moving image ends and the mode shifts to the mode of displaying the background moving image, the predetermined time position is changed. Since the output of the background music is started, the display of the background moving image and the output of the background music can be easily synchronized, as compared with a configuration in which the temporal position at which the output of the background music starts is changed. As a result, the quality of the game effect can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, as a configuration in which the temporal position at which the output of the background music starts is changed, for example, in FIG. 82, when a predetermined display period of the RTC effect moving image ends, the mode shifts to outputting the RTC effect music. When the transition from the output of the RTC effect music to the output of the background music is started, the output is started when the output of the background music is started from the temporal position of the background music output at the timing immediately before the output. A configuration in which the temporal position of the background music to be performed is determined based on the elapsed time since the transition to the mode for outputting the RTC production music, and even after the transition from the mode for outputting the background music to the mode for outputting the RTC production music. The reproduction of the background music is continued as an internal process, and when the mode of outputting the RTC effect music is shifted to the mode of outputting the background music, the internal process is performed. Configuration and the like for outputting the background music being played continuously Te.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 82 and 85, when the display period of the RTC effect animation ends and the mode shifts to the mode of displaying the background animation, the temporal start position of the background music is displayed. Since the output is started from the beginning, the uncomfortable feeling given to the player can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the output is started from the middle position of the background music in time. For example, if a configuration in which the output of the background music is started from a position in the middle of time is adopted, the player will appreciate the background music from the position in the middle of time, so that the player may feel uncomfortable, You may find it unsatisfactory that some of the background music is not being watched. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the background music can be viewed from the temporal start position for the player, so that the uncomfortable feeling given to the player can be reduced and the background music can be reproduced. It is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction that he or she has been able to appreciate everything from the temporal start position. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

  Further, when a plurality of pachinko machines 10 of the present embodiment are installed, as shown in FIG. 83 and FIG. When shifting to the mode of displaying the demo movie, each pachinko machine 10 starts displaying the demo movie from a predetermined time position when displaying the demo movie, so that each pachinko machine 10 displays the demo movie. You can synchronize demo videos. That is, it is possible to create a spectacular situation in which the demo moving images displayed on the respective pachinko machines 10 are synchronized. For this reason, a player who has visited a gaming hall in which a plurality of pachinko machines 10 of the present embodiment are installed will witness a spectacular situation in which the demo videos displayed on each of the pachinko machines 10 are synchronized. As a result, it is possible to make the player interested in the pachinko machine 10.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 83 and 84, when the display period of the RTC effect animation ends and the mode shifts to the mode of displaying the demo animation, the temporal start position of the demo animation is displayed. Since the display is started from, when displaying the demonstration video by shifting to the mode of displaying the demonstration video, the sense of discomfort given to the player is compared with a configuration in which the display is started from a position in the middle of the time of the demonstration video. Can be reduced. For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the display is started from a position in the middle of the time of the demonstration video when displaying the demonstration video by shifting to the mode of displaying the demonstration video, the player Since the viewer watches the video from an intermediate position, he or she may feel uncomfortable or feel unsatisfactory that there is a portion of the demo video that has not been viewed. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to allow the player to appreciate the demonstration movie from the temporal start position, so that the uncomfortable feeling given to the player can be reduced and the demonstration movie can be displayed. It is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction that he or she can appreciate everything from the temporal start position. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

H. Modification:
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and can be implemented in various modes without departing from the gist of the present invention. For example, the following modifications are also possible.

H1. Modification 1
In the first to fourth embodiments, the suggestion effect is performed before the special game state reproduction effect and the game times reproduction effect are performed, but the suggestion effect is not limited to such a configuration. May be omitted. Even in the configuration in which the suggested effect is omitted, at least one of the effects executed in the first game time in the second game time, despite having won the jackpot lottery related to the second game time. Since the effect of reproducing the part is executed, it is difficult for the player to expect that the big hit lottery related to the second game time has been won. In addition, even in the configuration in which the suggestion effect is omitted, the player can be surprised by executing the game effect reproduction effect due to winning the jackpot lottery related to the second game operation, Surprisingness can be provided.

H2. Modification Example 2:
In the case a2 of the first embodiment and the case c2 of the third embodiment described above, the suggestion effect is executed during the ending period, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. For example, in the second game round, the suggestion effect may be executed before the game time reproduction effect. That is, the suggested effect can be executed at an arbitrary timing as long as the effect is before the effect already performed is reproduced. Even if such a configuration is adopted, the suggestion effect is performed before the special game state reproduction effect and the game time reproduction effect are performed. For example, the effect performed in the second game time is already performed. The player can be strongly recognized as a reproduction of the executed effect.

H3. Modification 3:
In the first embodiment to the fourth embodiment, the target of the reproduction in the special game state reproduction effect and the game time reproduction effect is not limited to the effect executed in the game time having the big hit. An effect performed in a game time that is not a jackpot, for example, a reach effect in a game time of off (with reach) may be a target of reproduction in a special game state reproduction effect and a game time reproduction effect, or a game of off (without reach) The notice effect in the round may be reproduced.

H4. Modification 4:
The first game time and the second game time defined in the first to fourth embodiments are not limited to two game times executed in succession. For example, another game time may exist between the first game time and the second game time.

H5. Modification 5:
In the above-described first to third embodiments, a configuration is adopted in which the effect to be executed during the ending period of the special game state is determined based on the special information relating to the predetermined game times executed after the special game state. did. For example, in the first embodiment, the effects performed during the ending period of the special game state performed after the first game round are the suggested effects and the special game state reproduction effects as shown in case a1 (FIG. 9). Or, as shown in case a2, a suggestion effect is determined based on the special information relating to the second game round executed after the special game state, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. The effect to be determined based on the special information pertaining to the predetermined game times executed after the special game state is not limited to the suggestion effect or the special game state reproduction effect, but may employ any other effect. Is good. For example, other effects, such as a normal reach effect (a reach effect that is not a target of the special game state reproduction effect) or an effect that is executed only when a predetermined condition is satisfied, may be adopted. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to perform an effect in the special game state in consideration of special information relating to a predetermined game round executed after the special game state. Therefore, for example, in the special game state, it is possible to execute an effect related to the effect to be executed in the predetermined game round, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

H6. Modification 6:
The processing executed in the first to fourth embodiments may be used in combination. That is, cases a1 (FIG. 9 (a)) and case a2 (FIG. 9 (b)) which are processes executed in the first embodiment, and processes executed in the second embodiment (FIGS. 46 (a) and (b)) ), Case c1 (FIG. 48 (a)) and case c2 (FIG. 48 (b)) which are processes executed in the third embodiment, and case d1 (FIG. 49 (a) which is a process executed in the fourth embodiment. )) And case d2 (FIG. 49B), a plurality of processes may be appropriately selected and used in combination. As a result, a synergistic effect can be obtained by the combined use of the processing. For example, it is possible to improve the player's attention and expectation for an effect that reproduces an effect that has already been executed, such as a special game state reproduction effect or a game times reproduction effect.

H7. Modification 7:
In the above-described first to sixth embodiments, the case where the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is described as an example in which the jackpot lottery is won. However, the predetermined condition is that the jackpot lottery is won. Not limited. For example, as a case where the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, a case where the condition for executing the reach effect based on the acquired counter value of the reach random number counter C3 may be adopted. As described above, even if another condition is set as the predetermined condition, the same effect as that described in the first to sixth embodiments can be obtained.

H8. Modification 8:
In the fifth embodiment and the sixth embodiment, three types of images of the objects A to C are adopted as the object images used for the announcement effect, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. For example, two types of object images or four types of object images may be used as the object images used for the announcement effect. As described above, even if an arbitrary number of object images are adopted, the same effects as in the above-described embodiment can be obtained. Also, various contents can be adopted as the contents of each object.

H9. Modification 9:
In the fifth embodiment and the sixth embodiment, the degree of expectation of a jackpot is shown to a player as a game situation according to a combination of images of respective objects displayed as a notice effect. A configuration in which various game situations are presented to the player as game situations, such as the degree and the degree of expectation that the current game state is a probable change state, may be adopted.

H10. Modification 10:
In the fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54, as an example, each of the display pattern tables of the object A, the object B, and the object C includes three types of a big hit, a miss (with reach), and a miss (without reach). Each display pattern random number was sorted according to the case. For example, the jackpot division in the display pattern table of the object B was further divided into 16R probability variable jackpot, 8R probability variable jackpot, 16R normal jackpot, and 8R normal jackpot, The effect by the object B may be made to function as a step-up effect indicating the degree of expectation of the jackpot. In addition, for example, in a gaming machine having a latent probability change state, the effect by the object C may be caused to function as a step-up effect indicating the degree of expectation of the current game probability state. As described above, if the objects A, B, and C have a function of indicating the advantage / disadvantage of the game according to the display pattern, each object is of a different type (for example, a jackpot expectation degree or (Eg, the degree of expectation of a probability change jackpot) may be shown.

H11. Modification 11:
In the fifth embodiment, the coordinates indicating the arrangement of each object in the arrangement / timing setting table of FIG. 55 are set as fixed coordinates, but the arrangement positions (coordinates) of each object are set so as to change with time. May be. That is, a dynamic trajectory of the center position of the object may be set. Even in this case, the arrangement position (coordinates) changes over time so that each object is displayed on the display surface 41a in a related manner, and each object displayed on the display surface 41a in the same period is changed. The arrangement of the display objects and the timing of the display start in the arrangement / timing setting table are set so as not to overlap each other.

H12. Modification 12:
In the fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56, the process of not displaying the image frame is performed only for the image A3 of the display pattern (A1-A2-A3) using the object A. A configuration may be adopted in which some or all of the image frames of the image A1, the image A2, and the image A3 displayed as -A2-A3) are not displayed. Further, the same processing may be executed for other object images.

H13. Modification 13:
In the fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 55, the pachinko machine 10 has a configuration in which the arrangement and the display start timing are set for each combination of object images displayed as the notice effect by the arrangement / timing setting table. However, other configurations may be employed. For example, in the announcement effect in which the object A and the object B are displayed, the announcement effect in which (A1-A2) and (B1-B2-B3) are combined, and the notice effect in which (A1-A2-A3) and (B1) are combined. There are multiple types of notice effects, such as notice effects. The arrangement of each object image and the display start timing may be set for each of these plural types of notice effects. By doing so, the effect performed by displaying a plurality of objects in the same period does not give a complicated impression to the player, and the quality of the effect can be improved.

H14. Modification 14:
In the fifth and sixth embodiments, when two or more objects are displayed in one announcement effect, the relative positions between the objects are considered, and the objects are associated with each other. In such a configuration, the relative arrangement position between the objects and the display timing are set so as to be displayed on the display surface 41a in a mode having the following. Specifically, the display mode is set so that it is displayed in a narrative manner as a relevance mode, but is set so that a plurality of objects are displayed in a mode having a single idea as a relevance mode. Various modes can be adopted as modes in which a plurality of objects have relevance, such as a configuration in which a plurality of objects are displayed in a mode having a predetermined rule, and a configuration in which a plurality of objects are displayed in a mode having predetermined rules.

H15. Modification 15:
Each display pattern set in the display pattern table described in the fifth embodiment and the sixth embodiment is not limited to the mode shown in the above-described embodiment, and may adopt a display pattern of another mode. Can be. For example, a display pattern (B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) may be adopted as a display pattern set in the BC display pattern table. In this case, the display pattern (C1-C2-C3) of the object C is a display pattern showing a state in which the dog comes out of the box, and gives the player recognition that the game situation is advantageous. On the other hand, the display pattern (B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) in which the object C is combined with the object C is a display pattern indicating that the dog in the box gets wet due to the deterioration of the weather, and Recognition that the situation is disadvantageous can be given to the player, various effects can be executed by combining the objects, and the objects can be used effectively.

H16. Modification 16:
In the sixth embodiment, the image used for the notice effect is the object A, the object B, the object C, or an image in which these are combined, but another image may be used.

  FIG. 79 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an object D that can be used for a notice effect. The object D is an image composed of three images, an image D1, an image D2, and an image D3, and changes over time in the order of the image D1, the image D2, and the image D3. FIG. 79 (a) shows the image D1, FIG. 79 (b) shows the image D2, and FIG. 79 (c) shows the image D3. As shown in the drawing, the object D expresses a love pattern of a male character and a female character. Specifically, the image D1 depicts a state in which a male character and a female character are staring at a certain distance. The image D2 shows a state in which the male character and the female character are staring at each other at a short distance. The image D3 depicts a state in which the male character and the female character hold hands and are on good terms. Further, in the image D3, a state in which the female character is talking with the male character so as to keep the father of the female character secret from being close to the male character is expressed.

  In the object D composed of images having such contents, a situation in which the relationship between men and women is fulfilled as the images progress in the order of the image D1, the image D2, and the image D3 is depicted. Image D3 generally gives a better impression than image D2. That is, the image D1 rather than the image D1 and the image D3 than the image D2 give the player an advantageous recognition of the game situation. The object D is displayed on the display surface 41a as a step-up effect image that is set so that the probability of winning the jackpot is increased as the image D1, the image D2, and the image D3 progress. That is, the pachinko machine according to the sixteenth modification includes a display pattern table for D as a display pattern table. In the three cases of a jackpot, a miss (with reach), and a miss (without reach), a non-display pattern and a display pattern Four display patterns (D1), display patterns (D1-D2), and display patterns (D1-D2-D3) are allocated. The display pattern table for D indicates that the display pattern display pattern (D1) is most frequently displayed among the above four display patterns in the case of deviation (no reach), and in the case of deviation (reach is present). Of the four display patterns, the display pattern (D1-D2) is displayed most frequently, and in the case of a jackpot, the display pattern (D1-D2-D3) of the four display patterns is displayed most frequently. The values of the display pattern random number counter C22 of 0 to 99 are allocated so as to increase.

  The pachinko machine according to the present modification further executes a notice effect in which an image D is combined with the object D as another image.

  FIG. 80 shows an image (object D + image E) in which object D is combined with image E. As shown in the figure, an image E, which is an image combined with the object D, expresses the father of a female character. The object D + image E is composed of three images: [image D1 + image E], [image D2 + image E], [image D3 + image E], and is [image D1 + image E], [image D2 + image E], [image D3 + image E]. 80A shows [Image D1 + Image E], FIG. 79 (B) shows [Image D2 + Image E], and FIG. 79 (C) shows [Image D3 + Image E]. As shown in the figure, the object D + image E shows a state in which a father of a female character is watching a love pattern between a male character and a female character from behind a pillar. Specifically, [Image D1 + Image E] expresses how a male character and a female character look at each other at a certain distance, and how a female character's father is looking behind a pillar. Have been. [Image D2 + Image E] expresses a situation in which a male character and a female character are looking at each other at a short distance, and a situation in which a female character's father is looking behind a pillar. In [Image D3 + Image E], the male character and the female character hold hands, and talk to the female character so that the female character's father is close to the male character. The appearance of a female character's father watching from behind a pillar is expressed.

  The object D + image E composed of the images having such contents is generated as the image progresses in the order of [image D1 + image E], [image D2 + image E], and [image D3 + image E]. It is presumed that the parent-child relationship deteriorates. Therefore, as the images progress in the order of [image D1 + image E], [image D2 + image E], and [image D3 + image E], a bad impression is generally given. In other words, [Image D2 + Image E] gives better impression than [Image D3 + Image E] and [Image D1 + Image E] more than [Image D2 + Image E]. That is, [image D2 + image E] from [image D3 + image E] and [image D1 + image E] from [image D2 + image E] give the player an advantageous recognition of the game situation.

  The object D + image E is displayed as an effect image that is set so that the probability of winning the jackpot is reduced as the image D1 + image E, the image D2 + image E, and the image D3 + image E progress. It is displayed on the surface 41a. That is, the pachinko machine according to Modification 16 includes a display pattern table for DE as a display pattern table. In the three cases of jackpot, out (with reach), and out (without reach), the non-display and display pattern Four display patterns (D1 / E), display patterns (D1-D2 / E), and display patterns (D1-D2-D3 / E) are allocated. In the DE display pattern table, in the case of a departure (no reach), the display pattern (D1-D2-D3 / E) is displayed most frequently among the four display patterns, and the departure (reach is present). In this case, the display pattern (D1-D2 / E) is displayed most frequently among the above four display patterns, and in the case of a big hit, the display pattern (D1 / E) is the most displayed among the four display patterns. The values of the display pattern random number counter C22 of 0 to 99 are assigned so that the frequency of the display pattern random number is increased.

  By doing so, the same effect as in the sixth embodiment can be obtained. That is, in the pachinko machine according to the modification, the case where the image D3 is displayed on the display surface 41a without being combined with the image E is better than the case where the image D1 is displayed without being combined with the image E. The image D3 is displayed in combination with the image E when the image D1 is displayed in combination with the image E on the display surface 41a despite giving the player an advantageous recognition of the game situation. It is possible to give the player a more advantageous recognition of the game situation than is displayed on the surface 41a. Therefore, by changing the combination of the images and the content of the images, it is possible to give the player various recognitions about the situation of the game.

  In addition, the probability that the image D3 is displayed on the display surface 41a without being combined with the image E is greater than the case where the image D1 is displayed without being combined with the image E on the display surface 41a. Is higher, the image D1 is displayed on the display surface 41a in combination with the image E than the image D3 is displayed on the display surface 41a in combination with the image E. There is a high probability of winning. Therefore, when a predetermined image is combined with an effect image that is stepped up as the probability of winning a jackpot lottery or the degree of expectation is higher, it is possible to give the player a completely different recognition of the game situation. it can. Even when the player recognizes the image D1 or the image D3 displayed on the display surface 41a, the player recognizes that the game situation is different depending on whether the image E is displayed. Therefore, the player's attention to the image displayed on the display surface 41a can be improved. Although the above effects have been described by taking the relationship between the image D1 and the image D3 as an example, the effects are also exerted between the images D1 and D2 and between the images D2 and D3.

H17. Modification 17:
In the above-described embodiment, when the transition condition is satisfied, the sound output mode is reduced with the passage of time while the background music output is continued while the background music output is continued. Although the configuration is such that the transition is made to a certain mode, instead of this, when the transition condition is satisfied, the mode for reducing the volume of the background music over time while the output of the background music is continued while the output of the background music is continued. A configuration in which the volume of the background music is shifted to zero without passing through may be adopted.

  In the above embodiment, when the transition condition is satisfied, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is shifted to a mode in which the demonstration moving image is displayed 5 seconds after the volume of the background music becomes zero. However, instead of this, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 may be shifted to a mode in which the demonstration moving image is displayed at the timing when the volume of the background music becomes zero.

  In the above embodiment, the output of the background music is continued until 5 seconds elapse after the volume of the background music becomes zero, and the output of the background music is stopped after the elapse of 5 seconds. Alternatively, the output of the background music may be stopped at the timing when the volume of the background music becomes zero.

H18. Modification 18:
In the above embodiment, after the volume of the background music becomes zero, and when the return condition is satisfied after the display of the demonstration moving image is started (FIG. 11), the temporal leading of the background moving image is set. Although the display is started from the position "01" and the output is started from the temporal start position "01" of the background music, the display and the output of the background moving image and the background music are started from the temporal start position. The configuration is not limited. For example, the configuration may be such that the display and output of the background moving image and the background music are started from a predetermined temporal position (the so-called rust start position) where the climax occurs. That is, the display is started from a predetermined time position of the background moving image, and the output is performed from the predetermined time position of the background music and the time position corresponding to the predetermined time position of the background moving image. What is necessary is just to make it the structure started. Even with such a configuration, the display of the background moving image and the output of the background music can be easily synchronized, as compared with a configuration in which the temporal position at which the display of the background moving image is started according to the timing at which the return condition is satisfied. be able to. As a result, the quality of the game effect can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

H19. Modification 19:
In the above embodiment, the volume of the background music is set to zero when the transition condition is satisfied. However, the configuration may not be such that the volume of the background music is completely zero. For example, the configuration may be such that, when the transition condition is satisfied, the volume of the background music is set to be lower than the volume that cannot be recognized by the player. Even with such a configuration, the player can be made aware that the transition condition has been satisfied.

  Further, the output mode of the sound before the transition condition is satisfied is set as a mode in which the background music is output at the first volume, and the output mode of the sound shifted after the shift condition is satisfied is defined as the first mode. A mode may be adopted in which the sound is output at a second loudness smaller than the loudness. Even with such a configuration, the player can be made aware that the transition condition has been satisfied.

H20. Modification 20:
In the above embodiment, when the transition condition is satisfied, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is shifted from the mode of displaying the background moving image to the mode of displaying the demonstration moving image, but before the transition condition is satisfied. The display mode of the symbol display device 41 and the display mode of the symbol display device 41 which shifts after the shift condition is satisfied are not limited to the mode of displaying the background moving image and the mode of displaying the demonstration moving image. For example, when the display mode of the symbol display device 41 before the transition condition is satisfied is a mode in which a predetermined moving image is displayed, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 to which transition is performed after the transition condition is satisfied is the following. A mode in which an image different from the predetermined moving image is displayed or a mode in which image display is stopped may be employed. For example, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 which shifts after the shift condition is satisfied includes a mode in which a moving image different from the predetermined moving image is displayed, a mode in which at least a part of the predetermined moving image is stopped and displayed, and a mode in which the predetermined moving image is displayed. May be a mode in which the moving image is not displayed, a mode in which a still image different from the predetermined moving image is displayed, or a mode in which the moving image and the still image are not displayed.

H21. Modification 21:
In the above embodiment, a detection sensor for detecting that a game ball has been ejected to the game board 30 is provided, and if the detection sensor does not detect the game ball for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), it is determined that the transition condition is satisfied. The configuration may be such that In this case, the transition condition is not satisfied if the game ball is ejected to the game board 30, so that the transition condition is satisfied even though the player is playing the game, which is an unpleasant situation for the player. Can be reduced.

  Further, a configuration may be adopted in which, after the transition condition is satisfied and a game ball is detected by the detection sensor, the return condition is determined to be satisfied. By doing so, even after the transition condition is satisfied, the return condition is satisfied if the game ball is ejected to the game board 30, so that the return condition is satisfied even though the player has started the game. Is not satisfied for a long time (for example, one minute), which makes the player uncomfortable.

H22. Modification 22:
In the above embodiment, the configuration may be such that a background moving image and background music corresponding to the background moving image are selected from a plurality of types. In this case, the background moving image and the background music corresponding to the background moving image may be selected based on whether the lottery mode is the high probability mode, selection of the player, or the like.

H23. Modification 23:
The time, numerical value, and the like specifically set in the above-described embodiment are merely examples, and can be appropriately set to other time, numerical value, and the like. For example, the time from when the pattern change stops until the transition condition is satisfied may be set to other than 15 seconds, and the time from when the volume of the background music becomes zero to when the demonstration movie starts is It may be set to other than 5 seconds.

H24. Modification 24:
In the above embodiment, when the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is a mode in which a demonstration moving image is displayed, the audio output mode is configured such that no music is output and the volume is zero. Alternatively, when the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is a mode in which a demo movie is displayed, the output mode of the sound is a demo music corresponding to the demo movie in an output level preset by the player. (Volume) may be output.

  In such a configuration, when the display period of the RTC effect moving image ends and the mode shifts to the mode of displaying the demonstration moving image, the output of the demonstration music may be started from a predetermined time position. With this configuration, it is possible to easily synchronize the display of the demonstration moving image with the output of the demonstration music, as compared with a configuration in which the time position at which the output of the demonstration music starts varies. As a result, the quality of the game effect can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved. Alternatively, a predetermined time position of the demonstration music may be set as the time head position of the demonstration music. According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce a sense of discomfort given to the player, as compared with a configuration in which the output of the demo music is started from a temporally intermediate position.

H25. Modification 25:
In the seventh embodiment, the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 acquires time information, which is information about time, from the RTC 96, and the acquired time information matches a predetermined time set as an RTC effect start condition. It is configured such that the process for executing the RTC effect is started when it is determined whether or not they match, but instead the audio light emission control device 90 executes the RTC effect once. The elapsed time from the start of the previous RTC effect is measured, and it is determined whether a predetermined time (for example, one hour) has elapsed since the start of the previous RTC effect, and it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed. In such a case, the configuration for starting the process for executing the RTC effect may be adopted.

H26. Modification 26:
In the seventh embodiment, the sound emission control device 90 is configured to output the RTC effect music at an output level (volume) preset by the player, but instead, the sound emission control device 90 Regardless of the output level (volume) preset by the user, the configuration may be such that the RTC effect music is output at the maximum output level (volume). According to such a configuration, the power and attention of the RTC effect can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

H27. Modification 27:
In addition to adopting the configuration of Modification Example 26, when the output of the RTC effect music at the maximum output level (volume) is completed and the background music is output, the maximum output level (volume) may be maintained. Good. The effect of such a configuration will be described. The player who has watched the RTC performance music output at the maximum output level (volume) is fascinated by the power of the performance performed at the maximum output level (volume), so that even after the RTC performance ends, There is a demand that the player wants to continue the game at the output level (volume) of. Therefore, according to such a configuration, it is possible to satisfy the player's desire to continue the game at the maximum output level (volume) even after the end of the RTC effect.

  In addition, after the output of the RTC effect music at the maximum output level (volume) is completed and background music is output after adopting the configuration of Modification Example 26, the output level (volume) preset by the player is set. ). According to such a configuration, the special feeling of the executed RTC effect can be further emphasized, so that the sense of expectation for the next RTC effect can be further improved, and the interest of the game can be improved. it can.

  In addition, after adopting the configuration of Modification 26, when the output of the RTC effect music at the maximum output level (volume) ends and the background music is output, the player sets the output level (volume) of the voice to the player. The volume setting screen for setting may be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the background music may be output at the output level (volume) of the voice specified by the player. The effect of such a configuration will be described. Since the player who has watched the RTC effect music output at the maximum output level (volume) gets used to the loud volume, the output level (volume) desired before watching the RTC effect music may change. For this reason, after the end of the RTC effect, there may be a request to reset the audio output level (volume) to a desired output level. Therefore, according to such a configuration, it is possible to satisfy a player's desire to reset the audio output level (volume) to a desired output level at a timing after the end of the RTC effect.

H27. Modification 27:
Other types of pachinko machines different from the above-described embodiments, such as a pachinko machine in which a special action device opens a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific region of a special device or a game ball enters a specific region of a special device. The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that wins a jackpot when a right is generated, a game machine such as a pachinko machine equipped with another accessory, an arrangement ball machine, and a sparrow ball.

  In addition, a game machine that is not a ball-and-ball type, for example, includes a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of symbols are provided in a circumferential direction, starts rotation of the reels by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and operates a stop switch. If a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols has been established on the activated line visible from the display window after the reel has stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed, a bonus such as payout of medals is given to the player. The present invention can be applied to a slot machine.

  Further, the gaming machine main body supported to be openable and closable on the outer frame includes a storage unit and a capture device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are captured by the capture device. Accordingly, the present invention can be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, in which the rotation of a reel is started.

  Further, in the above embodiment, some of the functions realized by software may be realized by hardware, or some of the functions realized by hardware may be realized by software.

I. Regarding the inventions extracted from the above embodiments, etc .:
Hereinafter, features of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configuration in each of the above embodiments is appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic A group>
The feature A group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof.
[Feature A1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition,
Determining means for determining whether the obtained special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
Notifying means for sequentially notifying the result of the determination by the determining means as to whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition for each game,
Effect execution means for executing an effect,
A gaming machine comprising:
The effect executing means (MPU 62, MPU 92 and MPU 102 in the first to fourth embodiments)
When the special information relating to the second game time executed after the first game time satisfies the predetermined condition,
In the second game round, at least a part of the effect performed in the first game round is reproduced (the process of the case a2 in the first embodiment, the process of the second embodiment, the case of the third embodiment). The processing of c2 and the processing of case d1 in the fourth embodiment are executed)
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the feature A1, at least a part of the effect performed in the first game time in the second game time, even though the special information related to the second game time satisfies a predetermined condition. Is reproduced, it is difficult for the player to expect that the special information relating to the second game time satisfies a predetermined condition. After that, the result of the determination of the special information related to the second game time is notified by the notifying means, and the game is made to be recognized by the player that the special information related to the second game time satisfies a predetermined condition. Can be provided with unexpectedness. That is, by setting the second game round to an unexpected development of the player, the player can be surprised and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature A2]
The gaming machine according to Feature A1, further comprising:
When the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, after a game cycle according to the special information that satisfies the predetermined condition, a special game state start unit that starts a special game state in which a bonus is provided to the player,
The effect executing means,
In the first case, wherein the special information related to the first game time satisfies the predetermined condition, and the special information related to the second game time does not satisfy the predetermined condition,
After the start of the special game state executed after the first game round, and before the start of the second game round, at least a part of the effect performed in the first game round is reproduced. (Execute the process of case a1 in the first embodiment and the process of case c1 in the third embodiment)
In the second case, wherein the special information related to the first game time satisfies the predetermined condition, and the special information related to the second game time satisfies the predetermined condition,
In the second game round, at least a part of the effect performed in the first game round is reproduced (the process of the case a2 in the first embodiment, the process of the second embodiment, the case of the third embodiment). Execute the process of c2)
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the feature A2, when the special information related to the second game time does not satisfy the predetermined condition, at least a part of the effect performed in the first game time is reproduced by the effect already performed. It functions as a role to reproduce, and the player recognizes it as such. On the other hand, when the special information related to the second game time satisfies a predetermined condition, at least a part of the effect performed in the first game time is reproduced in the effect. In practice, this is executed when the special information relating to the second game round satisfies a predetermined condition. Therefore, after the reproduction is executed in the second game round, when the notification means notifies that the special information relating to the second game round satisfies the predetermined condition, the second information is firstly obtained at that time. The reproduction performed in the game time does not simply reproduce at least a part of the effect performed in the first game time, but is caused by the special information related to the second game time satisfying a predetermined condition. The player recognizes that the game has been executed. Therefore, it is possible to give unexpectedness to the game and to give the player a sense of expectation for the reproduction of the effect already executed.

[Feature A3]
The gaming machine according to Feature A1 or Feature A2,
The effect executing means,
In a case where at least a part of the effect performed in the first game time is reproduced, a suggestive effect (first embodiment) indicating that the effect already performed is reproduced before performing the reproduction. To the fourth embodiment.

  According to the feature A3, since the suggestion effect is performed before at least a part of the effect performed in the first game time is reproduced, the effect performed in the second game time is changed to the first game time. The player can be strongly recognized as reproducing at least a part of the effect performed in the round. After that, a notification result of the special information related to the second game time is notified by the notifying unit, and then the player is made aware that the special information related to the second game time satisfies a predetermined condition. Further, the game can be provided with unexpectedness.

[Feature A4]
The gaming machine according to Feature A3,
The effect executing means,
When another game time exists between the first game time and the second game time,
In the other game times, the suggestion effect is executed (in the second embodiment, the suggestion effect is executed in the preceding game time).
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the feature A4, even when there is another game time between the first game time and the second game time, the suggestion effect is performed by executing the suggestion effect in the other game time. The reproduction can be performed without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

[Feature A5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4,
The target to be reproduced by the effect performing means includes at least a part of the effect performed in the game time before the first game time, and at least one of the effects performed in the first game time. (The processing of the case c1 and the processing of the case c2 in the third embodiment are executed)
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the feature A5, even when a continuous effect is executed from the game time before the first game time to the first game time, the continuous effect can be reproduced. .

[Feature A6]
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A5,
The predetermined condition is a condition for starting a special game state in which a privilege is given to a player,
The game machine, wherein the target to be reproduced by the effect execution means includes a reach effect that is an effect that suggests to the player the degree of expectation that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition.

  According to the feature A6, when the special information related to the second game time satisfies a predetermined condition, the reach effect executed after the suggestion effect is the effect of the effect executed in the first game time. Although it is executed as at least a part of reproduction, it is actually executed when the special information related to the second game time satisfies a predetermined condition. Therefore, the reach effect is executed as a case where the effect is performed as an essential function of suggesting a degree of expectation that a predetermined condition is satisfied to the player, and at least an effect executed in the first game time. When performed as a part of the reproduction and when the effect is performed as at least a part of the effect of the effect performed in the first game time, in actuality, the special information related to the game time is a predetermined value. At least three cases can be set, that is, the case where the execution is performed due to the satisfaction of the condition. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's attention degree, interest degree, and expectation for the reach effect.

<Characteristic B group>
The feature B group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof.
[Feature B1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition,
Determining means for determining whether the obtained special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
Notifying means for sequentially notifying the result of the determination by the determining means as to whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition for each game,
Effect execution means for executing an effect,
A gaming machine comprising:
The effect executing means,
A game time (first to third embodiment) executed after a specific game time (first game time in the first to third embodiments) in which the special information is a game time satisfying a predetermined condition. A timing for reproducing at least a part of the effect performed in the specific game round, based on the special information pertaining to the second game round in (2).

  According to the feature B1, the timing at which at least a part of the effect performed in the specific game time is reproduced is determined based on the special information related to the game time executed after the specific game time. Meaning can be given, the degree of attention of the player to the reproduction can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature B2]
The gaming machine according to Feature B1, wherein:
The effect executing means,
Before the determination unit, it is determined whether or not the special information relating to the game times executed after the specific game time which is a game time whose special information satisfies the predetermined condition satisfies the predetermined condition (step S1022). And
A timing for reproducing at least a part of the effect performed in the specific game round is determined based on a result of the determination performed before the determination unit (performs the processing of steps S2302 to S2312).
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the feature B2, by performing the determination as to whether or not the special information relating to the game times executed after the specific game time satisfies a predetermined condition, before the determination unit, the effect of the effect performed in the specific game time is performed. The effect in the game time executed before the game time determined to reproduce at least a part can be determined in consideration of the game time in which the reproduction is executed. Therefore, for example, an effect related to the reproduction can be executed as an effect in the game time executed before the game time determined to execute the reproduction.

[Feature B3]
The gaming machine according to Feature B1 or Feature B2,
The effect executing means,
Among the game times executed after the specific game time, the game information in which the special information satisfies the predetermined condition (the case a2 in the first embodiment, the second case c2 in the second embodiment and the case c2 in the third embodiment) Gaming machine), at least a part of the effect performed in the specific game cycle is determined to be reproduced.

  According to the feature B3, at least a part of the effect performed in the specific game time is reproduced in the game time in which the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, so that at least a part of the effect performed in the specific game time is reproduced. It is difficult for the player to expect that the special information pertaining to the game time fulfills a predetermined condition. Only by notifying the result of the determination of the special information related to the game time by the notification means, by giving the player that the special information related to the game time satisfies a predetermined condition, unexpectedness is given to the game. be able to. In other words, by making the game times unpredictable by the player, the player can be surprised and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature B4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B3,
The effect executing means,
A gaming machine characterized by executing a suggestion effect indicating that an effect already executed is reproduced before reproducing at least a part of the effect executed in the specific game time.

  According to the feature B4, since the suggestion effect that suggests that the effect that has already been executed is reproduced is performed, the attention level and the interest level of the player are determined for at least a part of the reproduction of the effect performed in the specific game time. Can be improved. In addition, when at least a part of the effect performed in the specific game time is executed in the game time in which the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, the suggestion effect is executed to further execute the reproduction time. Can be made difficult for a player to expect that the special information according to the above satisfies a predetermined condition.

[Feature B5]
The gaming machine according to Feature B4,
The effect executing means,
When there is another game time between the specific game time and the game time reproducing at least a part of the effect performed in the specific game time,
In the other game times, the suggestion effect is executed (in the second embodiment, the suggestion effect is executed in the preceding game time).
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the feature B5, even if there is another game time between the specific game time and the game time reproducing at least a part of the effect performed in the specific game time, the suggestion is made in another game time. By executing the effect, it is possible to execute at least a part of the suggestion effect and the effect executed in the specific game time without giving a sense of incongruity to the player.

[Feature B6]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B5,
In the case where the effect execution means reproduces at least a part of the effect executed in the specific game time,
The target to be reproduced by the effect execution means is an effect executed in the specific game time, and includes a reach effect that is an effect indicating to the player the degree of expectation that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the feature B6, the reach effect that was executed as at least a part of the effect performed in the specific game time on the effect was actually performed based on the special information related to the game time. Is made to be recognized by the player, thereby giving the game an unexpectedness. In addition, when the reach effect is executed, the effect is performed as an essential function of suggesting a degree of expectation that a predetermined condition is satisfied to the player, and at least a part of the effect performed in the specific game time is performed. When performed as a reproduction, and on the production, it is performed as reproduction of at least a part of the production performed in the specific game time, but in actuality, it is determined that the special information related to the game time satisfies a predetermined condition. At least three cases can be set: the case where the execution is performed due to the reason. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's attention degree, interest degree, and expectation for the reach effect.

<Characteristic C group>
The feature C group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof.
[Feature C1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition,
Determining means for determining whether the obtained special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
Notifying means for sequentially notifying the result of the determination by the determining means as to whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition for each game,
When the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, a special game state starting means for starting a special game state in which a bonus is provided to the player,
Effect execution means for executing an effect,
A gaming machine comprising:
The effect executing means,
When the special game state is executed, an effect to be executed in the special game state is determined based on the special information related to a predetermined game run executed after the special game state (first embodiment) In the case a1 and the case a2 in the second embodiment, and in the case c1 and the case c2 in the third embodiment, the effect in the special game state after the first game round is determined by the success or failure of the jackpot lottery in the second game round. Determine / S1201 to S1209, S2601 to S2609)
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the feature C1, it is possible to execute an effect in consideration of the special information relating to a predetermined game run executed after the special game state in the special game state. Therefore, for example, in the special game state, it is possible to execute an effect related to the effect to be executed in the predetermined game round, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature C2]
The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein:
The effect executing means,
When the special game state is executed and the special information related to the predetermined game times does not satisfy the predetermined condition, a predetermined effect is executed in the special game state. (In the case a1 in the first embodiment and the case c1 in the third embodiment, the reproduction effect is executed in the special game state after the first game round),
In the case where the special game state is executed, and in the second case where the special information related to the predetermined game time satisfies the predetermined condition, the predetermined effect is performed in the predetermined game time. Execute (in case a2 in the first embodiment, in case c2 in the second embodiment, and in case c2 in the third embodiment, the reproduction effect is executed in the second game round)
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the feature C2, when the special information related to the predetermined game time does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the special effect related to the predetermined game time satisfies the predetermined effect executed in the special game state. In this case, by executing the game at the predetermined game time, it is possible to make the player recognize that the timing at which the predetermined effect is executed has a special meaning. Therefore, it is possible to impart unexpectedness to the game and improve the interest of the game.

[Feature C3]
The gaming machine according to Feature C1 or Feature C2,
The gaming machine, wherein the predetermined effect is an effect that reproduces at least a part of an effect executed in a game round executed before the special game state.

  According to the feature C3, in spite of the fact that the special information related to the predetermined game time satisfies the predetermined condition, in the predetermined game time, at least the effect performed in the game time executed before the special game state. Since a part is reproduced, it is difficult for the player to expect that the special information relating to the predetermined game time satisfies the predetermined condition. Only when the result of the determination of the special information pertaining to the predetermined game time is notified by the notification means, by making the player recognize that the special information pertaining to the predetermined game time satisfies the predetermined condition, the unexpectedness of the game is improved. Can be granted. In other words, by making the predetermined game times unpredictable by the player, the player can be surprised and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature C4]
The gaming machine according to Feature C3,
When the game time executed before the special game state is defined as a first game time, and the predetermined game time executed after the special game state is defined as a second game time,
The target to be reproduced by the effect execution means includes an effect executed by the effect execution means in the first game time when the special information relating to the first game time satisfies the predetermined condition (reproduction) In the target effect, in the case a1 and the case a2 of the first embodiment, and in the case c1 and the case c2 of the second embodiment and the third embodiment, the first effect is obtained by winning the jackpot lottery relating to the first game round. (Including the performance performed in the game round)
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the feature C4, when the special information related to the second game time satisfies the predetermined condition, the special information related to the first game time is executed in the first game time by satisfying the predetermined condition. The effect is reproduced in the second game round. Therefore, the production is not performed until the special information relating to the second game time satisfies the predetermined condition by the notification means, and then the performance is performed as a reproduction of the performance performed in the first game time. However, in practice, it is possible to make the player recognize that the special information relating to the second game round has been executed due to satisfying the predetermined condition, and to give the game an unexpectedness. In addition, it is possible to improve the degree of attention, interest, and expectation of the player for reproduction.

[Feature C5]
The gaming machine according to feature C3 or feature C4,
The game machine, wherein the target to be reproduced by the effect execution means includes a reach effect that is an effect that suggests to the player the degree of expectation that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition.

  According to the feature C5, when the special information relating to the predetermined game time (second game time) satisfies the predetermined condition, in the game time (first game time) executed before the special game state. The executed reach effect is reproduced in the second game round. Therefore, in the second game time, the reach effect that was executed as a reproduction of at least a part of the effect executed in the game time executed before the special game state in the effect is actually the second effect. By causing the player to recognize that the special information relating to the game times has been executed as a result of satisfying the predetermined condition, it is possible to provide the game with unexpectedness. Further, the reach effect is executed as a case where the reach function is executed as an original function of suggesting a degree of expectation that a predetermined condition is satisfied to the player, and a game time executed before the special game state. In the case where it is executed as at least a part of the effect of the effect performed at the time, and on the effect, it is executed as at least a part of the effect of the effect executed in the game time executed before the special game state, Can be set to at least three cases, namely, a case where the special information relating to the game time is executed due to satisfying a predetermined condition. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's attention degree, interest degree, and expectation for the reach effect.

[Feature C6]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features C2 to C5,
The effect executing means,
A gaming machine that executes a suggestion effect indicating that the predetermined effect is to be executed before executing the predetermined effect.

  According to the feature C6, by executing a suggestion effect that suggests that the predetermined effect is to be executed before executing the predetermined effect, the player's attention to the predetermined effect to be executed, The degree of interest can be improved.

[Feature C7]
The gaming machine according to Feature C6,
The effect executing means,
In the case where the special game state is executed, the special information related to the predetermined game times, while satisfying the predetermined condition,
When there is another game time between the special game state and the predetermined game time,
The suggestion effect is executed in the other game time (in the second embodiment, the suggestion effect is executed in the preceding game time),
The predetermined effect is executed at the predetermined game time (in the second embodiment, the game time reproduction effect is executed at the second game time).
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the feature C7, even when there is another game time between the special game state and the predetermined game time, the suggestion effect is executed in the other game time, so that the suggestion effect and the predetermined game time are performed. The effect can be executed without giving the player an uncomfortable feeling.

[Feature C8]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features C3 to C7,
A game machine wherein the effect performed by the effect executing means is at least a part of an effect executed in at least two consecutive game times executed before the special game state.

  According to the feature C8, even when a continuous effect is performed over at least two consecutive game times executed before the special game state, the continuous effect can be reproduced. it can.

<Feature D group>
The feature D group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof.
[Feature D1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition,
Determining means for determining whether the obtained special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
Notifying means for sequentially notifying the result of the determination by the determining means as to whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition for each game,
When the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, a special game state starting means for starting a special game state in which a bonus is provided to the player,
Effect execution means for executing an effect,
A gaming machine comprising:
The special game state start means,
The second special game state is started when the special information related to the second game time executed after the first game time satisfies the predetermined condition,
The effect executing means,
The effect to be executed in the second special game state is determined based on the special information related to the first game time (in the first embodiment, the effect to be executed in the special game state is the first effect of case a1). By the relationship between the game time executed before the game time [corresponding to the first game time in the feature group] and the first game time of the case a1 [corresponding to the second game time in the feature group] , Determined to be an effect to be executed in the special game state after the first game round [corresponding to the second game round in the feature group] [S2601, S2602, S2603 to S2605] / first game round in case a2 The second game time [corresponding to the first game time in the feature group] and the second game time [corresponding to the second game time in the feature group] of the case a2 correspond to the second game time [ Play of 2 Determining the effect to be executed in the special game state after Action] in time [S2601, S2607])
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the feature D1, the second special executed after the second game round is considered in consideration of the special information of the first game round executed before the second game round where the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. An effect in a gaming state can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide a relationship between the special information related to the first game time and the effect in the second special game state, and various effects are provided from the first game time to the second special game state. Can be executed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature D2]
The gaming machine according to Feature D1, wherein
In the case where the second special game state is executed when the special information related to the second game time satisfies the predetermined condition,
The effect executing means,
When the special information related to the first game time satisfies the predetermined condition (when the relationship between the first game time and the second game time in case a2 of the first embodiment) is satisfied,
In the second game time (the second game time of the case a2 of the first embodiment), the effect of the effect executed in the first game time (the first game time of the case a2 of the first embodiment) At least a part is reproduced (the processing of S2308 and S2309 is executed),
When the special information related to the first game time does not satisfy the predetermined condition (the game time executed before the first game time and the first game time in the case a1 of the first embodiment) ),
In the second special game state (the special game state after the first game round of the case a1 of the first embodiment), in the second game round (the first game round of the case a1 of the first embodiment) Reproduce at least a part of the executed effect (execute the process of S2605)
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the feature D2, at least a part of the effect performed in the first game time is reproduced in the second game time, even though the special information related to the second game time satisfies a predetermined condition. . Therefore, it is difficult for the player to expect that the special information relating to the second game time satisfies the predetermined condition. Only when the result of the determination of the special information pertaining to the second game time is notified by the notification means, the player is made aware that the special information pertaining to the second game time satisfies a predetermined condition. Properties can be imparted. That is, by setting the second game round to an unexpected development of the player, the player can be surprised and the interest of the game can be improved. Further, when the special information related to the first game time does not satisfy the predetermined condition, at least a part of the effect performed in the second game time is reproduced in the second special game state. The player's desire to appreciate the effect performed when the special information related to the game times satisfies a predetermined condition can be satisfied.

[Feature D3]
The gaming machine according to Feature D2,
The effect executing means,
In the case where at least a part of the effect performed in the first game time is reproduced in the second game time (the time between the first game time and the second game time in case a2 of the first embodiment) In the case where there is a relationship), before performing the reproduction, a first suggestion effect indicating that the effect that has already been executed is reproduced is executed (the process of S2606 is executed), and
In a case where at least a part of the effect performed in the second game time is reproduced in the second special game state, (the game time executed before the first game time in case a1 of the first embodiment) And the first game time), a second suggestion effect indicating that the effect that has already been performed is to be reproduced is performed before the reproduction (the process of S2605 is performed). )
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the feature D3, the first suggestion effect is performed before reproducing at least a part of the effect performed in the first game time, and at least a part of the effect performed in the second game time is reproduced. Since the second suggestion effect is performed before performing the second suggestion effect, at least part of the effect performed in the first game time or at least part of the effect performed in the second game time is reproduced. Attention and interest of the player can be improved.

[Feature D4]
The gaming machine according to Feature D2 or D3,
The effect executing means,
In the case where at least a part of the effect performed in the first game time is reproduced in the second game time (the time between the first game time and the second game time in case a2 of the first embodiment) Relationship),
In the first special game state in which the special information relating to the first game round is started by satisfying the predetermined condition, a first suggestion effect indicating that the effect already executed is reproduced is executed (S2606). Execute the process)
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the feature D4, in the first special game state, by performing the effect indicating the content of the effect in the game times after the first special game state, the game times after the first special game state ends are executed. It is possible to improve the degree of attention, interest, and sense of expectation of the player.

[Feature D5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features D2 to D4,
The game machine, wherein the target to be reproduced by the effect execution means includes a reach effect that is an effect that suggests to the player the degree of expectation that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition.

  According to the feature D5, the reach effect that was executed as at least part of the effect performed in the first game time on the effect is actually caused by the special information related to the second game time. By causing the player to recognize that the game has been executed, unexpectedness can be given to the game. Further, when at least a part of the effect performed in the second game time is reproduced, the reach effect in the second game time is executed in the second special game state. It is possible to satisfy the player's desire to appreciate the reach effect in the game times again. Further, as a case where a reach effect is executed, a case where the effect is performed as an essential function of suggesting a degree of expectation that a predetermined condition is satisfied to the player, and a case where at least a part of the effect already performed is reproduced. When executed, the effect is performed as a reproduction of at least a part of the effect that has already been performed, but is actually performed due to the fact that the special information related to the game time satisfies a predetermined condition. At least three cases can be set. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's attention degree, interest degree, and expectation for the reach effect.

<Feature E group>
The feature E group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof.
[Feature E1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition,
Determining means for determining whether the obtained special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
Notifying means for sequentially notifying the result of the determination by the determining means as to whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition for each game,
Effect execution means for executing an effect in each of the game times,
A gaming machine comprising:
The effect executing means,
When the special information related to the first game time does not satisfy the predetermined condition, and the special information related to the second game time executed after the first game time satisfies the predetermined condition. (Case d1 in the fourth embodiment)
In the second game time, at least a part of the effect performed in the first game time is reproduced,
Already executed after the execution of the effect in the first game time and before reproducing at least a part of the effect executed in the first game time in the second game time A gaming machine characterized by executing a suggestion effect that suggests that the effect be reproduced.

  According to the feature E1, although the special information related to the second game time satisfies the predetermined condition, the first game time where the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition in the second game time. Since at least a part of the effect performed in is reproduced, it is difficult for the player to expect that the special information relating to the second game time satisfies a predetermined condition. Also, by executing the suggestion effect before reproducing at least a part of the effect performed in the first game time, in the second game time, at least the effect performed in the first game time Recognition that only a part is reproduced can be further given to the player. Only when the result of the determination of the special information related to the second game time is notified by the notifying means, the game is made to recognize that the special information related to the second game time satisfies a predetermined condition. Can be provided with unexpectedness. That is, by setting the second game round to an unexpected development of the player, the player can be surprised and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature E2]
The gaming machine according to feature E1, wherein:
The effect executing means,
In addition to the case where the special information related to the first game time does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the special information related to the second game time satisfies the predetermined condition,
When the special information related to the first game time does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the special information related to the second game time does not satisfy the predetermined condition (case d2 in the fourth embodiment) )Also,
In the second game time, at least a part of the effect performed in the first game time is reproduced,
After the execution of the effect in the first game time, and before the reproduction in the second game time, a suggestion effect indicating that the effect already performed is reproduced is executed. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature E2, even when the special information related to the first game time does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the special information related to the second game time does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the second game time includes Since at least a part of the effect performed in one game time is reproduced, it is possible to give to the player a recognition that the special information related to the game time in which the reproduction has been performed does not always satisfy the predetermined condition. . As a result, when at least a part of the effect performed in the first game round is reproduced, the emotional inflection and expectation are given to the player, and the player's response to the game round in which the reproduction is performed is performed. Attention can be improved.

[Feature E3]
The gaming machine according to feature E1 or feature E2, further comprising:
When the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, a special game state starting means for starting a special game state in which a bonus is given to the player,
The effect executing means,
When the special information related to the first game time satisfies the predetermined condition and the special information related to the second game time satisfies the predetermined condition (case a2 in the first embodiment) In
In the second game time, at least a part of the effect performed in the first game time is reproduced,
The gaming machine, wherein the suggestion effect is executed after the start of the special game state executed after the first game round and before the reproduction in the second game round.

  According to the feature E3, when the special information related to the second game time satisfies a predetermined condition, the special information related to the first game time satisfies the predetermined condition, and the special information is executed in the first game time. The effect is reproduced in the second game round. Therefore, it is not until the special information relating to the second game time satisfies the predetermined condition by the notifying means that the effect is performed as a reproduction of the effect performed in the first game time. However, in practice, it is possible to add unexpectedness to a game by causing the player to recognize that the special information related to the second game time has been executed due to satisfying a predetermined condition. it can. In addition, it is possible to improve the degree of attention, interest, and expectation of the player with respect to the reproduction of the effect. Further, if at least a part of the effect performed in the first game round is executed because the special information related to the second game round satisfies a predetermined condition, a bonus is given to the player. Is started, the expectation of the player for the reproduction of the effect can be further improved.

[Feature E4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features E1 to E3,
The predetermined condition is a condition for starting a special game state in which a privilege is given to a player,
The game machine, wherein the target to be reproduced by the effect execution means includes a reach effect that is an effect that suggests to the player the degree of expectation that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition.

  According to the feature E4, when the special information related to the second game time satisfies a predetermined condition, the reach effect executed in the first game time is reproduced in the second game time. Therefore, the reach effect, which was executed as at least a part of the effect performed in the first game round on the stage of the performance, is actually the special information related to the second game round satisfying the predetermined condition. By causing the player to recognize that the game has been executed, unexpectedness can be given to the game. In addition, the reach effect is executed as an intrinsic function of suggesting a degree of expectation that a predetermined condition is satisfied to the player, and at least one of the effect executed in the first game round. When performed as reproduction of a part, the effect is performed as reproduction of at least a part of the effect performed in the first game round, but in actuality, the special information related to the game round meets a predetermined condition. At least three cases can be set, that is, the case where the execution is performed due to the satisfaction. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's attention degree, interest degree, and expectation for the reach effect.

[Feature E5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4,
The effect executing means,
When another game time exists between the first game time and the second game time,
A gaming machine, wherein the suggestion effect is executed in the other game times.

  According to the feature E5, even when there is another game time between the first game time and the second game time, the suggestion effect is performed in another game time, thereby providing the suggestion effect and Reproduction can be performed without giving a sense of incongruity to the player.

[Feature E6]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features E1 to E5,
The target to be reproduced by the effect execution means includes at least a part of an effect performed in a game time before the first game time, and at least a part of an effect performed in the first game time. A gaming machine characterized by including:

  According to the feature E6, even when a continuous effect is executed from the game time before the first game time to the first game time, the continuous effect can be reproduced. .

  In addition, the inventions of the feature A group, the feature B group, the feature C group, the feature D group, and the feature E group solve the following problems.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine, various effects are performed according to various gaming states for the purpose of improving the interest of the game. These effects include effects that are executed at a low frequency, such as a reach effect that is executed with a low probability and an effect that is executed only when a jackpot lottery is won. The effect performed at such a low frequency may be desired to be reproduced by a player after being executed once, for the purpose of appreciation. Conventionally, in order to respond to such a demand of a player, a gaming machine that executes an effect that reproduces an effect once executed has been known.

  Here, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, further technical improvement is desired for the purpose of enhancing the interest of the game.

<Characteristic F group>
The feature F group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof.
[Feature F1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition,
Determining means for determining whether the obtained special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
Notifying means for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means as to whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition for each game,
Image display means for displaying an image as an effect,
Control means for controlling the image display means,
A gaming machine comprising:
The control means includes:
A first image that suggests the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the game to the player, and a second image that is different from the first image while suggesting the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the game to the player Are displayed on the image display means (objects A, B, and C in the fifth and sixth embodiments are displayed on the display surface 41a),
There are cases where the first image is displayed during a period overlapping with the second image, and cases where the first image is displayed during a period not overlapping with the second image,
When the first image is displayed during a period overlapping with the second image, the first image is displayed on the image display means in a manner having relevance to the second image (in S3205 of the fifth embodiment, Setting and displaying each object so as to be displayed in a related manner by referring to the arrangement / timing table / Displaying each object in a related manner in S3305 of the sixth embodiment Display each object based on each display pattern table set to be performed)
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  There is a gaming machine that displays an image on an image display means and performs an effect indicating to a player the degree of advantage or disadvantage of a game. Usually, a plurality of such images are prepared, and each image indicates the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the game. In addition, these images have different display conditions. In such a gaming machine, the conditions for displaying a plurality of images may overlap depending on the state of the game, and in such a case, the relevance to other images displayed during the overlapping period (the same period). Are taken into account, and a plurality of images are displayed according to each setting. As a result, a plurality of images may be displayed on the image display means without any relation or a number of images may be displayed in a superimposed manner, giving a player an impression that the effect is complicated.

  According to the feature F1, when the first image is displayed in a period overlapping with the second image, the first image is displayed in a mode having relevance to the second image. The effect performed by displaying the two images in the overlapping period (the same period) does not give a complicated impression to the player, and the quality of the effect can be improved. Further, the first image may be displayed in a period overlapping with the second image and may be displayed in a period not overlapping with the second image. Therefore, a plurality of different images are displayed using the first image. The effect of the aspect can be executed, and the first image can be effectively used.

[Feature F2]
The gaming machine according to Feature F1,
The gaming machine, wherein the related aspect includes an aspect in which the first image and the second image are related and have a story.

  According to the feature F2, when the first image is displayed in a period overlapping with the second image, the first image and the second image are displayed in a manner having a narrative property in association with each other. Therefore, the effect performed by the first image and the second image being displayed during the overlapping period (the same period) can be an effect that does not make the player feel uncomfortable. In addition, the effect performed when the first image and the second image are displayed during the overlapping period has a narrative, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature F3]
The gaming machine according to Feature F1 or Feature F2,
The degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game suggested by the first image when displayed in a period not overlapping with the second image is as follows:
When the first image and the second image are displayed during an overlapping period, the degree of the advantage / disadvantage of the game indicated by the first image and the second image is different (fifth embodiment) In S3203 / S3305 in the sixth embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the feature F3, the first image is displayed in a period overlapping the second image and the second image is displayed in a period not overlapping the second image. Since the suggestion is made, a plurality of effects in different modes can be executed using the first image, and the first image can be effectively used. Further, even when the first image is displayed, the degree of advantage / disadvantage differs depending on whether or not the first image is displayed during a period (the same period) overlapping with another image. , Interest, and expectations can be improved.

[Feature F4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features F1 to F3,
The first image and the second image indicate the degree of advantage / disadvantage of different types of the game (the process of S3203 in the fifth embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the feature F4, it is possible to suggest the degree of advantage / disadvantage of various types of games using the image.

[Feature F5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features F1 to F4,
The control means includes:
In a case where the first image is displayed during a period not overlapping with the second image, the first image is displayed on the image display means in a mode in which an image frame indicating an area of the first image is attached. Display,
When the first image is displayed during a period overlapping with the second image, the first image is displayed on the image display means without the image frame.

  According to the feature F5, the effect composed of the first image and the second image can be made an effect that does not make the player feel uncomfortable.

[Feature F6]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features F1 to F5,
A gaming machine, wherein at least one of the first image and the second image is an image that changes over time.

  According to the feature F6, various effects can be executed by using images that change over time.

<Characteristic G group>
The feature G group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof.
[Feature G1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition,
Determining means for determining whether the obtained special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
Notifying means for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means as to whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition for each game,
An expectation image storage means for storing an expectation image which is an image that changes over time;
Image display means for displaying the expectation degree image as an effect,
Control means for controlling the image display means,
A gaming machine comprising:
The expectation degree image storage means,
A first expectation image,
A second expectation image,
Remember
The control means includes:
Displaying the first expectation degree image on the image display means;
Displaying the second expected degree image on the image display means;
A first partial image from which an image forming at least a part of a time axis direction of the first expectation image is extracted; and a at least a part of a time axis direction of the second expectation image which constitutes the first expectation image. Displaying a third expectation image, which is the expectation image obtained by combining the second expected image extracted with the second partial image in an associated manner, on the image display means;
There is
Defining a probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition when the first expectation degree image is displayed by the control means as a first probability;
The probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition when the second expectation degree image is displayed by the control means is defined as a second probability,
When the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition when the third expectation degree image is displayed by the control means is defined as a third probability,
The control means may be configured such that the third probability is different from the first probability and different from the second probability.
The first expectation image, the second expectation image, or the third expectation image is displayed on the image display means (display using display pattern table in fifth embodiment / sixth embodiment) Display using the display pattern table in
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the feature G1, the first partial image and the second partial image have relevance in addition to the first expected image and the second expected image as the expected images displayed on the image display means. Since the third expectation image combined in the aspect is displayed on the image display means, it is possible to execute an effect that effectively utilizes the first expectation image and the second expectation image. Since the third expected degree image is an expected degree image in which the first partial image and the second partial image are combined in a related manner, the third expected degree image does not give a complicated impression to the player, and Quality can be improved. Further, the first expectation image, the second expectation image, or the third expectation image is displayed on the image display means so that the third probability is different from the first probability and different from the second probability. , The player's attention to the expectation image can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature G2]
The gaming machine according to Feature G1, wherein
The control means includes:
When extracting the first partial image from the first expectation image, by extracting images of different periods in the time axis direction of the first expectation image, the plurality of display modes are different. Displaying a third expectation image on the image display means;
The third probability differs for each of the plurality of different display modes of the third expectation degree image (display pattern table in the sixth embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the feature G2, when extracting the first partial image from the first expectation image, by extracting images of different periods in the time axis direction of the first expectation image, a plurality of different display modes can be obtained. Since the third expectation image can be displayed on the image display means in the mode, various effects can be executed using the third expectation image. In addition, since the third probability is different for each of a plurality of different display modes of the third expectation image, the player's attention to the third expectation image can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved. be able to.

[Feature G3]
The gaming machine according to Feature G1 or Feature G2,
The control means includes:
When extracting the first partial image from the first expectation image, by extracting images of different periods in the time axis direction of the first expectation image, the plurality of display modes are different. Displaying a third expectation image on the image display means;
The relative display position of the first partial image and the second partial image displayed on the image display means as the third expectation image is:
It is set in advance for each of the plurality of different display modes of the third expectation image (the arrangement position of each object is set in advance for each display pattern according to the display pattern table in the sixth embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the feature G3, the relative display positions of the first partial image and the second partial image displayed on the image display means as the third degree of expectation image are different from each other in the third degree of expectation image. Since it is set in advance for each display mode, the first partial image and the second partial image are not superimposed and displayed on the image display means without any relation as the third expected degree image. Therefore, each effect in which the third expectation degree image is used in a plurality of different display modes can improve the quality of the effect without giving a complicated impression to the player.

[Feature G4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features G1 to G3,
The control means includes:
When extracting the first partial image from the first expectation image, by extracting images of different periods in the time axis direction of the first expectation image, the plurality of display modes are different. Displaying a third expectation image on the image display means;
The relative display timing of the first partial image and the second partial image displayed on the image display means as the third expectation image is different from the plurality of different expectations of the third expectation image. The display timing is preset for each display mode (the display timing of each object is preset for each display pattern according to the display pattern table in the sixth embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the feature G4, the relative display timing of the first partial image and the second partial image displayed on the image display means as the third degree of expectation image is different from that of the third degree of expectation image. Since it is set in advance for each display mode, the first partial image and the second partial image are not displayed on the image display means at a timing having no relation as the third expected degree image. Therefore, each effect in which the third expectation degree image is used in a plurality of different display modes can improve the quality of the effect without giving a complicated impression to the player.

<Characteristic H group>
The feature H group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof.
[Feature H1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition,
Determining means for determining whether the obtained special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
Notifying means for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means as to whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition for each game,
Image display means for displaying an image as an effect,
Control means for controlling the image display means,
A gaming machine comprising:
The control means includes:
A first image that suggests the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the game to the player, and a second image that is different from the first image while suggesting the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the game to the player Is displayed on the image display means,
There are cases where the first image is displayed during a period overlapping with the second image, and cases where the first image is displayed during a period not overlapping with the second image,
When the first image is displayed during a period overlapping with the second image, a relative position between the first image and the second image is determined in advance (an arrangement position in the fifth embodiment). A game machine displaying an image on the image display means at an arrangement position determined by a timing table / an arrangement position set by a display pattern table in the sixth embodiment.

  There is a gaming machine that displays an image on an image display means and performs an effect indicating to a player the degree of advantage or disadvantage of a game. Usually, a plurality of such images are prepared, and each image indicates the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the game. In addition, these images have different display conditions. In such a gaming machine, the conditions for displaying a plurality of images may overlap depending on the state of the game, and in such a case, the relevance to other images displayed during the overlapping period (the same period). Are taken into account, and a plurality of images are displayed according to each setting. As a result, a plurality of images may be displayed on the image display means without any relation or a number of images may be displayed in a superimposed manner, giving a player an impression that the effect is complicated.

  According to the feature H1, when the first image is displayed during a period (the same period) that overlaps with the second image, the relative position between the first image and the second image is predetermined. Is displayed on the image display means, so that the first image and the second image are not superimposed and displayed without any relation. Therefore, the effect performed by displaying the first image and the second image during the overlapping period (the same period) does not give a complicated impression to the player, and improves the quality of the effect. Can be. Further, the first image may be displayed in a period overlapping with the second image and may be displayed in a period not overlapping with the second image. Therefore, a plurality of different images are displayed using the first image. The effect of the aspect can be executed, and the first image can be effectively used.

[Feature H2]
The gaming machine according to Feature H1, wherein
The control means includes:
In a plurality of different display modes, the first image is displayed on the image display means during a period overlapping with the second image,
According to each of the plurality of different display modes, the first image is placed at an arrangement position where the relative position between the first image and the second image is predetermined (in the display / pattern table in the sixth embodiment). A gaming machine displaying an image at the set display position) on the image display means.

  According to the feature H2, the first image is displayed in a plurality of different display modes in a period (the same period) that overlaps the second image, and thus various types of display using the first image and the second image are performed. An effect can be performed. Further, since the first image is displayed on the image display means at a predetermined arrangement position relative to the second image in accordance with each of the plurality of different display modes. In the above, the first image and the second image are not superimposed and displayed without any relation. Therefore, various effects performed by the first image and the second image being displayed during the overlapping period (the same period) do not give a complicated impression to the player, and improve the quality of the effect. Can be done.

[Feature H3]
The gaming machine according to Feature H1 or Feature H2,
When the first image is displayed in a period overlapping with the second image, the control unit determines a relatively predetermined timing between the first image and the second image (in the fifth embodiment, A gaming machine displaying the image on the image display means at the timing of display determined by the arrangement / timing table / the timing of display set by the display pattern table in the sixth embodiment.

  According to the feature H3, when the first image is displayed during a period (the same period) that overlaps with the second image, the first image is displayed at a predetermined timing relative to the second image. Therefore, the first image and the second image are not displayed at timings that are not related at all. Therefore, the effect performed by displaying the first image and the second image during the overlapping period (the same period) does not give a complicated impression to the player, and further improves the quality of the effect. Can be.

[Feature H4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features H1 to H3,
The degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game suggested by the first image when not displayed during a period not overlapping with the second image is:
When the first image and the second image are displayed during an overlapping period, the degree of the advantage / disadvantage of the game indicated by the first image and the second image is different (fifth embodiment) Display pattern table in the sixth embodiment / display pattern table in the sixth embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the feature H4, the first image is displayed in a period overlapping with the second image and the second image is displayed in a period not overlapping with the second image. Since the suggestion is made, the first image can be used to execute effects in a plurality of different modes having different degrees of advantages and disadvantages of the game, and the first image can be effectively used. Further, even when the first image is displayed, the degree of advantage / disadvantage differs depending on whether or not the first image is displayed during a period (the same period) overlapping with another image. , Interest, and expectations can be improved. Then, even when the image combined with the second image is displayed, the relative position with respect to the second image is displayed on the image display means at the predetermined arrangement position, so that the quality is high. A high performance can be provided to the player.

[Feature H5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features H1 to H4,
The first image and the second image indicate different types of advantages / disadvantages of the game (display pattern table in the fifth embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the feature H5, in each of the effect made of the first image, the effect made of the second image, and the effect made of the first image and the second image, the advantage / disadvantage of a different type of game is suggested. can do. Therefore, it is possible to suggest the degree of advantage / disadvantage of various kinds of games by combining a plurality of images.

[Feature H6]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features H1 to H5,
The control means includes:
In a case where the first image is displayed during a period not overlapping with the second image, the first image is displayed on the image display means in a mode in which an image frame indicating an area of the first image is attached. Display,
When the first image is displayed during a period overlapping with the second image, the first image is displayed on the image display means without the image frame.

  According to the feature H6, the effect composed of the first image and the second image can be an effect that does not cause a sense of strangeness to the player.

[Feature H7]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features H1 to H6,
A gaming machine, wherein at least one of the first image and the second image is an image that changes over time.

  According to the feature H7, various effects can be executed by using images that change over time.

<Characteristic I group>
The feature I group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof.
[Feature I1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition,
Determining means for determining whether the obtained special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
Notifying means for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means as to whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition for each game,
Image display means for displaying an image as an effect,
Control means for controlling the image display means,
A gaming machine comprising:
The control means includes:
A first image that suggests the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the game to the player, and a second image that is different from the first image while suggesting the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the game to the player Is displayed on the image display means,
There are cases where the first image is displayed during a period overlapping with the second image, and cases where the first image is displayed during a period not overlapping with the second image,
When the first image is displayed during a period overlapping with the second image, a predetermined timing relative to the second image (in the arrangement / timing table in the fifth embodiment, A gaming machine, wherein the image is displayed on the image display means at the determined display timing / display timing set in the display pattern table in the sixth embodiment.

  There is a gaming machine that displays an image on an image display means and performs an effect indicating to a player the degree of advantage or disadvantage of a game. Usually, a plurality of such images are prepared, and each image indicates the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the game. In addition, these images have different display conditions. In such a gaming machine, the conditions for displaying a plurality of images may overlap depending on the state of the game, and in such a case, the relevance to other images displayed during the overlapping period (the same period). Are taken into account, and a plurality of images are displayed according to each setting. As a result, a plurality of images may be displayed on the image display means without any relation or a number of images may be displayed in a superimposed manner, giving a player an impression that the effect is complicated. The advantage / disadvantage degree of the game indicates whether the state of the game round determined based on the special information is advantageous or disadvantageous for the player. For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, the state of the game time is advantageous for the player, such as the degree of expectation of winning a jackpot lottery, the degree of expectation of being a jackpot, and the degree of expectation that the game is in a state of probability change. Indicates the degree of being or disadvantageous.

  According to the feature I1, when the first image is displayed in a period overlapping with the second image, the first image is displayed at a predetermined timing relative to the second image. The first image and the second image are not displayed at timings that are not related at all. Therefore, the effect performed by displaying the first image and the second image during the overlapping period (the same period) does not give a complicated impression to the player, and further improves the quality of the effect. Can be. The first image may be displayed during a period (the same period) that overlaps with the second image or may be displayed during a period that does not overlap with the second image. Thus, effects in a plurality of different modes can be executed, and the first image can be effectively used.

[Feature I2]
The gaming machine according to feature I1, wherein:
The control unit is configured to control the first image to be arranged at a predetermined position relative to the second image (an arrangement position determined by an arrangement / timing table in the fifth embodiment / A game machine displaying an image on the image display means at an arrangement position set in a display pattern table according to the sixth embodiment).

  According to the feature I2, when the first image is displayed in a period (the same period) that overlaps with the second image, a relative position between the first image and the second image is predetermined. Is displayed on the image display means, so that the first image and the second image are not superimposed and displayed without any relation. Therefore, the effect performed by displaying the first image and the second image during the overlapping period (the same period) does not give a complicated impression to the player, and improves the quality of the effect. Can be.

[Feature I3]
The gaming machine according to Feature I1 or Feature I2,
The degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game suggested by the first image when displayed in a period not overlapping with the second image is as follows:
When the first image and the second image are displayed during an overlapping period, the degree of the advantage / disadvantage of the game indicated by the first image and the second image is different (fifth embodiment) Display pattern table in the sixth embodiment / display pattern table in the sixth embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the feature I3, the first image is displayed in a period overlapping with the second image and the second image is displayed in a period not overlapping with the second image. Since the suggestion is made, the first image can be used to execute effects in a plurality of different modes having different degrees of advantages and disadvantages of the game, and the first image can be effectively used. Further, even when the first image is displayed, the degree of advantage / disadvantage differs depending on whether or not the first image is displayed during a period (the same period) overlapping with another image. , Interest, and expectations can be improved. Then, even when the image combined with the second image is displayed, the relative position with respect to the second image is displayed on the image display means at the predetermined arrangement position, so that the quality is high. A high performance can be provided to the player.

[Feature I4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I3,
The first image and the second image indicate different types of advantages / disadvantages of the game (display pattern table in the fifth embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the feature I4, in each of the effect made of the first image, the effect made of the second image, and the effect made of the first image and the second image, the degree of advantage / disadvantage of a different type of game is suggested. can do. Therefore, it is possible to suggest the degree of advantage / disadvantage of various kinds of games by combining a plurality of images.

[Feature I5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I4,
The control means includes:
In a case where the first image is displayed during a period not overlapping with the second image, the first image is displayed on the image display means in a mode in which an image frame indicating an area of the first image is attached. Display,
When the first image is displayed during a period overlapping with the second image, the first image is displayed on the image display means without the image frame.

  According to the feature I5, the effect composed of the first image and the second image can be an effect that does not make the player feel uncomfortable.

[Feature I6]
The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I5,
A gaming machine, wherein at least one of the first image and the second image is an image that changes over time.

  According to the feature I6, various effects can be executed by using images that change over time.

<Feature J group>
The feature J group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof.
[Feature J1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition,
Determining means for determining whether the obtained special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
Notifying means for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means as to whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition for each game,
Image storage means for storing an image capable of giving a player recognition of advantages and disadvantages regarding the situation of the game,
Image display means for displaying the image as an effect,
Control means for controlling the image display means,
A gaming machine comprising:
The control means includes:
Displaying, on the image display means, a first image stored in the image storage means, wherein the first image enables the player to recognize the advantage / disadvantage of the game situation.
A combined image obtained by combining the first image with a second image different from the first image, wherein the image is a recognition regarding advantages / disadvantages of a game situation and is not combined with the second image. When the first image is displayed, a combined image that allows the player to be given a different recognition from the recognition given to the player is displayed on the image display means (in the fifth and sixth embodiments, , The display pattern of the object C (C1-C2-C3) is a display pattern showing the appearance of the dog's face in the box, and gives the player recognition that the game situation is advantageous. The display pattern (B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) in which the object C is combined with the object B is a table showing how the dog in the box gets wet due to the worsening weather. A pattern, gives the recognition that the status of the game is disadvantageous to the player / modification 15)
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the feature J1, when the first image is displayed on the image display means without being combined with the second image, the recognition given to the player regarding the advantage / disadvantage of the game, and the first image is regarded as the second image When combined and displayed on the image display means, it is possible to change the recognition given to the player regarding the advantages / disadvantages of the game, so that it is possible to execute various effects using the first image. Image can be used effectively. The game status is based on a game status such as whether the special information satisfies a predetermined condition or whether the special information has a relatively high probability of satisfying the predetermined condition. Refers to the situation.

[Feature J2]
The gaming machine according to Feature J1, wherein
The control means determines a relative position between the first image and the second image according to a situation of the game when displaying the first image in combination with the second image. (Set at the arrangement position determined by the arrangement / timing table in the fifth embodiment / set at the arrangement position set by the display pattern table in the sixth embodiment) and display on the image display means. A gaming machine characterized by:

  According to the feature J2, since the relative position between the first image and the second image is set according to the game situation and displayed on the image display means, the first image and the second image are displayed. Can be used to give the player various perceptions about the advantages and disadvantages of the game.

[Feature J3]
The gaming machine according to Feature J1 or Feature J2,
The control means, when displaying the first image in combination with the second image, a relative timing for displaying the image on the image display means between the first image and the second image Is set according to the state of the game (set to the display timing determined in the arrangement / timing table in the fifth embodiment / set to the display timing set in the display pattern table in the sixth embodiment), A game machine displaying the image on the image display means.

  According to the feature J3, the relative timing for displaying on the image display means between the first image and the second image is set according to the game situation and displayed on the image display means. Using the image and the second image, various recognitions can be given to the player regarding the advantages and disadvantages of the game.

[Feature J4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features J1 to J3,
A gaming machine, wherein at least one of the first image and the second image is an image that changes over time.

  According to the feature J4, various effects can be executed by using an image that changes over time.

<Feature K group>
The feature K group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof.
[Feature K1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition,
Determining means for determining whether the obtained special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
Notifying means for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means as to whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition for each game,
Image storage means for storing at least a first image, a second image, and a third image;
Image display means for displaying an image stored in the image storage means,
Control means for controlling the image display means,
A gaming machine comprising:
The control unit causes the first image (the image of the box of the image C1 in the sixth embodiment) to be displayed on the image display unit without being combined with the third image. The situation in which the image of the dog showing the face from the box of the image C3 in the sixth embodiment is displayed on the image display means without being combined with the third image is a game situation for the player. Despite giving favorable recognition,
The control means combines the first image (the image of the box of the image C1 in the sixth embodiment) with the third image (the rain image of the image B3 in the sixth embodiment) to form the image display means. Is displayed, the second image (the image in which the dog comes out of the box of the image C3 in the sixth embodiment) is the third image (the rain image in the image B3 in the sixth embodiment). ), Which gives the player a more advantageous recognition of the game situation than when displayed on the image display means in combination with the game machine.

  According to the feature K1, it is easier for the player to display the second image without combining with the third image than to display the first image without combining with the third image. Despite giving an advantageous recognition of the game situation, displaying the first image in combination with the third image is more efficient than displaying the second image in combination with the third image. Give the player an advantageous perception of the game situation. Therefore, various effects can be executed depending on how to combine images. Further, even when the player recognizes the first image or the second image displayed on the image display means, the player recognizes that the state of the game is different depending on whether or not the third image is displayed. Therefore, the player's attention to the image displayed on the image display means can be improved.

[Feature K2]
The gaming machine according to Feature K1, wherein
The image storage means stores a first time-varying image (an object C that changes with time in the order of the image C1, the image C2, and the image C3) that is a image that changes with time,
The first image (image C1) and the second image (image C3) are partial images constituting at least a part of a time-axis direction of the first temporally-changed image. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature K2, since the first image and the second image are partial images constituting at least a part of the time-axis direction of the first time-varying image, the first image and the second image are By extracting an image and combining it with the third image, various effects can be further executed.

[Feature K3]
The gaming machine according to Feature K1 or Feature K2,
The control means includes:
A first case in which the first image is displayed on the image display means without being combined with the third image;
A second case in which the first image is displayed on the image display unit without being combined with the third image, and then the second image is displayed on the image display unit without being combined with the third image. A gaming machine characterized by the following.

  According to the feature K3, in a case where the first image is displayed without being combined with the third image, after that, in a case where an image in which the second image is not combined with the third image is displayed, and in a case where it is not displayed, Therefore, various effects using the first image and the second image can be executed.

[Feature K4]
The gaming machine according to Feature K3,
The probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher in the second case than in the first case (in the display pattern table for C in the sixth embodiment, the display pattern (C1) Is more likely to win the jackpot lottery when the notice effect is displayed by the display pattern (C1-C2) or the display pattern (C1-C2-C3) than when the notice effect is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the feature K4, in the case where the first image is displayed without being combined with the third image, after that, the image in which the second image is not combined with the third image is not displayed (first case) In the case of displaying (second case), the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher. Accordingly, in the first case where the first image is displayed without being combined with the third image, the state is subsequently changed in the second case where the second image is displayed without being combined with the third image. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the transition, and to improve the interest of the game. Further, by displaying the first image and the second image having such characteristics in combination with the third image, it is possible to execute various effects.

[Feature K5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features K1 to K4,
The image storage means stores a second time-varying image (an object B that changes with time in the order of image B1, image B2, and image B3), which is an image that changes with time.
The gaming machine, wherein the third image (image B3) is a partial image constituting at least a part of a time-axis direction of the second time-varying image.

  According to the feature K5, since the third image is a partial image that constitutes at least a part of the time-axis direction of the second time-varying image, various effects are produced using the second time-varying image. Can be performed. For example, when displaying the first image and the second image in combination with the second time-varying image, the third image which is a part of the second time-varying image is the first image or the second image. When the image is displayed in the same period as the image 2, it is possible to change the recognition of the game situation for the player.

<Characteristic L group>
The feature L group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof.
[Feature L1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition,
Determining means for determining whether the obtained special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
Notifying means for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means as to whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition for each game,
Image storage means for storing at least a first image, a second image, and a third image;
Image display means for displaying an image stored in the image storage means,
Control means for controlling the image display means,
A gaming machine comprising:
The control unit causes the first image (the image of the box of the image C1 in the sixth embodiment) to be displayed on the image display unit without being combined with the third image. When the image (the image of the dog showing the face from the box of the image C3 in the sixth embodiment) is displayed on the image display means without being combined with the third image, the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. Despite the high probability of meeting,
The control means combines the first image (the image of the box of the image C1 in the sixth embodiment) with the third image (the rain image of the image B3 in the sixth embodiment) to form the image display means. Is displayed, the second image (the image in which the dog comes out of the box of the image C3 in the sixth embodiment) is the third image (the rain image in the image B3 in the sixth embodiment). ), The probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher than when the special information is displayed on the image display means.

  According to the feature L1, the special information has a predetermined value when the second image is displayed without being combined with the third image, compared to when the first image is displayed without being combined with the third image. Despite the high probability that the condition is satisfied, the case where the first image is displayed in combination with the third image is better than the case where the second image is displayed in combination with the third image. The probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is high. Therefore, when the first image or the second image is displayed, it is possible to improve the degree of attention of the player as to whether or not the third image is displayed.

[Feature L2]
The gaming machine according to feature L1, wherein:
The image storage means stores a first time-varying image (an object C that changes with time in the order of the image C1, the image C2, and the image C3) that is a image that changes with time,
The first image (image C1) and the second image (image C3) are partial images constituting at least a part of a time-axis direction of the first temporally-changed image. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature L2, since the first image and the second image are partial images constituting at least a part of the time-axis direction of the first time-varying image, the first time-varying image is displayed. In this case, the degree of attention of the player as to whether or not the third image is displayed can be improved.

[Feature L3]
The gaming machine according to Feature L1 or Feature L2,
The control means includes:
A first case in which the first image is displayed on the image display means without being combined with the third image;
A second case in which the first image is displayed on the image display unit without being combined with the third image, and then the second image is displayed on the image display unit without being combined with the third image. A gaming machine characterized by the following.

  According to the feature L4, in the case where the first image is displayed without being combined with the third image, after that, in the case where the second image is displayed without being combined with the third image, and in the case where it is not displayed, Therefore, various effects using the first image and the second image can be executed.

[Feature L4]
The gaming machine according to Feature L3,
The probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher in the second case than in the first case (in the display pattern table for C in the sixth embodiment, the display pattern (C1) Is more likely to win the jackpot lottery when the notice effect is displayed by the display pattern (C1-C2) or the display pattern (C1-C2-C3) than when the notice effect is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the feature L4, in a case where the first image is displayed without being combined with the third image, after that, an image in which the second image is not combined with the third image is not displayed (first case) In the case of displaying (second case), the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher. Accordingly, in the first case where the first image is displayed without being combined with the third image, the state is subsequently changed in the second case where the second image is displayed without being combined with the third image. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the transition, and to improve the interest of the game. Further, by displaying the first image and the second image having such characteristics in combination with the third image, it is possible to execute various effects.

[Feature L5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features L1 to L4,
The image storage means stores a second time-varying image (an object B that changes with time in the order of image B1, image B2, and image B3), which is an image that changes with time.
The gaming machine, wherein the third image (image B3) is a partial image constituting at least a part of a time-axis direction of the second time-varying image.

  According to the feature L5, since the third image is a partial image that constitutes at least a part of the time-axis direction of the second time-varying image, various effects are produced using the second time-varying image. Can be performed. For example, when displaying the first image and the second image in combination with the second time-varying image, the third image which is a part of the second time-varying image is the first image or the second image. When the image is displayed in the same period as the image 2, it is possible to change the recognition of the game situation for the player.

  The invention of the feature F group, feature G group, feature H group, feature I group, feature J group, feature K group, and feature L group solves the following problems.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine, various effects are performed according to various gaming states for the purpose of improving the interest of the game. For example, there is a gaming machine that displays an object image on an image display unit and performs an effect indicating a degree of advantage or disadvantage of a game to a player. Usually, a plurality of such object images are prepared, and each object image indicates the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the game.

  Here, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, further technical improvement is desired for the purpose of enhancing the interest of the game.

<Characteristic M group>
The feature M group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof.
[Feature M1]
An acquisition unit that acquires special information based on that a predetermined acquisition condition is satisfied;
Determining means for determining whether the special information acquired by the acquiring means satisfies a predetermined condition,
Image display means for displaying a first moving image (background moving image) as a first display mode;
Sound output means for outputting a moving image corresponding sound (background music) which is a sound corresponding to the first moving image in a first output mode (a mode of outputting background music at a predetermined volume);
The image display means is shifted from the first display mode to a second display mode (a mode for displaying a demonstration moving image), and the sound output means is changed from the first output mode to a second output mode (background music). A transition condition determining unit that determines whether a transition condition that is a condition for transitioning to a state in which output is stopped) is satisfied,
A return condition determining unit that determines whether a return condition that is a condition for returning the image display unit to the first display mode and returning the sound output unit to the first output mode is satisfied;
A gaming machine comprising:
When the transition condition is satisfied,
The image display means shifts from the first display mode to the second display mode,
The sound output means shifts from the first output mode to the second output mode,
After the sound output unit has shifted to the second output mode, and when the return condition is satisfied after the image display unit has shifted to the second display mode,
The image display unit returns to the first display mode and, when displaying the first moving image as the first display mode, displays the first moving image from a predetermined temporal position. Start,
The sound output means returns to the first output mode and starts outputting from a predetermined time position of the moving image corresponding sound when outputting the moving image corresponding sound in the first output mode. A gaming machine characterized by:

  According to the feature M1, when the sound output means has shifted to the second output mode and the return condition is satisfied after the image display means has shifted to the second display mode, the image display means Starts display from a predetermined temporal position of the first moving image when returning to the first display mode and displaying the first moving image, and the sound output means outputs the first output mode. When outputting the moving image corresponding sound by returning to the above, the output is started from a predetermined time position of the moving image corresponding sound. Therefore, after the sound output means has shifted to the second output mode, and after the image display means has shifted to the second display mode, the image display means changes the second display mode in accordance with the timing at which the return condition is satisfied. The display of the first moving image and the output of the sound corresponding to the moving image can be easily synchronized as compared with the configuration in which the temporal position at which the display of the first moving image starts is changed. As a result, the quality of the game effect can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, as a configuration in which the temporal position at which the image display means starts displaying the first moving image varies according to the timing at which the return condition is satisfied, for example, the image display means may return after shifting to the second display mode. When the condition is satisfied, a configuration in which the display of the first moving image is started from the temporal position of the first moving image displayed at the timing immediately before shifting to the second display mode, or the image display means is When returning from the second display mode to the first display mode, a configuration in which the temporal position of the first moving image at which display is started is determined based on the elapsed time since the transition to the second display mode. Even after the display means shifts from the first display mode to the second display mode, the reproduction of the first moving image is continued as an internal process, and when returning from the second display mode to the first display mode, Continues as internal processing Configured for displaying the first video is playing and the like.

[Feature M2]
The gaming machine according to feature M1, wherein
When the transition condition is satisfied,
The sound output unit shifts from the first output mode to the second output mode via a reduction mode in which the volume of the moving image corresponding sound is reduced with time while continuing to output the moving image corresponding sound. And
The image display unit shifts from the first display mode to the second display mode after the timing when the sound output unit shifts to the second output mode,
When the return condition is satisfied during the period when the sound output unit is in the reduction mode,
The image display means continues the first display mode for displaying the first moving image,
A gaming machine, wherein the sound output means returns to the first output mode by returning the volume of the moving image corresponding sound to the volume in the first output mode.

  According to the feature M2, when the return condition is satisfied during the period of the reduction mode, the image display unit continues the first display mode, and the sound output unit returns the volume of the moving image corresponding sound to the first mode. Since the mode is returned to the output mode, it is possible to return to the mode before the transition condition is satisfied and return to the mode before the transition condition is satisfied with a natural flow while maintaining the synchronization between the display of the first moving image and the output of the moving image corresponding sound.

[Feature M3]
The gaming machine according to feature M1 or feature M2,
When the transition condition is satisfied,
The sound output unit outputs the moving image corresponding sound from the first output mode in which the moving image corresponding sound is output at a first volume, and outputs the moving image corresponding sound to a second volume smaller than the first volume. Shift to the second output mode of outputting at the volume of
The image display means shifts to the second display mode after a lapse of a predetermined time after the sound output means shifts to the second output mode,
When the return condition is satisfied after the sound output unit has shifted to the second output mode and before the image display unit shifts to the second display mode,
The image display means continues the first display mode for displaying the first moving image,
The gaming machine, wherein the sound output unit returns to the first output mode by returning the volume of the moving image corresponding sound to the first volume.

  According to the feature M3, when the return condition is satisfied after the sound output unit shifts to the second output mode and before the image display unit shifts to the second display mode, the image display is performed. The means continues the first display mode of displaying the first moving image, and the sound output means returns to the first output mode by returning the volume of the moving image corresponding sound to the first volume. Therefore, while maintaining the synchronization between the display of the first moving image and the output of the sound corresponding to the moving image, it is possible to return to the mode before the transition condition is satisfied without a sense of incongruity in a natural flow.

[Feature M4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features M1 to M3,
The predetermined temporal position of the first moving image is a temporal leading position of the first moving image,
The gaming machine, wherein the predetermined temporal position of the moving image corresponding sound is a temporal leading position of the moving image corresponding sound.

  According to the feature M4, the return condition is satisfied after the sound output unit shifts to the second output mode and after the image display unit shifts to the second display mode. When returning to the first output mode, display is started from the temporal start position of the first moving image, and output is started from the temporal start position of the moving image corresponding sound. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which the display is started from the temporally intermediate position of the first moving image and the output is started from the temporally intermediate position of the moving image corresponding sound, the discomfort given to the player is reduced. Can be. For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the display is started from a position in the middle of the time of the first moving image and the output is started from a position in the middle of the sound of the moving image, the return condition is satisfied. After that, since the user views the first moving image and the moving image corresponding sound from a position in the middle of time, he / she feels a sense of incongruity, and it is satisfactory that there is a portion of the first moving image and the moving image corresponding sound that has not been watched. You may feel it. On the other hand, according to the feature M4, the player can appreciate the first moving image and the moving image corresponding sound from the temporal start position, so that the uncomfortable feeling given to the player can be reduced. At the same time, it is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction that all of the first moving image and the moving image corresponding sound can be viewed from the temporal start position. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Feature M5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features M1 to M4,
The second display mode includes a mode in which a second video different from the first video is displayed, a mode in which at least a part of the first video is stopped and displayed, and a mode in which the first video is not displayed. A mode in which a still image different from the first moving image is displayed, or a mode in which a moving image and a still image are not displayed,
The first output mode is a mode in which the moving image corresponding sound is output at a first volume.
The second output mode is a mode in which the moving image corresponding sound is output at a second volume lower than the first volume, or an output of the moving image corresponding sound is stopped. A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the feature M5, it is possible to make the player recognize that the transition condition has been satisfied and the image display means and the sound output means have transitioned to the second display mode and the second output mode, respectively.

[Feature M6]
The gaming machine according to feature M5,
The gaming machine, wherein the second volume is lower than a volume that cannot be recognized by the player.

  According to the feature M6, when the sound output unit shifts to the second output mode, the volume of the moving image corresponding sound becomes equal to or lower than the volume that cannot be recognized by the player. It is possible to make the player clearly recognize that the means has been shifted to the second output mode.

[Feature M7]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features M1 to M6,
A special game state starting means for starting a special game state advantageous to the player when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition,
The transition condition determining means is configured such that a predetermined time has elapsed without any of the special game state and the next game time being started after a game round for performing a display corresponding to a result of the determination by the determination section has ended. In such a case, it is determined that the transition condition is satisfied.

  If a predetermined time has elapsed without any of the special game state and the next game time being started after the game time has ended, it is highly likely that the player has not played a game with the gaming machine. Therefore, according to the feature M7, the transition condition can be satisfied in a state where there is a high possibility that the player is not playing a game.

[Feature M8]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features M1 to M7,
A detecting means for detecting that the game ball has been ejected to the game board,
The gaming machine, wherein the transition condition determining unit determines that the transition condition is satisfied when the detecting unit does not detect a game ball for a predetermined time.

  According to the feature M8, since the transition condition is not satisfied if the game ball is ejected on the game board, the transition condition is satisfied even though the player is playing the game. Occurrence can be reduced.

[Feature M9]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features M1 to M8,
The gaming machine, wherein the return condition determination means determines that the return condition has been satisfied, when the special information is obtained by the obtaining means after the shift condition is satisfied.

  According to the feature M9, when the special information is obtained, the image display unit returns to the first display mode and the sound output unit returns to the first output mode. Therefore, an expectation that the special information has been obtained. Can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature M10]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features M1 to M9,
A detecting means for detecting that the game ball has been ejected to the game board,
The gaming machine, wherein the return condition determination means determines that the return condition is satisfied after the transition condition is satisfied and a game ball is detected by the detection means.

  According to the feature M10, even after the transition condition is satisfied, the return condition is satisfied if the game ball is ejected to the game board. Therefore, the return condition is satisfied even though the player has started the game. It is possible to reduce a situation that is uncomfortable for a player such that the situation is not established for a long time (for example, one minute).

<Characteristic N group>
The feature N group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof.
[Feature N1]
Image display means for displaying a predetermined moving image (background moving image) as a first display mode;
As a first output mode, sound output means for outputting a moving image corresponding sound (background music) corresponding to the predetermined moving image at a predetermined output level;
Command receiving means for receiving a command,
A gaming machine comprising:
The image display means is another display mode in which continuity with the predetermined moving image is cut (a mode in which a demonstration moving image is displayed), and the sound output means breaks continuity with the moving image corresponding sound. Identification information storage means for storing identification information (a cueing determination flag) that can be identified as a specific mode, which is another output mode (a mode in which background music output is stopped);
When the command receiving unit receives a specific command (return condition satisfaction command), determining unit determines whether or not the specific mode is set, based on the identification information stored in the identification information storage unit. When,
With
When the command receiving unit receives the specific command, and the determining unit determines that the command is in the specific mode based on the identification information (in the case of the mode from time t4 to time t5 in FIG. 11) Is
The image display means returns to the first display mode, and starts displaying the predetermined moving image from a predetermined time position (FIG. 11).
The sound output means returns to the first output mode and starts outputting the moving image corresponding sound from a predetermined time position (FIG. 11).
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the feature N1, when the image display unit is returned to the first display mode and the sound output unit is returned to the first output mode from the specific mode, the time position of the predetermined moving image at which the image display unit starts displaying Since the time position at which the sound output unit starts outputting the moving image corresponding sound and the sound output unit are predetermined, it is possible to easily synchronize the predetermined moving image with the moving image corresponding sound.

[Feature N2]
The gaming machine according to Feature N1, wherein
When the command receiving unit receives the specific command, and the determining unit determines that the specific mode is not the specific mode based on the identification information, the image display unit has a continuity with the predetermined moving image. In the case of the maintained display mode (the mode from time t2 to time t4 in FIG. 11),
The image display means returns to the first display mode, and continuously displays the predetermined moving image in a mode maintaining the continuity (FIGS. 12 and 13).
The sound output unit returns to the first output mode and outputs the moving image corresponding sound corresponding to the predetermined moving image with the continuity maintained (FIGS. 12 and 13).
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the feature N2, when the image display unit is returned to the first display mode and the sound output unit is returned to the first output mode from the display mode in which continuity with a predetermined moving image is maintained, the image display unit Continuously displays a predetermined moving image in a manner in which continuity is maintained, and the sound output means outputs a moving image corresponding sound corresponding to the predetermined moving image in which continuity is maintained, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable. The image display means can be returned to the first display mode, and the sound output means can be returned to the first output mode.

[Feature N3]
The gaming machine according to Feature N1 or Feature N2,
The predetermined temporal position of the predetermined moving image is a temporal leading position of the predetermined moving image,
The gaming machine, wherein the predetermined temporal position of the moving image corresponding sound is a temporal leading position of the moving image corresponding sound.

  According to the feature N3, when the image display unit is returned to the first display mode and the sound output unit is returned to the first output mode from the specific mode, the time position of the predetermined moving image at which the image display unit starts displaying Since the temporal position at which the sound output means starts outputting the moving image corresponding sound is the temporal start position, the display starts from the middle of the predetermined moving image and the output starts from the middle of the moving image corresponding sound. As compared with the case where the processing is performed, the processing executed by the image display means and the sound output means is easier, and the discomfort given to the player can be reduced.

[Feature N4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features N1 to N3,
The other display mode is a mode in which the image display means displays an image different from the predetermined moving image, or a mode in which display of the image is stopped.

  According to the feature N4, when the image display unit is returned from the specific mode to the first display mode, another display mode as the specific mode before returning to the first display mode is different from the predetermined moving image. Since the image is displayed or the image display is stopped, it is possible to return to the first display mode and start displaying a predetermined moving image from a predetermined time position. Therefore, the sense of discomfort given to the player can be reduced. The images include moving images and still images.

[Feature N5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features N1 to N4,
The other output mode is a mode in which the sound output unit outputs another sound different from the moving image corresponding sound, and the sound output unit outputs the moving image corresponding or the other sound at an output level that cannot be recognized by a player. Or a mode in which the sound output means stops outputting.

  According to the feature N5, when the sound output unit is returned from the specific mode to the first output mode, another output mode as the specific mode before returning to the first output mode is different from the moving image corresponding sound. Since it is a mode in which other sounds are output, a mode in which a moving image is supported or other sounds are output at an output level that cannot be recognized by the player, or a mode in which output is stopped, go to the first output mode. Even when the player returns and starts outputting the moving image corresponding sound corresponding to the predetermined moving image whose display is started from a predetermined time position, the uncomfortable feeling given to the player can be reduced.

<Character O group>
The feature O group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof.
[Feature O1]
An acquisition unit that acquires special information based on that a predetermined acquisition condition is satisfied;
Determining means for determining whether the special information acquired by the acquiring means satisfies a predetermined condition,
Elapsed time determination means for determining whether a predetermined time has elapsed,
Image display means for displaying a first moving image (a background moving image in the example shown in FIG. 82 and a demonstration moving image in the example shown in FIG. 83) as a first display mode;
A gaming machine comprising:
The image display means,
When it is determined by the elapsed time determination means that the predetermined time has elapsed, the mode is shifted from the first display mode to a second display mode (a mode for displaying an RTC effect moving image) (FIGS. 82 and 83). ),
When the predetermined display period of the second display mode has expired, the display mode shifts from the second display mode to the first display mode, and shifts to the first display mode to switch to the first display mode. When displaying the first moving image, the display is started from a predetermined time position of the first moving image (FIGS. 82 and 83).
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the characteristic O1, when the predetermined display period of the second display mode ends, the display mode shifts from the second display mode to the first display mode, and returns to the first display mode. When displaying the first moving image, display is started from a predetermined temporal position of the first moving image. Therefore, control can be simplified as compared to a configuration in which the temporal position at which the display of the first moving image is started changes when the first moving image is displayed in the first display mode. Note that, when the display is shifted to the first display mode and the first moving image is displayed, the temporal position at which the display of the first moving image is started fluctuates is, for example, a predetermined configuration of the second display mode. The display of the first moving image is started from the temporal position of the first moving image displayed at the timing immediately before shifting to the second display mode when the display period ends, and an image display means. When moving from the second display mode to the first display mode, the temporal position of the first moving image at which display is started is determined based on the elapsed time from the transition to the second display mode. Even after the image display means shifts from the first display mode to the second display mode, the reproduction of the first moving image is continued as internal processing, and the mode shifts from the second display mode to the first display mode. Sometimes, it is continuously played back as internal processing Configuration and the like to display a video.

  When a plurality of gaming machines having the feature O1 are installed, the display period of the second display mode ends substantially simultaneously at each gaming machine, and the game machine shifts to the first display mode. When the game machine shifts to the first display mode and displays the first moving image, the display starts from a predetermined time position of the first moving image, so that the first game machine displays the first moving image. Videos can be synchronized. In other words, it is possible to create a spectacular situation in which the first moving image displayed on each gaming machine is synchronized, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature O2]
The gaming machine according to feature O1, wherein
A transition condition determining unit that determines whether a transition condition that is a condition for transitioning the image display unit to a third display mode (a mode for displaying a demonstration moving image) is satisfied,
The image display means,
If the transition condition is satisfied during the first display mode (during display of the background moving image), the transition to the third display mode is triggered by the satisfaction of the transition condition (FIG. 11).
When the transition condition is satisfied during the second display mode (during the display of the RTC effect moving image), the completion of the predetermined display period of the second display mode is a trigger. The display shifts to the third display mode (FIG. 84).
A game machine characterized in that when shifting to the third display mode and displaying a third moving image (demo moving image), the display is started from a predetermined time position of the third moving image.

  According to the feature O2, even when the transition condition is satisfied during the second display mode, the second display mode is not interrupted in the middle of the predetermined display period, and the second display mode is set in advance. The transition to the third display mode is triggered by the end of the predetermined display period, so that a sense of discomfort given to the player can be reduced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  When a plurality of gaming machines with the characteristic O2 are installed, the display period of the second display mode ends substantially simultaneously at each gaming machine, and the game machine shifts to the third display mode. When the game machine shifts to the third display mode and displays the third moving image, the machine starts displaying the third moving image from a predetermined time position, so that the third game machine displays the third moving image. Videos can be synchronized. That is, it is possible to create a spectacular situation in which the third moving image displayed on each of the gaming machines is synchronized, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature O3]
The gaming machine according to feature O2,
A return condition determining unit that determines whether a return condition that is a condition for returning the image display unit to the first display mode (a mode for displaying a background moving image) is satisfied;
The image display means,
If the return condition is satisfied during the third display mode (during the display of the demonstration moving image), the display returns to the first display mode when the return condition is satisfied (FIG. 11).
When the return condition is satisfied during the second display mode (during the display of the RTC effect moving image), the completion of the predetermined display period of the second display mode is an opportunity. The display returns to the first display mode (FIG. 85).
When returning to the first display mode and displaying the first moving image, the gaming machine starts displaying the first moving image from the predetermined time position.

  According to the feature O3, even when the return condition is satisfied during the second display mode, the second display mode is not interrupted in the middle of the predetermined display period, and the second display mode is set in advance. Since the display mode returns to the first display mode when the determined display period ends, the sense of discomfort given to the player can be reduced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature O4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features O1 to O3,
A gaming machine, wherein the predetermined temporal position of the first moving image is a temporal leading position of the first moving image.

  According to the feature O4, when moving to or returning to the first display mode and displaying the first moving image, compared to a configuration in which display is started from a temporally intermediate position of the first moving image, Discomfort given to a person can be reduced. For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the display is started from a position in the middle of the time of the first moving image when the first moving image is displayed after shifting to or returning to the first display mode, the player Since the user views the first moving image from a position in the middle of time, the user may feel uncomfortable or feel unsatisfactory that there is a portion of the first moving image that has not been viewed. On the other hand, according to the feature O4, the player can watch the first moving image from the temporal start position, so that the uncomfortable feeling given to the player can be reduced and the first moving image can be reduced. Can be given to the player that all of the moving images can be viewed from the temporal start position. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Feature O5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features O1 to O4,
Sound output means for outputting a moving picture corresponding sound which is a sound corresponding to a moving picture displayed by the image display means,
The sound output unit includes a first moving image corresponding sound (background) corresponding to the first moving image when the image display unit starts displaying the first moving image from the predetermined time position. A game machine that starts outputting from a predetermined time position of music).

  According to the feature O5, the display of the first moving image and the output of the first moving image corresponding sound are easily synchronized as compared with the configuration in which the temporal position at which the output of the first moving image corresponding sound starts varies. be able to. As a result, the quality of the game effect can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, as a configuration in which the temporal position at which the output of the first moving image corresponding sound is started fluctuates, for example, the predetermined display period of the second display mode ends, and the image display unit displays the first moving image. When the display is started from a predetermined time position, the image display means starts from the time position of the first moving image corresponding sound output at the timing immediately before the transition to the second display mode, and returns to the first time position. When transitioning to the configuration for starting output of the moving image corresponding sound or the mode of outputting the first moving image corresponding sound, the image display means displays the temporal position of the first moving image corresponding sound to start outputting on the second display. A configuration that is determined based on the elapsed time from the transition to the aspect, and the reproduction of the first moving image corresponding sound is continued as an internal process even after the image display means transitions from the first display aspect to the second display aspect. And the image display means Configured for outputting a first video corresponding sound being played continuously as the internal processing and the like is at the transition or return from 示態 like in the first display mode.

[Feature O6]
The gaming machine according to feature O5,
The gaming machine, wherein the predetermined temporal position of the first moving image corresponding sound is a temporal leading position of the first moving image corresponding sound.

  According to the feature O6, the uncomfortable feeling given to the player can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the output of the first moving image corresponding sound is started from the middle position in time. For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the output of the first moving image corresponding sound is started from a position in the middle of time, the player can view the first moving image corresponding sound from the position in the middle of time. Therefore, there is a possibility that the user may feel uncomfortable or feel unsatisfactory that there is a portion of the first moving image corresponding sound that has not been watched. On the other hand, according to the characteristic O6, the player can enjoy the first moving image corresponding sound from the temporal start position, so that the uncomfortable feeling given to the player can be reduced, It is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction that all of the first moving image corresponding sounds can be viewed from the temporal start position. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Feature O7]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features O2 to O3,
The gaming machine, wherein the predetermined temporal position of the third moving image is a temporal leading position of the third moving image.

  According to the feature O7, when the display is shifted to the third display mode and the third moving image is displayed, compared to a configuration in which the display is started from a temporally intermediate position of the third moving image, The discomfort given can be reduced. For example, if a configuration in which the display is started from a temporally intermediate position of the third moving image when displaying the third moving image by shifting to the third display mode is adopted, if the player has the third moving image, the third moving image is displayed. Since the user views the moving image from a position in the middle of time, the user may feel uncomfortable or feel unsatisfactory that there is a portion of the third moving image that has not been viewed. On the other hand, according to the feature O7, the player can watch the third moving image from the temporal start position, so that the player can reduce the sense of incongruity given to the player, and can improve the third moving image. Can be given to the player that all of the moving images can be viewed from the temporal start position. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Feature O8]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features O2 to O4,
Sound output means for outputting a moving picture corresponding sound which is a sound corresponding to a moving picture displayed by the image display means,
When the image display means starts displaying the third moving image from the predetermined time position, the sound output means includes a third moving image corresponding sound (demo) corresponding to the third moving image. A game machine that starts outputting from a predetermined time position of music).

  According to the feature O8, the display of the third moving image and the output of the third moving image corresponding sound are easily synchronized as compared with the configuration in which the temporal position at which the output of the third moving image corresponding sound is started fluctuates. be able to. As a result, the quality of the game effect can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved. As a configuration in which the temporal position at which the output of the third moving image corresponding sound starts varies, for example, the predetermined display period of the second display mode ends, and the image display unit displays the third moving image. When the display is started from a predetermined time position, the image display means starts the third moving image sound from the time position of the third moving image corresponding sound immediately before shifting to the second display mode. When shifting to the configuration for starting the output of the moving image corresponding sound or the mode of outputting the third moving image corresponding sound, the image display means displays the time position of the third moving image corresponding sound to start outputting on the second display. A configuration that is determined based on the elapsed time from the shift to the mode, and the reproduction of the third moving image corresponding sound is continued as an internal process even after the image display unit shifts from the third display mode to the second display mode. And the image display means Configured for outputting the third video corresponding sound being played continuously as the internal processing and the like is at the transition from 示態 like the third display mode.

[Feature O9]
The gaming machine according to feature O8,
A gaming machine, wherein the predetermined temporal position of the third moving image corresponding sound is a temporal leading position of the third moving image corresponding sound.

  According to the feature O9, it is possible to reduce a sense of discomfort given to the player as compared with a configuration in which the output of the third moving image corresponding sound is started from a position in the middle of time. For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the output is started from a position in the middle of time of the third moving image corresponding sound, the player can appreciate the third moving image corresponding sound from the position in the middle of time. Therefore, there is a possibility that the user may feel uncomfortable or feel unsatisfactory that there is a portion of the third moving image corresponding sound that has not been watched. On the other hand, according to the feature O9, the third moving image corresponding sound can be viewed from the temporal start position for the player, so that the uncomfortable feeling given to the player can be reduced. It is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction that all of the third moving image corresponding sounds can be viewed from the temporal start position. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

  The inventions of the feature M group, feature N group, and feature O group solve the following problems.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine, various effects are performed for the purpose of improving the interest of the game. For example, a gaming machine that displays a moving image on a display device such as a liquid crystal screen and outputs music corresponding to the moving image from a speaker is known.

  Here, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, further technical improvement is desired for the purpose of enhancing the interest of the game.

  Note that a configuration in which one or a plurality of configurations included in the feature A group to the feature O group are appropriately combined may be applied. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

  Hereinafter, a basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or applied to each of the features will be described.

Pachinko gaming machine: a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a shooting operation by a player, and a starting ball provided in the game area and into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter. Part, information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on that a game ball has entered the starting ball entry part,
A gaming machine comprising: an acquisition information storage unit configured to store special information acquired by the information acquisition unit when a game ball enters the starting ball entry unit.

  Spinning-type gaming machines such as slot machines: provided with a picture display device for variably displaying a plurality of pictures, variably displaying the plurality of pictures is started by the operation of the start operation means, and caused by the operation of the stop operation means A gaming machine in which the variable display of the plurality of pictures is stopped after a predetermined time or a predetermined time has elapsed, and a privilege is given to the player according to the pictures after the stop.

  The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments and modified examples, and can be implemented with various configurations without departing from the spirit thereof. For example, the embodiments corresponding to the technical features in each embodiment described in the summary of the invention, the technical features in the modified examples are for solving some or all of the above-described problems, or In order to achieve some or all of the effects, replacement and combination can be performed as appropriate. If the technical features are not described as essential in this specification, they can be deleted as appropriate.

10 ... Pachinko machine 11 ... Outer frame 12 ... Pachinko machine body 13 ... Inner frame 14 ... Front door frame 15 ... Hinge 16 ... Hinge 17 ... Cylinder lock 18. Window 19 ... Glass unit 20 ... Upper plate 21 ... Lower plate 22 ... Exhaust port 23 ... Lever 24 ... Direction operation button 25 ... Operation handle 30 ... Game board 31 ... Induction rail 31a ... Inner rail part 31b ... Outer rail part 32 ... General winning opening 33 ... First starting opening 34 ... Second starting opening 34a ... Electricity Special accessory 34b ... Electric accessory drive unit 35 ... Thru gate 36 ... Variable winning device 36a ... Big winning opening 36b ... Opening / closing door 36c ... Variable winning drive 37 ... Special Figure unit 37a ... First result display part 37b ... Second result display part 37c ... First reservation display part 37d ... Second reservation display part 38 ... Public figure unit 39 ... Round Display unit 40 ... Variable display unit 41 ... Symbol display unit 41a ... Display surface 41aL ... Display area 41aS ... Display area 42 ... Nail 43 ... Out opening 45 ... Main display section 46 ... Speaker 47 ... Various lamps 51 .. .First control unit 52 ... Second control unit 53 ... Third control unit 54 ... Tank 55 ... Tank rail 56 ... Case rail 60 ... Main controller 61 ... Main Control board 62 ... Main side MPU
63 ... Main ROM
64 ... Main RAM
63a ... Pass / fail table storage area 63b ... Distribution table storage area 63c ... Reach determination table storage area 63d ... Variable time table storage area 63e ... Stop result table storage area 63f ... Command Information storage area 64a: Lottery counter buffer 64b ... Hold information storage area 64c ... Electronic hold area 64d ... Various counter areas 64e ... Various flag storage areas 64f ... Predetermination result Storage area 67a ... Various detection sensors 70 ... Payout control device 71 ... Payout device 80 ... Launch control device 81 ... Game ball launching mechanism 85 ... Power supply device 86 ... Power failure monitoring circuit 90 ... Sound emission control device 91 ... Sound emission control board 92 ... Sound light side MPU
93 ... Sound light side ROM
93a ... production pattern table storage area 93b ... fluctuation display pattern table storage area 94 ... sound light side RAM
94a: Various flag storage areas 94b: Various counter areas 94c: Lottery counter area 96: RTC
100 display controller 101 display control board 102 display MPU
103 ... Program ROM
104 ... Work RAM
106 ... Character ROM
107 ... Video RAM
PA: game area PC: winning counter area AE: execution area Ra: first reserved area Rb: second reserved area

Claims (1)

Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition,
Determining means for determining whether the obtained special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
Notifying means for sequentially notifying the result of the determination by the determining means as to whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition for each game,
When the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, a special game state start unit that starts a special game state in which a bonus is granted to a player after a game round related to the special information that satisfies the predetermined condition,
Effect execution means for executing an effect,
Opening and closing means capable of performing an opening and closing operation, in which a game ball can enter in an open state,
A gaming machine comprising:
The opening and closing means,
The opening and closing operation may be performed a predetermined number of times in the special game state,
The effect executing means,
The special information related to the first game time satisfies the predetermined condition, and the special information related to the second game time executed after the first game time does not satisfy the predetermined condition. In the first case, a special effect is performed in which a continuous effect is performed between a game time executed before the first game time and the first game time, and a special effect is executed after the first game time. In the gaming state, before the start of the second game round executed immediately after the opening / closing means ends the predetermined number of opening / closing operations, the game cycle executed before the first game cycle and the game cycle executed before the start of the second game cycle are started. A case in which at least a part of the continuous effect executed in the first game round is displayed again;
When the special information related to the first game time satisfies the predetermined condition and the special information related to the second game time satisfies the predetermined condition, the first game A continuous effect is performed between the game time executed before the first game time and the first game time, and a period after the special game state executed after the first game time, In the game time executed before the second game time and the second game time, the game time executed before the first game time and the first game time There is a case where at least a part of the executed continuous production is displayed again,
In the second case, a time length obtained by adding a game time executed before the first game time and the first game time, and a time length before the second game time Even if the time length of the game times to be executed is different from the total time of the second game times, at least a part of the continuous effect can be displayed again. A gaming machine.